Subject: Diary of a Season 2012-13

Posted on: August 04 2012 @ 12:14 AM
By: TomM

Content:

I have done this diary of a season for several years. I am back coaching Midget U18 AAA girls hockey. I just found out that we are going from 3 to 2 teams in Calgary. We only have two Bantam U15 teams supplying the three teams which would be ok since there are 3 years of Midget and two of Bantam. Problem we have is there are two sports schools that many players go to. The Edge which is a day school in Calgary and Warner which is a residential campus. They both have High School Varsity and JV teams. This year 8 of our top players are moving to these schools. I guess they get daily practice and dryland and parents think they have a better chance to get scholarships.

I don't know if I agree as 5 of my 6 graduating players have been approached by college programs, one grade 12 is going to a prep school in Ohio and the other still has to finish grade 12 but was drafted by Team Alberta in the CWHL.

I have requested that we move from 2 and sometimes 3 practices a week to 3 and sometimes 4 a week. We also did dryland one night a week last season and I plan to continue that.

So I think there is enough talent to have 2 teams in Calgary that have a chance and can show well at tournaments and attract attention to the players. Edmonton has only one team and has won the last five years. Red Deer was the best team during the regular season last year but we pulled off a huge upset and beat them in 4 games in a best of five series. Edmonton represented our Province Alberta and finished third in the National Championships. (We caught lightning in a bottle for two weekends)

Everything starts Aug. 13 with a week of conditioning camp, a week of tryouts and then a draft to disperse the players from the team that was dropped and the graduating Bantams and the season opener the first weekend after Labour Day. Last year our first league game was Sept. 7.

I will report on what we are doing at practice and whether it was good or not and take some video of us doing some drills, games or shootouts.



Replies:

Re: Diary of a Season 2012-13

Posted on: August 04 2012 @ 12:48 PM
By: Smac

Content:

Hi Tom
I am in Stockholm with my NAA u 21 women's team . Very pleasant experience . Women's hockey is MUCH better than I thought . Love the spirit and compete . The Finnish team has 3 national players . Swedish team is talented as well .
Good luck this year . Will try to get to your game up here vs Thunder ( new coach this year !)

-------------------------------------------------------------
Smac, sounds like fun. I took the Mount Royal Womens Team there 6 years ago and played the top teams in Finland and a select team in Stockholm. The level of hockey there is very good. We went at Christmas time but you are getting the warm weather. I had it arranged to take my WWHL team to Stockholm and train with one of the clubs there but my players couldn't get the time off or wanted to go to beaches on their vacation; so it never happened.

A little advise. If you play in rinks with only one gate in the players box have all five go out the same door. There was one rink like that in Finland.


Re: Diary of a Season 2012-13

Posted on: August 04 2012 @ 07:13 PM
By: Smac

Content:

Lol , we have a one door bench ! Interesting changes for sure . Some jump over .
Heading to Prague Monday for "open " women's tourney .
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The old town of Prague is great. Charles Bridge the clock and some of the most beautiful women in the world.


Pre-season camp and draft

Posted on: August 09 2012 @ 01:34 PM
By: TomM

Content:

It all starts on Saturday. I meet with the coach of the other Calgary team. We have gone from 3 to 2 teams and I am the only returning coach. Leah Copeland was the captain of the U of Alberta and has coached for a few years before returning to Calgary. We are going to meet to plan who runs which practices the next three weeks.

Week one: a conditioning camp for 5 days. There will be two 75 min. sessions per night with 25 in each session. Some of the better players are practicing with a group that is going to a tournament on the east coast in the USA, so they won't be in the conditioning camp.

Week two and three is the tryouts. There are 9 practices and that is followed by a draft. Last year we could protect 8 skaters and one goalie. There is a meeting Sunday morning to decide how we are going to disperse the players from the suspended team. I have suggested we divide the city into two regions to make it easier for the players to get to and from practice and avoid going thru the middle of the rush hour traffic. I don't think they are going that way. We usually practice right after school and Calgary is one of the largest land area cities in the world because most people live in single dwelling houses with yards, so it is really spread out.

So the teams will be in place by the end of August. I guess we have to start so early by Canadian standards because there is a National Championship and the playoff to get there take so long.

I talked with the coach of the Edge sports school and we agreed to have some specialty team scrimmages together once we are both organized.
-----------------------------
The national U22 and U18 womens teams have been having a selection camp the last week at Canada Olympic Park as well as the womens teams from Norway and Kazakstan. I have watched a lot of the practices and took clips of many of the practices. I really enjoyed the Kazakstan practice. They have a few good players but overall are pretty weak with some looking like they haven't played a long time. The coaching style is very different with drills combined with a lot of controlled scrimmage where the coach stops the play and corrects things. The Canadian practices have been more like a hockey school with simple drills, circuits and skill instruction. They have intra squad games every nigh for the evaluation.


Conditioning Camp

Posted on: August 12 2012 @ 10:32 PM
By: TomM

Content:

We have conditioning camp next week. Two sessions per night with 25 skaters in 2 groups of 12-13 skaters and 2 goalies. 75 minute practices Monday to Friday. I plan the M-W-F (first one Friday).

I have attached my practice plan and hope we can accomplish it. They will get lots of skating, passing, shooting and game situation and with the high volume of activity they will be tired.

I have sent the plan to my staff and the other head coach.


ice time one

Posted on: August 14 2012 @ 04:37 AM
By: TomM

Content:

We had our first night of practice and I ran both sessions. There were 25 skaters in the first and 21 in the second. A girl from Italy is practicing with us and thought she could do both sessions but she skated so much in the first one that she was too tired to do two.\\

As usual I made a few changes to the plan. We had a 2-2 and 3 - 3 quick transition game at each end instead of the 5-5 and 6-6 skill games. Ice time one it was two 3-3 games and ice time two one of each. We also added a 3-2 to the transition game. The first session we played 5-5 and they changed on their own and the second was 4-4.

I was pleasantly surprised at the skill level of the new players trying out. We should be ok.


GHC U18 Conditioning Camp - Aug. 15, 2012

Posted on: August 15 2012 @ 08:06 PM
By: TomM

Content:

This is my practice plan for tonights two ice times in our pre-season conditioning camp.
-----------------------------------------------
GHC U18 Conditioning Camp
Practice Plan
Date: Aug. 15, 2012 Time: 6 and 7:30 pm Venue:
Lines: Notes:
Goal is to skate and pass with lots of touches And to play in many game situations.
Groups of 24 and 21. Both with 2 goalies.


10 minutes

A2 Skating Warm up-Edges and Balance Position
Key Points:
Be in a good athletic positon with the knees bent, back upright and lead with the chest and head up. Use all of the edges.
Description: Exercises use the inside and outside edges, proper body position both forward and backward as well as a one skate exercise that requires a good balance position and use of all of the edges.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20110423080435937

10 min.
B6 Pass and Replace x 3
Key Points:
Pass while skating then turn and face the player who is passing to you. Shoot before the hash marks and follow the shot for a rebound.
Description:
A. 1 pass to 2 and follow the pass and turn and face 5 for a pass.
B. 2 pass to 3 and follow the pass.
C. 3 pass to 4 and follow the pass.
D. 4 skate in and shoot-rebound- go to the corner.
# Do 2 or 3 minutes from each side. Alternate task by requiring backhand or saucer passes or a move before passing , etc.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20110413082013321

10 min.
B500 Overspeed 2-0 with a Pass
Key Points:
Players must challenge themselves out of their comfort zone. Make as many moves as possible and continue until they have shot and looked for a rebound. Take the pass and shoot right away without over handling.
Description:
1. Line up along boards on one side.
2. Players 1 and 2 start on the goal line.
3. Players 3 and 4 leave and make moves at top speed.
4. Coach whistle every 7" and they players attack the net.
5.Closest attacker give and go with 1 or 2.
6. Second closest do a tight turn then give and go with 1 o 2.
7. With only one goalie go one way only.
8. After passing return to the back of the line.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20111004075623113

10 min.
B5 Loose Puck Battles
Key Points:
-Players should protect themselves while going into the corners. Don't skate straight in toward the
boards.
-Contact each other before getting the puck to gain position.
-Protect the puck with the body and use quick strides to escape.
-Attack with a good move and defend with tight gaps.
Description;
Players are lined up across the red line and the coach or coaches in the middle with pucks. One
team to each side of the coach.
1. The coach dumps the puck into the corner and the first player on each line races to get the
puck, then the coach dumps a puck into the other corner and the next players race to the puck.
2. Whichever player wins the battle in the corner skates out over the blueline and thru the middle
circle then attacks the original end while the other player defends. This happens at both ends of
the ice.
3. As soon as the rush is over another puck is dumped into the corner.
4. Situations like 2-1, 2-2, 3-2, 3-3 can also be used.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20080720174241795

13 min.
DT400 Perry Pearn Game Rotation
Key Points:
This game allows the coach to focus on the attack or defending deep in the zone. You can play this game in situations from 1-1 to 5-5. It is a great rotation to practice specialty teams if you have 3 lines because it gives the players some rest and they alternate between pp and pk (one F would leave the zone) The defenders have to clear the zone with control of the puck. With situations over a 3 on 3 I would move the resting players back to the far blue line.
Description:
1. Players line up within a stick length of the red line if you have 2 groups or only ½ ice; otherwise behind the red or far blue line.
2. Three players attack three defenders.
3. Defenders must carry the puck out of the zone before passing to team waiting team mates.
4. Three new players attack vs the original offensive players.
5. Keep score, implement skill (only forehand passes) or team play rules (goals originate from below the goal line).

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090726102318992

15 min.
D100 Two Second Game
Key Points:
Players must switch right away from offense to defense to loose puck and constantly change roles from, 1-puck carrier, 2-puck support, 3-check puck carrier, 4-cover away from the puck.
Description:
1. Play a full ice game of 3-3, 4-3, 4-4, 5-4, 5-5, 6-5 with the extra players on the bench.
2. Play 45" shifts and pass back to your goalie when the coach whistles for a change.
3. Players can only have the puck for 2" and must make a play, gain a zone or shoot.
4. Possession from first touching the puck for over 2" leave the puck for the other team.
5. Encourage talking, facing the puck, always give a target.
*Don't blow the whistle if they have started shooting. Start time when the goalie gets puck. Keep score and losing or winning have a consequence.
Below is an example of a two second game but with only one goalie.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20110612133904232

E1 Change on the Go with Pass Shootout Key Points: Players should work on selling the fake, change of pace and making the goalie move first. The goalie must time his retreat into the net to keep good angles on shots and cover the goal line on dekes. Description: 1. Players are in the box and one puck on each blue line for every player.
2. Player from each team leaves the box and tries to score.
3. If they score they race to the box and touch the boards and then the next player can leave.
4. If they don't score they pass to the next player who comes out of the box.
5. Losing team do something for every goal they lose by.
*To make it realistic the goalie should practice starting from the goal line and coming out.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120415181657595






one addition to Wed. practice

Posted on: August 16 2012 @ 02:05 PM
By: TomM

Content:

The players were doing the exercises so well on Wednesday night that I added the Finnish U17 passing warm-up after the pass and replace drill. The two goalies worked with my asst. coaches for 10 min. while we did it.
-----------------------------

B Skills Warm up Finnish U17


Key Points: This is a great way to warm everyone up at the start of a practice. Defense do the various breakout options and read where the pressure is coming from. Pass the puck back to the coach and move thru everyone. Forwards pass with good technique and eye contact. Goalie coach work on technique and rebound control.


Description

A. Defense work with two doing breakout options vs one forechecker.

B. Forwards lines of 3 work in the neutral zone.

1 - Stationary pass with eye contact.

2 - Pass while moving always face puck.

3 - #8 around partners give and go.

4 - Keepaway 2-1 in four areas.

5 - Two lines move and pass to other two lines on the blue line.

6 - Two lines of 3 pass while skating on one side of the neutral zone.

7- I added 3-3 keepaway with original groups playing each other. They kept score by getting one point for making 5 passes in a row.

C. Goalies work with coach at one end.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20120418122055838



Tryouts and Arenas

Posted on: August 19 2012 @ 10:05 PM
By: TomM

Content:

I was just putting our practice schedule into my phone. I was wondering where a few of the arenas are so I looked up the webiste for Calgary Arenas. http://www.hockeycalgary.ca/arena I count 66 indoor hockey rinks. We have at least three times that many outdoor rinks. Wow.

Our tryout week starts tonight. Two 90 minute ice times run by other coaches while we watch. The players are in 4 teams of about 15 and practice together and scrimmage while we evaluate. Sun, Mon. Tues, Fri. Sat and a prospect game on Sunday followed by a draft.

We are going from 3 teams to 2 so after the second practice we have a dispersal draft of the defunct teams players and will pick up 5 each. After Tuesdays practice we turn in the names of 6-8 skaters from our last years team along with those new players picked up in the dispersal draft. We have 6 returning skaters and 2 returning goalies but can protect only one.

Players are chosen for the Prospect Game on Sunday night followed by a draft. Draft order is by lottery. The draft goes 1-2, 2-1, 1-2, 2-1, 1-2 and then if one team protected less players than the other they chose one or two players and then the draft continues with the other team. We then get 30 minutes right after the draft to make trades

We chose 20 skaters and 3 goalies who try out (along with 2 affiliate players who don't try out). We have to cut down to 17 skaters and 2 goalies after that.

So the next week is to try to make sure that the players who deserve to make this level are selected. This is their Jr. A as they go to university right out of this league. In boy's hockey the players usually play a few years of junior first.


Re: Diary of a Season 2012-13

Posted on: August 20 2012 @ 03:11 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Last night Leah Copeland ran a very good first tryout session. There were two practices with the group divided into 4 teams and each practice was 90 minutes long.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120820095218907 is a five minute video clip of most of the drills and games.
- warm up skate and pass and battle.
- passing and shooting.
- 1-1
- cross ice 2-2 x 2
- cross ice 1-1 and pass to add players x 2
- nets back to back 4-4 x 2
- full ice 4-4


Tryouts are over

Posted on: August 27 2012 @ 03:04 AM
By: TomM

Content:

Finished up two weeks of conditioning camp and then tryouts with a prospects game tonight. We had protected the max of 8 players and them 7. We had to draft 20 skaters and 3 goalies.

We got 4 of the top 6 D in our rankings and the 2 and 4 top forwards. We had the first choice in the goalie draft and ended up with our goalies from last year plus a tryout one. We have a few weeks to choose 17 skaters and 2 goalies. Our season starts Sept. 15.

I picked a D first overall and then they took the two top forwards. I took forwards 3 and 4. They took a D and a F and I took 1 D and then the picks alternated. We ended up with 7 players who tried out for D and 5 who tried out for forward.

So now there is competition for the 5 forward and 3 D spots. We have to keep the 8 players we protected 5 F and 3 D.

This is a perfect group for the Tsunami and I had that in mind when drafting.

I am waiting to have the phone numbers sent so I can inform the players they are now Flyers.

First practice is tomorrow then Wed. Thurs and the long weekend off.


Monday Practice one

Posted on: August 27 2012 @ 11:12 PM
By: TomM

Content:

We have our first practice tonight. We will start with defensive zone coverage.

Aug. 26 Flyers Practice Plan Aug 26

Date: Time:6:30-8 Venue: ectas

Dress in team colours
Dzone focus

10 min.

A2 Skating Warm up-Edges and

10 min.B6 – 3 Shots, 3 Zig zags, 3 Shots

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20091019154513105

10 min.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120416092419455

20 minutes
T4 Teaching Defensive Zone Coverage 2-1-2


12 min.
Continuous 2-2, 3-2 All play F and all play D

one colour on each side.

DT100 Continuous 3-2
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20100821122112111

10 min
B Skills Warm up Finnish U17

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/filemgmt/indexphp?id=88

13 min.
T2 T4 D100 Shinny All Play


7 min.
E1 Shootout Race 1 Key Points Players

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080723063235226

Finish with a team meeting in the empty dressing
room.

----------------------------------------------------------
The practice went well. We accomplished what I wanted which was to introduce protecting the slot and everyone covering one player.
We introduced ourselves as coaches and then went around the room and everyone said who they were, where they played last season and one thing they would like to accomplish. All the players can play at the U18 AAA level and the sad thing is that I have to cut 4 of them in a few week. We now have 20 skaters and 3 goalies and can only carry 17 and 2. They will go to A level and be our affiliates unless the other team picks them up.


Flyers Aug. 29-12

Posted on: August 29 2012 @ 05:54 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Our system is going to be 'Total Hockey', the players will have Home Positions where they start at the faceoff but will have to be able to play Every Position. This means that every player must be able to skate forward and backward, to make passes, take passes, cover low, cover the point, be in on the attack, backcheck, recognize who to cover. etc. Big challenge for the coaches is to teach All Skills to All the Players.
The players will be challenged to become Complete Players.
------------------------------------------------
Flyers Practice Plan Date: Aug. 29, 2012

Time: 4-5:30 Venue: ECTAS

Theme of the practice is breakouts. Fitness and player evaluation in game situations.

Missing 2 D and one F in USA tournament.

10 min.
A200 Skating Warm-up for Edges and Balance with a Puck and Shot

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20111005152108885

10 min.
D4 Two Pass

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20120104090932478

10 min.
B6 1-0, 2-0, 3-0 Small Horseshoe

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20120301081936833

5 min.
B5 Murdoch Breakout Routine A and B

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20080720200745971

5 min.
B5 Murdoch Breakout Routine C and D

5 min.
B5 Murdoch Breakout Routine E and F

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20080720200746400

12 min.
D100 Two 1 on 1 Games at Once

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080719153346728

8 min.
E1 Rebound Game

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080723202833407

15 min.
D100 Total Hockey 1-1 to a 3-2

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090726102316489

8 min.
E1 Gambling Shootout

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20111004080315971

2 minutes – get pucks – meet in the middle.



Flyers - Aug. 30 Practice

Posted on: August 30 2012 @ 03:13 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Flyers Practice Plan
Date: Aug. 30 Time: 5-6:30 Venue: ECTAS
Lines: Notes:
16 players Theme is the offensive triangle.
Skill – Big moves with the puck and pass while skating and one timers.
-----------------------

15 min.
A200 Big Moves _ Russian Warm-up
Increase the size of the moves by reaching as far as possible with the puck. Separate the movement of the upper and lower body by skating away from the puck. Players must be able to handle the puck under control around and through their body.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080722140651119

10 min.
B6 Jursi Skate-Pass-Shoot
Key Points:
This is a drill that Russian Olympic coach Vladimir Jursinov used when I was coaching with him in Austria. The goal is to get players to practice passing and shooting while they skate. Puck handling-passing-shooting should be seamless.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120227085711281

10 min.
D4 Two Pass Game with only Forehand Passes
Key Points:
This game causes a few things to happen. Transition from puck carrier to pass support, checking the puck carrier to covering away from the puck happen very quickly. The puck carrier must use pivoting, escape moves and puck protection skills to pass on the forehand and everyone must face the puck and give a target.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20111005184904487

15 min.
T2 – B5 Offensive Triangle
Start with 2 players and the pass to the far post then 3 players and the flat triangle.
B5 Cross and Drop Sequence
Key Points:
Players are inside the middle circle. Two players skate around and cross and drop then 2 from the other group leave.
Leave the puck when dropping and the second player skate behind. Return to line from the wide lanes to avoid collisions.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20091019154512198

20 min.
T2 - D100 – 4 on 4 – Controlled Scrimmage.
Play a 4-4 with the players changing on their own.
-Focus is the offensive triangle. Third player must join the play at the top of the triangle.
-Freeze on the coaches whistle.

10 min.
B500 One Timers
Key Points:
Square up for the shot and have the stick back as the pass is being made. Follow through with the whole body to the net and the lead knee pointing to the target.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20090812164222165

10 min.
E1 Change on the Go with Pass Shootout Key Points: Players should work on selling the fake, change of pace and making the goalie move first. The goalie must time his retreat into the net to keep good angles on shots and cover the goal line on dekes. http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120415181657595



Flyers Sept. 4 Practice

Posted on: September 04 2012 @ 03:59 PM
By: TomM

Content:

This is a 90 minute ice session. I still have 20 skaters and 3 goalies. 3 skaters were at a tournament in New Hampshire last week which was our first week of practice. I want to review the dzone and the 2-0, 3-0 attack options that they missed and take advantage of the ability to do 5-5 full ice with a continuous 3-2 where the players must recongnize coverage. We also have to make decisions on 3 more skaters and one goalie to get down to 17 and 3.
----------------------------
Flyers
Practice Plan
Date: Sept. 4, 2012 Time: 7:00 pm Venue: Southland
Lines: Notes:
20 skaters and 3 goalies Teaching Point:
Review teaching points from last week. Transition game to review dzone and attack.
Dzone coverage Identify coverage 1-2-3-4-5
Net drive of F2
Offensive triangle
--------------------
10 min.
B4 Crossover Skating and Skills
Key Points:
This is a great skating and puck handling warm up drill. Many variations can be used with the puck or in skating tasks.
Do a different skill in each zone. Keep the feet moving it is crossover in large #8's and not tight turns. You can also do as a B6 and start out of opposite corners.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20120418155124444
-----------------------------------------
15 min. Review 2-0 and 3-0 Net Drive+ Flat Triangle.
B5 Cross and Drop Sequence
Key Points:
Players are inside the middle circle. Two players skate around and cross and drop then 2 from the other group leave.
Leave the puck when dropping and the second player skate behind. Return to line from the wide lanes to avoid collisions.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20091019154512198
-----------------------------
20 min. Total
T2-T4 Defensive Zone Coverage or Offensive Zone Attack
Practice Tom one zone and Sean in the other.

Key Points:
It is a combined man to man – zone defense. Tight man to man on the player with the puck and any player in the slot. Zone defense with the head on a swivel, stick in the passing lane and a Man-You-Puck triangle to stay aware of your man. If someone loses a 1-1 then the support player plays a 2-1 defending the puck carrier and his man.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20110915103627656
-----------------------------
10 minutes
D400 Transition Game of Low Battles with Point Support
Key Points:
Great game to practice cycling, going to the net, screening, tipping, point shots, shot pass, one timers on offense. On defense you have the low zone coverage and communication skills. As well as individual techniques like sealing the stick to the outside, tying up
sticks, boxing out, switching, all from the defensive side.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090726102317243
------------------------------
15 minutes DT100 Continous 2-1 to 3-3, 2-2 to 4-4, 3-2 to 5-5 in the defensive zone.
Focus on Dzone coverage entering the zone and covering one player each man on man and zone.
8 D and 12 F
---------------------------
5 Min.
DT100 Continuous 2-1
Key Points:
New players don't leave the line-up until the puck enters the offensive zone. On dump outs no one change but go back and regroup with the same players. Changes occur when the puck is over the offensive blue line or controlled over the defensive blue line.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090726085539822
--------------------------------------
5 min.
DT100 Continuous 2 on 2
Key Points:
Forwards cover D and D cover F's. One D should join the attack to create triangles. Defenders play tight gaps and attackers create 2
on 1's on the rush.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080719141210845
------------------------------------------------------
5 min.
DT100 Continuous 3-2
Key Points:
New players don't leave the line-up until the puck enters the offensive zone. On dump outs no one change but go back and regroup with the same players. Changes occur when the puck is over the offensive blue line or controlled over the defensive blue line.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20100821122112111
-------------------------------------------------
10 Min. Everyone Rotate Shooting and Screen
B6 Point Shots
Key Points:
Skate forward inside the dot before pivoting to. Shoot low for a tip in or rebound. One time the second shot in option two. Hit the net. Everyone practice this skill.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20120430093036462
----------------------------------
8 min.
DT400 Active Jokers at Point
Key Points
Each team has two jokers at the point. Introduce the game allowing jokers to check jokers and then add that jokers can come in for one timer shots.
This transition game creates three situations. In the first part the players at the point must get open and take a shot or make a pass. The defender practices covering the point. In the second part add that the jokers at the point can come in for a one timer shot
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120603101824103
---------------------------------------------------
2 min. Pucks, Summary, team in middle


Flyers Practice Plan Date: Sept. 6, 2012

Posted on: September 06 2012 @ 03:42 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Flyers Practice Plan Date: Sept. 6, 2012 Time: 20:15 - 21:30 Venue: WMP

Notes:
19 players – one coach will have to participate to make 4 groups of 5.
- Themes – stick on the puck
- Tsunami Forecheck 2-1-2 with a pinch on the Weak side.


10 min.
A200 Russian Puck Handling – Fake Shots and Finnish with a Shot
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/search.php

12 min. Rotate after 6 min.
DT400 1-1, 2-2, Support-Attack-Defend
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20090726104059741

10 min.
B500 Defensive Side with Stick on the Puck
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090817105910820

25 Minutes: Tsunami 2-1-2 Forecheck
T4 - TSUNAMI Forecheck 2-1-2 Wide Pressure
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=2011091410270183

Tsunami – First 10 minutes walk through with everyone then one group at each end.
T2 – T4 Team Play Practice Buildup

Second 10 minutes
T4 - Teaching the Forecheck

15 min.

D100 ControlledScrimmage 45” shifts – pass to goalie on the whistle.

- Rule – dump the puck in at the red line and do the Tsunami forecheck.

3 min.
Players get the pucks
Meet in the middle
Players gather together.

-------------------------------------------------------
The players did the Tsunami very well. I had to change the instruction to one end because one of the players had her wisdon teeth out and missed and another got sick and had to leave. I had coaches play during the scrimmage so we could have two lines. The players said it is very hard to get out of the zone against such a hard forecheck.
I cut down to 17 skaters and 2 goales at the end of practice. First practice with the official team tonight. I have to plan it later as my appointment at the bank is in 35 minutes.




Re: Diary of a Season 2012-13

Posted on: September 08 2012 @ 02:21 PM
By: TomM

Content:

This is Friday nights practice. I was busy all day and didn't have time to post it. Now the players all have a pretty good understanding of what we do in the powerplay. It is a lot easier to teach specialty teams if you have at least 20 skaters. We broke into three groups.
---------------------------------------
Flyers Practice Plan Date: Sept. 7, 2012 Time:17:15-18:30 Venue: Fairview
Notes:
Power play instruction.
16 skaters in 3 groups.
Slot set to a 1-3-1
Breakout regular controlled.

7 min.
B2 Transition Skate Shooting

8 min.
C1, 2-0 Skate Inside and Pass Wide
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20111103221221695

15 min.
DT400 Ali, Bobbi-Jo Two Net Game
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/mediaphp?f=0&sort=0&s=20101222074135633

13 min.
T2 Power Play Instruction

15 min.
T2 Kingston Rotation

12 min.
TD400 Specialty Team Scrimmage

5 min.
E1 Shootout 2 Shots
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20100913081322146

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20100913081621644
2 min.

Get pucks and summary.
Parent meeting.


2.5 hour practice.

Posted on: September 08 2012 @ 07:57 PM
By: TomM

Content:

We have a 2.5 hour slot and tried to get a game but every team was busy so we are having a two part practice. First part is skills and go over our one short pk rotation. Second part is a tournament.
-----------------------------------------------------------
Flyers - Practice Plan - Date: Sept. 8, 2012 Time: 19:30-22:00 Bowness
16 skaters and 2 goalies in 2 groups of 8
Team picture
Go over one short pk. Second half play a tournament and keep track of wins.
-----------------------------------------
I changed the practice around quite a bit and this is what I substituded.
---------------------------------------------------------------------

First Half

15 min. Team Picture -10 minutes instead

10 min.
A2 Balance and Edges no puck.

Vets lead.

10 min.
A200 Big Moves with a shot. - Two one zone games of 2 pass instead and switched teams halfway.

10 Minutes
Intro to penalty Kill on board and demo.


15 min.
Walk Through Pk -we spent 25 minutes. Our pk is much more aggressive than the players are used to.
-------------------------------------------------------------------
Part Two

15 min.
Flood the ice.

Go over pk rotation in the dressing room during the ice flood.

Tournament White Vs Dark All wins count in team total.

15 min.
TD400 Specialty Team Scrimmage - this was going so well that I spent 20 minutes scrimmaging 5-4 but instead of on one net we did a full ice 5-5 with the last forward back staying in the nzone so it was 5-4 at each end.

15 min.
2 games 6’ each. I replaced these two games with a game of 4-4 at each end. They played 10 minutes the first game the rule was 'there must be at least 3 strides to open ice before you can shoot or pass' We switched teams around and then played another ten minute game where you had to make an escape move before they could pass or shoot. I demode some escape moves. They really worked at these games. I have attached a diagram of the D4 game.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080723165245685

15 min.
White vs Dark – Keep Score We didn't do this one (next practice)
C3 – 3-0, 3-1, 3-2 for 12’


10 min.
Keep Score with white shooting at one end and dark at the other.
B500 One Timers

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20090812164222165

Losing team one circle for every point they lost by. --I added after shooting go to between has and there could be a one touch to there and a one touch shot.

10 minutes. Individual skill practice. Players work on what they want to focus on and coaches help them. Didn't have time for this.

Get pucks.
Summarize
Cheer in middle circle


Flyers Practice 9-11-12 and league schedule

Posted on: September 11 2012 @ 05:22 PM
By: TomM

Content:

We will finish the big ideas on team play tonight and cover killing penalties 2 short vs one and two players at the point. I also have attached our league schedule which starts this weekend.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Post practice comment.
We did everything but the double cross and drop drill. I have only 4 returning skaters and it took a little longer to got through the pk and I had them do the scrimmage longer. A few times I stopped the scrimmage to correct big mistakes. I also changed the shootout so 2 races were happening at once. Two coaches passed the puck and the players raced from both bluelines and turned at the red line. You don't need pylons. They switched ends after racing so the practices turning both ways.
My asst. coach was late and pretty shook up when he got there. A girl was killed crossing the above ground subway tracks about 15 seconds in front of him. He saw her under the train and called the emergency number and told the driver not to move the train. Pretty traumatic.
Tonight we will have an off ice session at an outdoor rink and use it to review and play a little ball hockey. Next week we will start spin class on bikes. The place we went last year has moved and increased the price from $150 to $250 a session; so I am in the process of finding a new venue to train.
-----------------------------------------------------------

Flyers Practice Plan
Date: Sept. 11, 2012 Time: 18:30 SAIT
Lines: 17 skaters 8 D, 9 F, 3 G
Theme is the two short pk
Ind. Skills - Shooting – passing – one touch
Situations 3-0, 3-1, 3-2

8 min.
A300 Puck Handling Moves With a Shot

8 min.
B6 One Touch x 3 and Shoot
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120226094511455

12 min
C3 15 Goal 3-0 3-1, 3-2

10 min – Walk Through
Penalty Killing 2 Short vs the Spreador Overload Power Play

10 min.
T4 Penalty Kill Two Short vs Diamond or Umbrella

10 minutes
D100 Specialty Team Scrimmage

9 min.
B600 Double Cross and Pass
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090823205117104

7 min.
E1 Shootout Race – Sweden Checking 1
https://skydrive.live.com/?cid=bd6fa116988317e9#cid=BD6FA116988317E9&id=BD6FA116988317E9%213934

1 min. get pucks and cheer in centre


Re: Diary of a Season 2012-13

Posted on: September 13 2012 @ 03:08 AM
By: TomM

Content:

Tonight we had an off ice practice on an outdoor rink. It was a really nice evening and we started at 7. The sun was going down by 8 and it was chilling off. The players enjoyed it. We did some shooting, puck handling and passing and then we played two games. The first was 4-4 and 5-5 with 2 minute shifts but if you were scored on the other line replaced you. The second game had the waiting players as jokers behind the nets and on the sides the rule was you had to pass to at least one joker before scoring.

Flyers Outdoor Skill Training

U18 Girl's Team practices outside.
1. Wrist shots.
2. Slap shots.
3. Puck-handling.
4. Passing.
5. Games.



http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120912220210591


Flyers Practice Plan Sept. 13-9-12

Posted on: September 13 2012 @ 11:05 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Flyers Practice Plan Date: Sept. 13, 2012

Time: 20:00 Max Bell 2
17 skaters 2 G

Focus:
Hinge, cycle, breakout options, cut backs,Goalie technique


7 min.
B6 – 3 Shots, 3 Zig zags, 3 Shots
Key Points:
3 Leave from diagonal corners about 2" apart, skate around circle then shoot, get a pass from the other corner, skate 3 zig zags betweeen the blue line and the top of the cricles the fill the 3 lanes and shoot.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20091019154513105

10 min.
DT400 Active Jokers at Point
Key Points
Each team has two jokers at the point. Introduce the game allowing jokers to check jokers and then add that jokers can come in for one timer shots. This transition game creates three situations. In the first part the players at the point must get open and take a shot or make a pass. The defender practices covering the point. In the second part add that the jokers at the point can come in for a one timer shot

20 min.
B Defensemen Breakout and Forward Attack Skills
Key Points:
Defense do the various breakout options and read where the pressure is coming from. Forwards work with their lines on cycle and and goalies with coach.

8 min.
B600 Double Cross and Pass
Key Points:
Make hard passes. Players should face the puck give a target and keep their feet moving.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090823205117104

10 min.
B600 Regroup, Hinge, Quick Up-Detroit
Key Points:
Hinge and push the puck up the ice quickly. Strong side F stretch and weak side give middle support.
We will change the drill a little and have everyone playing F and D
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20101128092923497

10 min.
D1 Controlled Scrimmage
Key Points:
Change on their own and practice the Tsunami and the Break out under pressure.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090824224310861

10 min.
E1, 2 on 0 Shootout Race
Key Points:
Work on shooting one timers and scoring on rebounds. Good habits like face the puck, give a target with the stick on the ice. We will change it a little by having the play continue and count the successes in a certain time.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20101223080124158






Re: Diary of a Season 2012-13

Posted on: September 15 2012 @ 05:05 AM
By: TomM

Content:

This practice went really well. 17 skaters and 2 goalies. It was 90 minutes long. We did some position specific drills and worked on offensive team play concepts like the breakout, power play, cut backs and going to the net and point shots.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Flyers Practice Plan Date: 14-09-12 Time: 18:45-20:15 Venue: Southland

FocusBreakouts, pp, shooting, goalie pass, Faceoffs, cutbacks, D join play


10 min.
A200 Skating Warm-up for Edges and Balance with a Puck and Shot

Key Points:
Good players can move in all directions efficiently because they and use all edges and have great balance on the ice.
Routines for skating, puck handling, shooting and passing are efficient ways for a coach to quickly review the
foundation skills and allow the players to get a lot of reps and improve at their own rate. Do these skating exercises
with a puck.
mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20111005152108885

10 min.
G-B600 Goalie Pass and 1-0 U22

Key Points:
Hit the net so the goalie can make the save and then make a breakout pass. Give good targets on the wall and time with the other side so goalies have time to pass between shots.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120903100000853

20 minutes Two 10’ Games 2-2
DT400 Perry Pearn Game Rotation
Key Points:
This game allows the coach to focus on the attack or defending deep in the zone. You can play this game in situations from 1-1 to 5-5. It is a great rotation to practice specialty teams if you have 3 lines because it gives the players some rest and they alternate between pp and pk (one F would leave the zone) The defenders have to clear the zone with control of the puck. With situations over a 3 on 3 I would move the resting players back to the far blue line.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090726102318992

12 min.
B600 Regroup, Hinge, Middle D Rush

Key Points:
Middle D comes late as a second wave and lead the rush.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=201011280928188

12 min. Kingston Power Play Rotation
Rotate pp-breakout-pp-rest.

Key Points; Practice the power play options with a shot every 3".

10 min.
C3 Breakout 5-0, regroup 5-0, attack 3-2

Key Points:
One stretch, one middle support and one wall support.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090818155505340

10 min.
Individual Practice
D at with Sean Shots from the point:


Forwards
B7 Face-off Practice-Washington

Key Points:
Watch the puck all the time. Read what the other player is going to do by how they hold the stick and where their team mates are. Practice winning clean and scrambling the draw.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20101210084123920

Forwards
B500 Cut Backs and Escape Moves

Key Points:
Protect the puck with the body on offense. Cut back turning toward the boards. Defender stay lined up with the back of the inside shoulder and stick on the puck.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=2011041612155482

7 min. E1 Rebound
Key Points:
Make quick shots and one timers and goalie read the play.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=2009082017244462






Famous International Coaches talk about team play

Posted on: September 15 2012 @ 04:05 PM
By: TomM

Content:

I brought in some famous international coaches to talk about team play and I have sent the links to my team for review.

Flyer Team Play Video:

Girl’s and parents who are interested, at great expense I brought in some famous international coaches to talk about team play. I have also attached a pdf on penalty killing principles.

Videos:

Famous Finnish Coach Mikko talks about defensive zone coverage. First 7 minutes using a white board and then he uses a 3 dimensionsl magnetic board.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20110915091504119

Tsunami Forecheck:Jaroslav a famous coach from the Czech Republic shows how you can forecheck aggressively using the concepts of Total Hockey. 1-2-3-4-5 read and react.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=2011091410270183

Three dimensional description of Tsunami.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=2011091422180855

Penalty killing principles vs a power play with 2 players at the point.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20110917210616605

NHL Coach Killing vs a Diamond 1-3-1 Use Fall under. We will probably only see the umbrella and then the second F can be on one side and the D on the other side goes out.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120521102728277


Take care,

Coach Tom
-------------------------------------------------------------
I didn't send below to my team but added it here.

I was searching the videos for the team play ones and came across some material I did when I first started this site. It brought back some good memories of some of the great kid's I have coached over the years.

I did the first video in 1998 when I was coaching an 85 born spring team. I had them for 2 years with the agreement that we practiced a lot and only played a few tournament.

The parents agreed and we had 10 weekends where we had 2 x 90 minute practices each Sat. and Sunday andwe played one ex game and two tournaments in the 12 weeks. We finished the first weekend of July so they had the summer off. This also allowed them to play other sports. So in two springs I had them on the ice for 120 hours of practice, which is time to accomplish something.

It is probably the group I am most proud of coaching. Every player but one made at least Jr. A and four of the forwards are still playing pro.

Aaron Lee – played NCAA at Alaska and is the all team leading scorer for the Rio Grande Killer Bees. He just went to Germany to play.

Ryan Duncan – won Hobey Baker at North Dakota, his 5’ 6” 160 lbs. doesn’t appeal to the NHL. He played last year in the AHL and this year has returned to the Red Bulls in Austria.

Jeremy Colliton – won a World U20 Championship with the famous 04 Canadian Team and has been up and down between the NHL Islanders and their AHL team.

Mason Raymond – went to U of Minn. Duluth and then onto the NHL Vancouver Canucks where he has been in a Stanley Cup final and played for Canada in the IIHF Worlds.

Mason and Ryan are the two smallest guys in the transiton video. Mason grew late to 6’ but Ryan never had the big growth spurt.

Team Play Whiteboard Talk
Tom Molloy goes over team play concepts.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080726234725123

Continuous 1-1
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090726085538618

Continuous 2-1
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090726085539822



15-09-12 Practice

Posted on: September 16 2012 @ 02:52 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Wanted to review all of the team play and teach face-off alignment. Fifth day in a row and we play our first game of the season Sunday, so it was a good time for an instruction practice that wasn't too intense. We polled the team asking each one to give us 4 players they thought would be good captain. It wasn't a vote but we want to make sure the players the coaches think would be the best captains are mentioned. I wouldn't want to pick a captain that no one mentioned. Coaches and players were on the same page and we announced the captain and 3 asst.

Following practice the players had a babeque and and the team met to form a 'Team Covenant'. This is one of the most important things a team can do. They set the goals and the rules themselves and we will refer to it if there are any problems in the next six or seven months. (I have attached an example from Bob Murdoch's pro team in Germany)

I have never started a season with zero exhibition games before. We play a team that won 7-5 last night and has two sisters that are already committed to university hockey for next year and got 3 points each last night.
----------------------------
Result: Lost 2-3. but played well for our first game of the season. We only have 4 returning skaters and they have 10 and were a top team last year. We outshot them 36-25 but didn't finish our chances. One of my returning F's got 11 shots and one goal. They got the winner with about 4 minutes left. 5-5 we each socred one, 5-4 each one and 5-3 they scored. We have 9 F and 8 D, so I played one pair of D on wing and rotated a centre with them each period. I just rolled the lines until the last 2 minutes.

We have to get everyone into the game situations so we have to bite the bullet instead of having pp and pk units. Ideally everyone will be able to play all even and odd situations by the end of the season. In elimination situtations like playoffs or tournaments I will do more bench coaching. We have 6-97born, 6-96 born and 5-95 born skaters and only 4 returning skaters, so we are young.

This week we have M-off, T-on ice practice, W-spin class, Th-on ice, Fri.-on ice, Sat-away game, Sun-home game. So it is pretty busy.
----------------------------------------------------------
Flyers Practice Plan Date: 15-09-12 Time: 14:00-15:15 WMP
Lines:
8 D, 9 F, 2 G
Review system play. Backcheck take sticks.
Low dzone play Puck handling, crossovers, passing, shooting

10 min.
B6 or B4 Crossover Skating and Puckhandling

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20120418155124444

10 min.
B6 Chaos 3-0 Pass and Shoot

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20101006084345432

10 min. Review
T4 TSUNAMI Forecheck 2-1-2 Wide Pressure


10 min.
D400 Penalty Killing Practice

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090806144359357

10 min.
D1 Controlled Scrimmage
Key Points:
Team play, face-offs, freeze play,

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090824224310861

10 min.
DT100 Backchecking Transition Game

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080719141212210

10 min.
D400 Transition Game of Low Battles with Point Support

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090726102317243

7 min.
E1 Change on the Go with Pass Shootout

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120415181657595


Flyers Practice Plan 9-18-12

Posted on: September 18 2012 @ 06:59 PM
By: TomM

Content:

We did all of the drills and games. Sean had the D do some drag - shoot and screen shots while I worked on a puck protection keepaway game plus talked about left handers shooting on the stick side. I also showed them how to keep the puck in front in the triple threat position and take a quick snap shot from there. Girl's tend to wind up way too much and shoot off the outside foot. This takes way too long. Instead inside foot, puck in front, snap and follow the shot.

Some scoring hints I gave; 1. avoid shooting across the goalies body (the puck has eyes), 2. Shoot where the goalie is coming from and not where they are going. 3. always follow your shot. 4. if you don't have a good shot then shoot 5 hole. 5. Always hit the net, don't let the goalie off for free. 6. Shoot with feet moving. 7. Keep the puck in the triple threat position without stickhandling it unles you are trying to change the angle.

In the DT4 transition from defense to offense we did a 1-1 and 2-2 and then repeated them but added back pressure on the 1-1 to make it a 1-2 and in the 2-2 backpressure as far as the dots so the defenders were in a tight box like we play against in games and the attackers have to do everything quickly in a small space. Very good game.

Tonight we have our first bike spin class.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
Flyers Practice Plan 9-18-12 Time: 17:15-18-30 Venue: Fairview - 75 Minutes
Theme
Shoot, pass, 1-1, carry the puck to open ice, Defense shooting, puck protection



8 min.
B6-Dean 1 High 1 Low Shooting

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20101003085932985

8 min.
B202 - 3 on 0 Neutral Zone Passes


http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090818155501847

12 min. Two Games
D4 Transition Defense to Offense


http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090726104059741

12 min.
Forwards in Neutral Zone Goalies at one end
D200 Keepaway U22

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120806085000699

Defense at one end
B2 Point Shots - Canada U20 (or similar shooting drill)

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/filemgmt/index.php?id=94

10 min
D200 Multiple Puck Games
Key Points:
Wally Kozak ran this game with many variations for about 20 minutes. The players loved it and worked really hard.
-Players can only shoot when the goalie is ready.
-No empty net goals.
-Hustle out of the zone on the whistle and play 20-30 seconds only.
-Leave extra pucks in the zone on the whistle and coach shoot in pucks to make it 3.
Description:
1. Players line up outside the blue lines.
2. Coach shoots in 3 pucks.
3. Players race for pucks and battle to score and defend.
4. Leave puck in nets after goals. Play with 3-2-1 pucks as they are scored.

9 min.
D100 Two Second Game
Key Points:
Players must switch right away from offense to defense to loose puck and constantly change roles from, 1-puck carrier, 2-puck support, 3-check puck carrier, 4-cover away from the puck.
Description:
1. Play a full ice game of 3-3, 4-3, 4-4, 5-4, 5-5, 6-5 with the extra players on the bench.
2. Play 45" shifts and pass back to your goalie when the coach whistles for a change.
3. Players can only have the puck for 2" and must make a play, gain a zone or shoot.
4. Possession from first touching the puck for over 2" leave the puck for the other team.
5. Encourage talking, facing the puck, always give a target.
*Don't blow the whistle if they have started shooting. Start time when the goalie gets puck. Keep score and losing or winning have a consequence.

9 min.
D100 45 sec. shifts and pass to goalie on whistle.


Rule: you must gain a zone before passing and only one pass allowed in offensive zone.

6 min.
E1 Two Shot Shootout

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20110324144209198

1 min. get pucks and meet in middle.




20/09/12 practice

Posted on: September 20 2012 @ 07:41 PM
By: TomM

Content:

The practice went really well. All 17 skaters and 2 goalies were there along with one affiliate D. That gave us enough to do the Reilly game with 9 players at each end. I learned the game from Gene Reilly when he was asst. coach with Maine men's team. He was in Austria coaching the Red Bulls with me as well.
We went through the 5-4 and 4-5, 5-3 and 3-5 with the D playing forward and some F playing D. The way the draft went the other team kept taking forwards and left D who we ranked high on our list. We ended up with 8 D and 9 F. So we play 2 differenvt D at forward each game and each period double shift one C to give us 4 lines and 3 sets of D.

The D weren't really clear on playing F on specialty teams and that was a big focus. We have only one returning D. (one D from last year is playing F. We had to make her a D last year because we were short of D.)

Another focus is to be able to one time the puck and we spent a lot of time on that skill and added partner passing and shooting at the boards.

On the 3-0 weave then regroup one D always jumped up as the 4th man and we passed on the forehand to that D who shot. We always want 4 on the attack.

The players loved the last cross ice game we played where the coaches sent out 1-2-or 3 players. We added the rule that if the team was outnumbered they could pass to the linep-up and that player could join them (up to 3 players).
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Flyers Practice Plan Date: 9- 20-12 Time: 17:00-18:30 Venue: Southland
Lines:
Defense learn the pk as low and high players 4-5 and 3-5
Beakout and regroup One timers Read situations


10 min.
A200 Skating Warm-up for Edges and Balance with a Puck and Shot


http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.phpf=0&sort=0&s=20111005152108885

10 min.
B202 Breakout Pass and Shooting Warm up

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090901074924530

17 min.
T2-4 D400 Specialty Team Practice

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090806144404128

13 min.
T2 D400 Reilly Team Play Practice Rotation


10 min.
B6 3-0 Weave With D Regroup


8 min.
B500 One Timers at each end
Add: Rebound for the next shooter.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20090812164222165

7 min.
B5 Cross and Drop Sequence – One Timers

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20091019154512198

10 min.
D200 Cross Ice Uneven Situations

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090802114759629

Pucks and cheer in centre circle



Nice email form a former player

Posted on: September 21 2012 @ 01:56 PM
By: TomM

Content:

The kind of letter a coach loves to get.

Our captain from last year walked on to the tryout at Queen's University and just found out that she made the team. Nice girl and a good player. They hadn't really seen her because it is along way from Calgary.

She sent us this email.

We had 5 players graduate from high school and now 4 have made university and college teams (another D at St. Francis Xavier and 2 F at colleges in the ACAC). Two other players still have to finish high school (they should be able to play in our league). Three players who could have come back have gone to three different sports schools. So we only have 4 skaters and both goalies back.
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Hi Tom and Sean,

I hope you guys had a relaxing summer and your season is off to a great start. I just wanted to thank you guys for all your help last year with talking to coaches and being my references for university teams. I wanted to let you know that I tried out for the Queen's Varsity Women's team and as luck would have it a spot opened up and I made the team. I just wanted to say thank you for your dedication and support to myself and the team last year, it was greatly appreciated. My dad watched the first Flyers game and said the team is looking good. Queen's will be playing in the Lethbridge invitational the same weekend that Flyers are in Lethbridge I believe, so I will most likely see you there. Good luck with the season and I hope to see you soon!


Re: Diary of a Season 2012-13

Posted on: September 21 2012 @ 04:24 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Flyers Practice Plan Date: 21-9-12 Time: 17:15-18:30 Venue: Fairview
Notes:
Breakouts, scoring, situations, Passing

10 Min.
C2 1-2-3-4-5-5-4-3-2-1 Pass and Shoot Warm-up

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20111103221612750

10 min. Goalie at one end with Natalie Skaters in Nzone
5 min.
A200 Chaos Puck Handling

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080722090625893
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080722090624390

5 min.
B202 Pass to All Players

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/filemgmt/index.php?id=99

15 min.
D – one end with Sean and Kevin on Breakouts
F – other end with Tom and Tom – Scoring

5min. - Forwards
A300 Shoot-Rebound-Walk In-Walk out - Swedish U20

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120105091006975

5 min. - A500 - Gretzky Move and Shot - Sweden 3
https://skydrive.live.com/?cid=bd6fa116988317e9#cid=BD6FA116988317E9&id=BD6FA116988317E9%213109

12 min
C3 15 Goal 3-0 3-1, 3-2


10 min.
DT100 Continuous 2 on 2

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080719141210845

7 min.
E1 Rebound Game
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080723202833407

10 min.
D200 Cross Ice Uneven Situations


1 min. gets pucks and meet around circle for team cheer.


Weekend Games Sept 22-23

Posted on: September 23 2012 @ 02:05 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Went to Red Deer for the first game of the weekend. We got there 45 min. before the game because the bus broke down while leaving the bus barn and they had to get another one. The drive didn't know how to work the air conditioning so it was like a sauna the entire 2 hour trip. Usually 90 min. but there was road paving going on as well.

We played really hard and won 4-1. They got 2 breakaways on really bad changes and another when our D fumbled a puck at the blue line. Other than that we were solid. 1 for 2 on the pplay and killed all the penalties. Shot clock said 55-27 for us but I have a coach record each shot and where and his total was 36-18 which I think is what happened.

The Tsunami is working great but our F3 has to cover the point on a wide pinch all the time. Right now it is only happenind about half the time.

Play game two Sunday morning.
http://www.ammfhl-hockey.ca/division.aspx?lgid=0&did=1833&p=divisionrosters is a link to the league site. Clicking on Schedule gives game results.
---------------------------------------------------------------------
Red Deer came out flying and really pinching. They scored on a power play and then another so led 2-0. We were giving the puck away standing still trying to make passes. We kept saying carry the puck, move your feet, make a play and we settled down and scored the next 5 to witn 5-2. Outshot them 37-29.

This was our first game in our home rink and it is one metre shy of Olympic size. We never practice there. It took a while to get used to the bigger ice and they have lots of players who can fly with the puck.

Next week a tournament with all the teams in the league. The games count in the standings and there is a CIS University tournament at the same time. The idea is to give the players exposure to the university coaches. It is in Lethbridge which is about 2 hrs. south of Calgary.

We practice Tuesday where I have Gaston coming to do 45 min. of skating at the start of practice. Wed. is spin on the bikes, Thursday practice and games Friday and Sunday.

One of my centre's got a concussion so I am sure she is out for a while.
------------------------
Just watched the game video http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/filemgmt/index.php?id=114 and a few things we will focus on.
- skate to open ice as soon as you get the puck and pass while skating.
- Skate with the puck between the dots and pass wide instead of skate wide and pass to the middle.
- Eliminate the Stare, whith all defenders watching the puck and find who you cover then head on a swivel.
- Get defensive side before reaching in and focus on defending from D side and tight gap.
- F3 stay on original side on a weak side pinch and fill the weak point.

Our work ethic was great and pressure was relentless. Now we have to manage the puck better.


Flyers Practice 09-25-12

Posted on: September 25 2012 @ 08:04 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Flyers Practice 09-25-12 Time: 20:21:30 Blunden

Theme
Skating and Controlling the slot.



45 min.
A2 Skating Mechanics Taught by Dr. Gaston Schaeffer


8 min.
B6 1-0, 2-0, 3-0 Small Horseshoe

Description:
1. Skate to the top of the circle and pass.
2. Continue and get a pass from the other end.
3. 2-0 first player passes and swings wide and second player skates into the middle
lane. Pass to the player in the middle.
4. Player in the middle one touch the puck up to the wide man. Stay onside.
5. Shoot and go for the rebound.
6. On the 3-0 the third player goes up the boards and enters as the high man. Add a
trailer pass to the high man as the first shot.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=201209260915131

20 min
DT 2-4 Gaining Position in the Slot

Key Points:
Offensive players fight for offensive side and to keep their stick free and defensive players fight for defensive side and to control the attackers sticks.
Description:
1. All players are in front of the net in two colours.
2. Start with the coach calling red offense and they try to get open and the blue cover them and control their stick.
3. Progress to 2 coaches at the point. One on each team. When they pass the players change roles o to d and d to o.
4. Play a game where the defenders must pass to their coach at the point to be on offense.
5. Offensive coach can shoot or pass.
5. Everyone stays within the dots and below the top of the circles. DT 2-4 Gaining Position in the Slot.jpg
DT 2-4 Gaining Position in the Slot.pdf
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120926091742381

8 min
DT400 Active Jokers at Point

Key Points
Each team has two jokers at the point. Introduce the game allowing jokers to check jokers and then add that jokers can come in for one timer shots.
This transition game creates three situations. In the first part the players at the point must get open and take a shot or make a pass. The defender practices covering the point. In the second part add that the jokers at the point can come in for a one timer shot
Description:
Part One: Each team has jokers at the point.
1. When defenders regain puck they must pass to the point to go on offense.
2. Jokers can shoot or pass.
3. Jokers can check the opponents Joker.

Part Two:
4.Jokers can jump in for one timer shots.
5. Defending joker should cover the attacking joker when he jumps in.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120926092048847

7 min. E1 Shootout.

Goalies Choice of shootout


Thurs. Sept. 27 practice

Posted on: September 27 2012 @ 07:25 PM
By: TomM

Content:

This is the practice before we go to a tournament sponsored by the CIS where the university teams will have a tournament at the same time and have the chance to watch recruit our players and players can see university hockey. It is in Lethbridge and we play Friday and Sunday. Games count in our league standings.

We will focus on angling as we haven't covered that yet.

Post Practice Comments:
One of my forwardss had to go to the hospital just before practice with what may be appendicitis. She came and watched. So her and the centre who got a concussion last game were missing. I also had our third goalie there as one of our goalies went to Hawaii for her brothers wedding. Wo we had 15 skaters 7 F and 8 D.

The ice time got put back 15 min. and affiliate goalie had asked to leave 10 min. early to get to her regular teams pracitce. Now it was 25 min. early so I had to change the last few activities. We did the cross ice D200 angling game but then she left and we couldn't do the straight on angling game. I moved onto the battling game and then we practiced the pplay 5-0 with 3 groups rotating to the two ends. We did accomplish what we wanted this week. Skating technique with Gaston. Tying up sticks in the slot on D and protecting your stick on O and today we worked on angling.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/filemgmt/index.php?id=114 is a video of our last game. We fell behind 2-0 but stayed with it and won 5-2.

We leave this afternoon. Luckily I have time to play my noon hockey and then get a ride to catch the bus.

I plan to meet with all the players for about 10 minutes during the bus ride. I met with the forwards last weeks short bus ride; so I will start with the D.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ended up being two crazy games. Game one we were behind 2-1 after two but outshot and outplayed them in the second 9-5 and it looked like we had taken over the game. Then the floor fell from under us and they scored 4 goals in 3 minutes. 3 of them short side snap shots by the same player and lost 6-1. Next day we were behind 0-1 after one vs a team higher in the standings than game one and we scored 4 goals in 6 minutes and ended up winning 6-2. We have a young team and swings in confidence seem to be the biggest factor. So we are 3 and 2 after 5 and in second in our division behind a team that is 3-1-1. We have to work on consistent good habits. It is early in the season. still.

It was a good weekend with a CIS university tournament going on at the same time. The university league put on a banquet and the feature game had Queens playing the U of Lethbridge. Our captain from last season was playing for Queens, so that was nice to see.
-------------------------------------------------------------------

Flyers Practice Plan Date: 9-27-12 Time: 17:15-18:30 Venue: ECTAS

Theme: Angling, dzone, spectialty teams

10 min.
B6 Puck Handling Skills, Zig-Zag

Key Points:
Separate the movement of the upper and lower body by doing these exercises to loosen the
shoulders.
Description:
1. Players line up in diagonal corners in the B6 Formation.
2. Skate in big arcs down the ice and perform different tasks with the puck. These are some examples but players can practice every possible move both forehand and backhand.
a. Keep the hands and feet moving quickly.
b. Skate arcs with the puck only on the forehand side of the blade.
c. Skate arcs with the puck only on the backhand side of the blade.
d. Do heel to heel glides one way then the other.
e. Fake passes then protect the puck.
g. Fake shots.
Finish with a shot at each end of the ice.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080722082806653

8 min.
B6 Pass and Shoot While Skating

Key Points:
In this exercise the players must keep their feet moving. It is important to keep the stick square to the puck and the hands away from the body.
Description:
1. Leave 2-0 from each corner and allow the players in front 2 or 3 passes before starting.
2. Pass while skating they can be one touch or two touch then pass.
3. Shoot before reaching the hash marks and rebound.
4. Switch sides with the inside player going to the outside when you go the other way.
5. Switch corners after a few minutes so the goalies get shots from the other side.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20120227085711281

10 min.
B5 Forecheck Skills Deflect-Steer-Angle-Finish

Key Points:
Gene Reilly shows the approach to European second league pro’s and then U18 AAA girl’s do the same drill. Cut the ice in half with the stick in the passing lane and steer the player outside the dots. Angle toward the back of the inside shoulder so they can't turn back, then finish shoulder to shoulder and stick on the puck.
Description:
1. Offense group behind the net with pucks.
2. Defenders behind blue line in the middle.
3. Both start on the whistle.
4. Defender force the attacker wide angle and finish.
5. Alternate sides.
6. Players switch lines so they all angle.
7. Move the defenders back to the far blue line as the second step in the skill. http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20111005152254430

10 min.
DT100 2 on 2 with a Dump in and Forecheckers Angle

Description:
D100 formation along the boards in the nzone.
Start with a 1-1 and when the puck crosses the blue line each player gets support from the lineup on the boards.

8 min.
D200 Angling game

Key Points:
Checkers create an angle on puck carrier and take away their time and space with body on body and stick on the puck.
Description:
1. D200 lineup outside blue line.
2. On whistle carry the puck behind the net and checkers leave and create good angles.
3. Play 20-30 seconds.
4. Puck carrier can try to come out short side.
5. Keep score. Play to a certain score and losing team do something like push ups. Play a short series.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20111005185904685

7 min.
D200 Straight on Angling Game

Key Points:
Both teams go behind their net on the whistle.
Defenders close the gap and maintain the defensive side.
Description:
D200 Straight on Angling Game
1. Teams are lined up behind blue line.
2. On the whistle each team skates behind their net.
3. Attackers try to score and defenders gain a tight gap and D side.
4. Play a cross ice game for 20-30"
5. On whistle pass to coach and the other team is on offense first.
6. Play from 1-1 to 3-3 also using odd man situations.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20111005190114923

10 min.

Power Play Practice Game:

Shoot the puck down to teammates to go onto offense.

One goalie has to leave.

10 min.
D400 Transition Game of Low Battles with Point Support

Key Points:
Great game to practice cycling, going to the net, screening, tipping, point shots, shot pass, one timers on offense. On defense you have the low zone coverage and communication skills. As well as individual techniques like sealing the stick to the outside, tying up sticks, boxing out,
switching, all from the defensive side.
Description:
1. One team is lined up behind each faceoff dot. From one to tree players leave at a time.
2. The next player in line plays the joker at the point and must pass or shoot within a second. Defenders do not check the joker as he can’t go in and score.
3. The coach dumps the puck in or shoots on net and the teams race for the puck. Whoever gets the puck can shoot right away.
4. When the defending team gets the puck they must pass to their joker at the point to transition to offense.
5. If the puck is shot out of the zone the coach passes to the non offending joker.
6. Play 20-30” and on the whistle the players pass to the coach and skate hard out of the zone before the coach shoots a new puck in.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090726102317243

Explanation/Notes:





Re: Diary of a Season 2012-13

Posted on: October 02 2012 @ 07:59 PM
By: TomM

Content:

This is the first practice after our two games on the weekend 1-6 and 6-2. We need to work on gap control and moving the puck throught the neurtral zone plus 1-1, 2-1.
-------------------------------------------------------
Post Practice Comment: This was one of our best practices for high tempo and competing. We have a 90 and not 75 min. ice time so I added another cross ice game of uneven situations which is in the play below.
----------------------------------------------------------
Flyers Practice Plan Date: 10-02-12 Time: 16:00 Max Bell
Lines: 14 skaters 2 goalies
Theme of Practice: Hinge, quick up, regroup, middle drive Gap Control in the corners,Situations 3-0, 1-1, 2-1 and pass and support the pass better.


10 min.
A2 Russian Puck-Handling Warm-up with Shots

Key Points:
This can be done every time players go on the ice to expand their muscle memory. The point of these exercises is to increase the size of the reach with the stickhandling moves, and to separate the upper and lower body.
This is one of the most important exercises a player can do to develop puck handling skills. All the moves can also be practice off ice with various kinds of balls and pucks.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20090427151438223

10 min.
D4 Two Pass

Description:
1. Players must stay inside the blueline and if they puck goes out the other team gets it.
2. Before scoring the offensive team must make at least two passes.
3. When the defenders regain the puck they must make at least two passes before a
shot.
4. Make rules with skills for skating, shooting, passing or good habits.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20120313082015545

10 min.
B5 Regroup 3-0, Middle Drive-Pro

Key Points:
Defense move quickly and hinge the pass up the middle. Pass hard. Centre give the stick and skates as a flat target. Middle drive hard to the net.
Description:
1. All the players are inside the middle circle.
2. Red D1get a pass from a Red F2.
3. Red D hinge and pass D1 to D2.
4. D2 pass to F2 supporting in the middle.
5. F2 pass to F1 on the strong side.
6. F1 gain blueline and pass wide to F3.
7. F2 middle drive skating hard to the net.
8. F3 shoot and all crash the net for a rebound.
9. Blue repeat in the other direction.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=2012100209041983

10 min.
C2, 3-0, 3-1, 3-2 Pro

Key Points:
Forwards should attack with speed and defense play a tight gap.
Description:
1. Start with a 3-0 attack from one corner. All attacks are on the same net.
2. F3 skate back and get a puck from the original end.
3. D1 leave line and defend vs. F3.
4. F1 and F2 come back for another puck.
5. D2 defend a 2-1 vs. F1 and F2.
6. Repeat from the other end.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121001083756215

10 min.
DT400 1-1, 2-2, Support-Attack-Defend

Key Points:
Defending player stay on the defensive side. Supporitng player give a target for the pass and get into an open lane.
Description:
1.F1 attack D1 at each end. 2. Players line up on the boards with the first player in line D1 supporting the defense. 3. The coach can determine whether the supporting defender is passive or active. 4. On a turnover or a goal the breakout pass is made to the supporting defender from D1 to F2.. 5. Carry the puck to the red line or if the team has a full ice practice, carry the puck to the far blue line. 6. F2 Attack vs. the original attacker F1. Practice various situations. The big left handed player with the sweat suit is Dany Heatley. It is just after he won the Calder trophy. He came to say hi to the players but because we were playing transition games participated in the whole practice and then stayed and posed for pictures with each of the players.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20090726104059741

10 min. Gap Control – Sean teach this.
B6 1-1's from the Corner

Key Points:
This is a drill the Russian Jursinov used. You can do 2-1 and 2-2 as well.
Stay D side stick on the puck, body on body and keep a tight gap withib a stick length. Approach under control and maintaining D side and do the Chockow turn front to backward skating.
Description:
1-1's from the corner
1. Defender 1 skate to the opposite corner and defend vs attacking player 2.
2. On the whistle player 2 now skates to the opposite corner and defends vs player 3.
3. Player 3 will try to score and then defend vs player 4 and continue this flow.

8 min.
D200 Straight on Angling Game

Key Points:
Both teams go behind their net on the whistle.
Defenders close the gap and maintain the defensive side.
Description:
D200 Straight on Angling Game
1. Teams are lined up behind blue line.
2. On the whistle each team skates behind their net.
3. Attackers try to score and defenders gain a tight gap and D side.
4. Play a cross ice game for 20-30"
5. On whistle pass to coach and the other team is on offense first.
6. Play from 1-1 to 3-3 also using odd man situations.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20111005190114923

10 min.
D200 Cross Ice Uneven Situations

Key Points:
Play 1-2, 1-3, 2-3 to work on both offensive and defensive out number situations. Stess good habits and moving the puck to a player in better position.
If down players you can pass to teammates in lineup until the teams are even.
Description:
1. Coach shoots the puck in.
2. Coach calls 2-1, 3-2, etc.
3. Alternate advantage.
4. Play 20-30 seconds.
5. Keep score.
On the whistle either.
c. Pass to team mate coming on. http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090802114759629

7 min.
One timer shot contest.

Shoot from above dots. Can be either a one timer from point or pass from dot to dot or dot back to point. i.e. point to dot to dot.
Max 2 passes.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20090812164222165






Flyers Practice Plan 10-04-12

Posted on: October 04 2012 @ 04:41 PM
By: TomM

Content:


Flyers Practice Plan 10-04-12 Time: 17:15-18:45 Venue: ECTAS

Low zone coverage and scoring
PK and PP
Hinge, regroup
situations


10 min.
B4 Crossover Skating and Skills

Key Points:
This is a great skating and puck handling warm up drill. Many variations can be used with the puck or in skating tasks.
Do a different skill in each zone. Keep the feet moving it is crossover in large #8's and not tight turns. You can also do as a B6 and start out of opposite corners.
Description:
Cross Overs and Skills
Do figure 8's in each zone.
1. Face the far end transition skate
4. Carry puck using only the forehand
5. Use only the backhand. Follow shot for a rebound.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20120418155124444

10 min.
B600 Regroup, Hinge, Quick Up-Detroit

Key Points:
Hinge and push the puck up the ice quickly. Strong side F stretch and weak side give middle support.
Description:
1. F1 skate and regroup with D1.
2. D1 skate to the middle and pass to D2 in the wide lane.
3. D2 quick up to F2 who stretches on the strong side boards.
4. F1 and F2 attack.
Repeat the other way with F3 regrouping with D3.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20101128092923497

10 min
C3 15 Goal 3-0 3-1, 3-2 - Pro

Description:
Players are lined up along the boards in the C3 formation. Have 2 colours of jerseys and play one team vs the other if you have enough players. You can have D on one side and
F on the other or they can wait on the side they will be playing.
1. Three forwards take a puck and attack 3-0. The attack is over when the puck is over the goal line. (unless the coach wants a cycle and a shot).
2. Use the same puck and go the other way attacking 3-1 vs a D from the other colour (coach puts in a new puck if there is a goal).
3. Attack 3-2 in the original direction.
4. Three F from the other coloured team attack 3-0 on the vacant end.
5. Repeat sequence.

10 min.
T4 D400 - 2 on 2 Below the Goal Line

Key Points:
The attackers create scoring chances with speed, deception, give and goes, crosses and picks. Defenders must talk, stay net side, sticks in lanes and one the puck.
Description:
Start from the corners, one attacker with the puck and another come towards him below the goal
line. 2 defenders are in front and must cover them. Keep track of goals vs the number of attempts.
Play for 5-10 seconds.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20090824224306239

10 min.
Defense one end and F other PK practice.
T4 - Penalty Kill vs. Diamond - Fall Under

Key Points:
Top two players I-up with the first player blocking the shot and the second player falls under. D block shots when the puck is on their side. Defenders never get tied up and skate in straight lines.
Description:
Defending vs. the Diamond 1-3-1
1. The power play gets the puck to mid point.
2. F1 get shin pads in front of the puck.
3. F2 fall under and cover middle attacker.
4. D1 release and block the shot.
5. D2 cover player in front.
Defending vs. the Umbrella
If it is a high umbrella and there isn't an attacker in the mid slot, then F2 can move to the side the puck is passed and block the shot.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120521102728277

10 min.
Kingston PPlay Rotation
-shot every 3 seconds.
-one end, breakout, rotate in, same end, out.

10 min.
TD400 Specialty Team Scrimmage

Key Points:
Rotation is Attack-Defend-Rest. Number the players so they know when to not defend. In even numbered situations you can require the defenders to breakout into the neutral zone before passing.
Description:
1. Power play attack vs 2 Fand 2 D.
2. Defenders ice the puck and rest.
3. Group waithing at far blue attack.
4. Original attackers now defend 1 short.
5. Goalies rotate in.
6. Create any situation by changing the number of attackers or defenders.
7. Even strength can also be practiced.
*Option is to have waiting players breakout from behind the goal line and do a pk forecheck.

8 min.
DT400 Active Jokers at Point

Key Points
Each team has two jokers at the point. Introduce the game allowing jokers to check jokers and then add that jokers can come in for one timer shots.
This transition game creates three situations. In the first part the players at the point must get open and take a shot or make a pass. The defender practices covering the point. In the second part add that the jokers at the point can come in for a one timer shot
Description:
Part One: Each team has jokers at the point.
1. When defenders regain puck they must pass to the point to go on offense.
2. Jokers can shoot or pass.
3. Jokers can check the opponents Joker.

Part Two:
4.Jokers can jump in for one timer shots.
5. Defending joker should cover the attacking joker when he jumps in.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120603101824103

7 min.
Shootout – goalies choice.






Re: Diary of a Season 2012-13

Posted on: October 09 2012 @ 12:18 AM
By: TomM

Content:

Crazy games. We were 1-1. Lost 6-3 with the shots 23-23 and that is how the game was and then won 10-6 (shots 46-30) where both teams scored 4 pplay goals. So we scored 13 and gave up 12. I can't remember that many goals in a two games before. Saturday we scored 2 SH and one PP goal. We are second in our division as everyone is beating everyone in the league, so the teams are very evenly matched. We obviously have to tighten things up defensively. It is mostly losing 1-1 battles that is causing the problem. We are still rolling the lines and the other teams are playing their top players a lot.

We will stick to everyone playing and work on getting all the players to be able to compete at this level. We have 8 first year and 2 who played A last year and one of our third year players got a concussion the second weekend and has missed half the games. So we have a young team.

We lead the league in goals for with 31, 7th out of 11 teams in goals against at 26 and have the least PIM's. They don't post the PP% but we must be up in that scoring 12 PP goals in 7 games. So the challenge is keeping up the goals for and cutting down on the goals against.

Next weekend we play two vs. the other Calgary team who is tied with us in points at 2-1-4, we are 4-3. The players will be fired up for those games. We practice Tuesday, Spin on bikes Wed, Practice Thursday and Friday the play Saturday-Sunday. So a busy week.

Saturday morning I give a coaches clinic to the other coaches in our association.


Video of shifts

Posted on: October 09 2012 @ 03:27 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Game shifts vs. Red Deer

Players and Coaches,

I am putting together video of shifts for lines and D pairs. I have D pairs posted so far and am working on the lines. Players can watch their shifts, coaches can watch how they played and recruiters can see who they are interested in.
I will send the F shifts when I am done. If you watch all the D shifts you see the entire game.

Shifts for 8-6 vs. Red Deer
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121009150917451

Shifts for 2 and 10 vs Red Deer
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121009100911899

Shifts for Defense Pair 4 – 14
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121009090045945

Shifts for Line 19-15-12
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121009141703725

11-16-18 Shifts vs. Red Deer
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121009191709504

3-17-18 Shifts vs. Red Deer
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121009191712308


Tues Oct 9-12 Practice

Posted on: October 09 2012 @ 05:48 PM
By: TomM

Content:

This week we have 90 min. sessions on Tues-Th and a 60 min.on Friday followed by games Sat and Sun. Tues. we will focus on individual offensive skills and puck support, thurs on ind. defensive skills and Friday on Team play.
--------------------------------------------------------
Post practice comments: Got everything done. Changed the skating warm up to a big 8 around the ice for the forward exercises and around the rink for backward with the captain leading. In the 3 shot zig zag the sequence was - only forehand, only backhand and backward skating. When I took the forwards I had them play a one zone game first using the 2" rule and then played 2 pass but they had to beat a player before passing. This causes them to skate to open ice with the puck right away. I encouraged them to create 2-1's with the second player giving close support. After the 12 across and back I changed the race shoot out to rebound because they were really tired. The defense worked on shots from the point and battles in front of the net for rebounds and controlling sticks.

Also tweeked the 'Tsunami' so when the D pinches on the weak side they stay in and forecheck on that side and work the tiangle. When the puck goes to the other side they return to the point. We want the wing to stay on their side when the puck is moved to the other side and play high slot ready to play the mid point if they get possession or jump down back door or to the corner if the puck comes around. They are responsible for the weak side on the rush. So if the puck starts on the left side and moves to the right side then the RW and C and RD will be low. The LD will have slid over to cover the point and the LW will be at the top of the circle. So it is like a high umbrella. If the puck is moved back to the left side the three forwards attack from there. The LD is back on the left point and RD on the right point. So once the original penetration is made and the puck moved to the other side it is basically man on man responsibility until the puck leaves the zone.

It is like having the Pounce on both sides. The Pounce has only the RD pinching and the LW as a midfielder. The Tsunami has both D pinching when the puck is moved to the weak side and the wing on the original side becomes a midfielder ready to go back, support a weak side pass or attack back door. When it is 50-50 whether we will gain the puck or not they have to fall back and play middle D. So when we have possession there are 4 on the attack.
----------------------------------------------------------

Flyers Practice Plan Date: 10-09-12 Time: 16:00-17:30 Venue: Max Bell
Theme: Individual offensive skills, skating , shooting, Passing, Puck support Skating and reflecting competing


10 min.
A2 Agility and Balance, Edges: Skating Exercises


10 min.
B6 – 3 Shots, 3 Zig zags, 3 Shots

Description:
1. Make sure to leave about 2 seconds between shooters so the goalie has time to get set.
2. Follow the shot for a rebound before getting the pass.
3. Do skills while zig zagging 3 times such as;
a, carry the puck with the hands and feet moving all the time.
b. carry the puck only using the forehand side of the stick.
c. only use the backhand side of the stick.
d. transition skate facing the far end forward to backward to forward.
e. skate backward.
f. 360 degree turns.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20091019154513105

10 min.
2 on 2 Game of Quick Transition at each end

Key Points:
The resting players attack right away when they get a pass and the original attackers must communicate and cover one attacker each.
Description:
1. Offensive team attacks 3 on 3. It can be 1-1, 1-2, 2-1, 2-2 or 2-3 also if the coach wants to practice these situations. Upt to 5-5 is possible.
2. On transition to offense the defenders pass to their teammates waiting behind the blue line.
3. Attack right away (don’t have to wait for teammates to get onside in this game.)
4. Original attackers now defend and communicate with each other on how to stop the attack.
5. After a goal the defenders is allowed to pass to the new attackers.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120416092419455

20 minutes
D100 Two Second Game – Puck Support

Key Points:
Players must switch right away from offense to defense to loose puck and constantly change roles from, 1-puck carrier, 2-puck support, 3-check puck carrier, 4-cover away from the puck.
Description:
1. Play a full ice game of 4-4, 5-5, with the extra players on the bench.
2. Play 45" shifts and pass back to your goalie when the coach whistles for a change.
3. Players can only have the puck for 2" and must make a play, gain a zone or shoot.
4. Possession from first touching the puck for over 2" leave the puck for the other team.
5. Encourage talking, facing the puck, always give a target.
*Don't blow the whistle if they have started shooting. Start time when the goalie gets puck. Keep score and losing or winning have a consequence.

20 min.
D - Shooting and Breakouts – Sean Kevin

F - Tom-Tom

B5 – Triangle
- One timers
- 2-0
- overspeed

12 min. Skating for Goals Against- one across and back for each of the 13 goals scored on us this weekend.
- 4 groups

8 min.
E1 Shootout Race 1

Key Points Players must have one skate on the dot at the start. No hooking or tripping. Skate to get D side and get the puck. *This is a great contest for puck protection, battling, scoring and a good anaerobic conditioning exercise. Keep score with one colour vs the other. Description 1. Players are lined up behind the face of dots at each end. 2. A player from each team race for the puck which the coach puts on the middle dot. 3. Protect the puck and try to score vs backchecking opponent. 4. Another puck on the dot and repeat the other way. http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080723063235226






Flyers Practice 11-10-12

Posted on: October 11 2012 @ 04:37 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Today the focus is more on team play and defense. I am having my asst. coach plan 15 min. for the D which he usually does and then I want him to teach the same concept to the whole team using a game situation.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Post practice: It was a really fast paced and competitve practice. Sean designed a SAG with two nets one on the goal line and was faced the boards at the same end. I took a video and will post the link. The keepaway game with the forwards was great. We varied numbers of 1 - 2 or 3 at a time from each end and then uneven situations. Gap control was a real focus today so I added each team skate behind the net to start each shift the last 5 minutes in the cross ice game. We didn't get to the regroup in the 2-2 transition game but will add that next time. In the double regroup drill we added a cross and drop between the two D and did a double cross and drop before passing in the B5 drill.
Sean's Game: http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121012034957748
Keepaway Game: http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121011224955196

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Flyers Practice Plan Date: 11-10-12 Time: 17:15-18:45 Venue: ECTAS

Themes:
Edges, Big Moves, 1-1, regroups, 2-2, Battling, defensive concepts.


10 min.
5 min.
Balance and Edges with a puck. Green one way, white the other shoot at one end each.

5 min. Switch Direction and
Do big moves warm-ups.

Captains lead.


10 min.
B600 Double Regroup Options

Key Points:
Regroup with each D and support from about a half zone away. Give a target and face the puck. Pass hard and always give strong side wall support and middle support.
Description:
1. Blue F1 leave and pass to F2.
2. Cross and regroup with Red D1 and D2
3. Red D1 hinge and Pass to D2.7
4. Red D2 pass to Blue F1 or F2.
5. Blue F's regroup with Blue D1 or D2.
6. Blue D's hinge and pass to Blue F.
7. Blue F's attack the far net vs either zero, one or two D.
*Options: vary the amount of F up to 3 or D up to 2. Add a dump in instead of a second regroup to work on breakouts or even a forecheck.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120301090901108

10 min.
DT100 Continuous Game of 2 on 2 With Regroup - Flames Key Points:

Allow the attackers to cross the far blue line before leaving so that there is a 2 on 2 attack first before it becomes a 4 on 4. I like the D on one side and F on the other to make it easier to talk with them. Leaving from each side also works. Description: 1. Start with a 2 on 2 attack. BF1 and BF2 vs RD1 and RD2. 2. RF1 and RF2 and BD1 and BD2 support the play from the lineup. 3. Play 4-4 in the zone. 4. On transition or after a goal or frozen puck RF1 and RF2 attack BD1 and BD2. *This rotation can be done from 1-1 to 3-2. Dump ins to work on the breakout and forecheck can be added Continue this flow. The coach doesn’t always blow the whistle so the defenders must be alert. http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120805092902101

15 min.
D with Sean-Kevin at one end.

F with Tom-Tom at other end.


- 7 min. D200 keepaway
- 8 min. B5 one timers and going to the far post and one timers.

15 min. Sean game or transition game.

10 min.
C3-B600, 1-1 x 2

Key Points:
Hard passes and face the puck always giving a target. D should get a tight gap as soon as possible.
Description:
1. F1 from each side pass to their D1.
2. D1 pass to D2 on the same side.
3. F1's swing to the other wide lane after passing.
4. D2's pass to the F1's
5. F1's attack vs D1's on the other side.
6. F2's pass to D2's to repeat drill.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090812173641629

12 min.
D200 Cross Ice Uneven Situations

Key Points:
Play 1-2, 1-3, 2-3 to work on both offensive and defensive out number situations.
Stess good habits and moving the puck to a player in better position.
The coach can also implement modified rules to create situation. i.e. goals must come from one timers.
Description:
1. Coach shoots the puck in.
2. Coach calls 2-1, 3-2, etc.
3. Alternate advantage.
4. Play 20-30 seconds.
5. Keep score.
On the whistle either.
a. Pass the puck to the coach.
b. Pass to goalie who passes to a team mate coming on.
c. Pass to team mate coming on. You could also simply leave the puck.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090802114759629

8 min.
E1 Shootout Race – Sweden Checking 1

Key Points:
Players must skate hard and battle for net side body position. Player who wins the puck must protect it and the checker fight for defensive side without taking a penalty. They should play any rebound in the slot.
Description:
1. Players start behind the blue line dots and race around markers near the red line.
2. The coach passes a puck in the centre near the blue line.
3. Two players battle to get the puck and score.
4. Continue the battle while one attacks and one defends.
5. Play any rebound directly in front of the net.
6. One group vs. the other and keep score.
https://skydrive.live.com/?cid=bd6fa116988317e9#cid=BD6FA116988317E9&id=BD6FA116988317E9%213934







Thurs. Oct 12

Posted on: October 12 2012 @ 03:45 PM
By: TomM

Content:

We need to tweak our pk to not get too spread out, clarify the forecheck rotation and after recognizing the attacker is covered then turn up ice to find your check. Prep practice for two weekend games.
---------------------------------------------------
Post Practice Comments; I got a text and email a few hours before practice to tell me one of my goalies had Just Got tickets to the Justin Bieber concert and was going. I don't know if Bieber Fever classifies a real medical reason for missing practice. It didn't effect things as much as it usually would because we did a lot of teaching system play and had a one net game already planned. I had to change the 1-1 with the D joining the next rush and F backchecking. Today I will start the goalie who was at practice. A forward also went to the concert.
The Tweak of the Tsunami is that when the puck moves from our left to the right side on a D to D or rim and the RD pinches then the left D falls back and the same thing happens if the play starts on the right side and moves to the other side and the LD pinches then the RW covers the point. If it moves back again in either situation then the two D will be on the points. So it is always the original side of the attack that is affected.
The PPlay we want to make sure that we start with an attack to the seam between the F and D. If the D defends the attack then the player on the goal line is open. If the F defends then the point is open and we can shoot or go into a Diamond. This works very well. We have 12 goals in 7 games. It is easy to defend a pp that simply stands there and passes around the perimeter.
We will run 7 D today and one D is now a F as one of our best F's has been out 3 weeks so far with a concussion and is still having headaches. So we go with 3 lines and 7 D. The extra D will go thru one pair per period and we will alternate who does that.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Flyers Practice Plan Date: 10-12-12 Time: 17:45-18:45 Venue: Village Square

Theme
Forecheck, pk rotation, pp options, 1-1 to 2-2

8 min.
A200 Agility and Balance with Shots



7 min.
D1-A2 Puck Dog

Key Points:
Encourage the players to use moves and fakes, change of pace and to protect the puck.
Description:
This game has the players line up at the end of the rink in the A2 formation. Each player has a puck. One player (who is 'it') is at the blue line and calls out 'British Puck-dog.' The players stickhandle the puck, trying to get to the end without being checked. If a player loses the puck, she
becomes 'it' and is in the middle checking. The last player with a puck wins.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090802114801644

10 min.
B6, 1-1, F+D Join=2-2
Had to change to a DT400 game with a regroup and hinge at the other end and then the hinging players give passive support.
Key Points:
The D skates hard to join the attack and get open while the forward back checks. Possible to do this up to a 3-2 or vary the situation at each end so the players have to read the rush.
Description:
1. D and F in opposite corners each end.
2. D1 pass to F1.
3. F1 skate to the red line and attack D1, 1-1.
4. On whiste F2 and D2 repeat at other end.
5. D1 join F2 attack and F1 backcheck.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20101007154527928

5 min.
Review

1. Tsunami Rotation:
2, Facing up ice when coming back in the zone as a role 2 player.

All the players at one end.
Focus: Initial forecheck 1-2-3
When puck goes to other side C and wing who’s side it went to pursue and D join the 3 player attack while far wing plays midfielder.

5 min.
Review PK rotation when the puck is deep in the corner.

1. D1 play a 2-1 deep in the corner.
2. D2 and D1 rotate when attack is at the dot and in.

9 min. Kingston PP rotation
- Run all pplay options with a shot every 3”.
- Rotate 3 areas.

8 min.
TD400 Team Play Scrimmage
Played 5-5 at the start with the attackers dumping the puck in vs the team who had just played offense. Moved to 5-4 and 5-3 but the next group waited for the pk to dump it down and broke out vs the forecheck. (first time I have done that and it worked well)
Key Points:
Rotation is Attack-Defend-Rest. Number the players so they know when to not defend. In even numbered situations you can require the defenders to breakout into the neutral zone before passing.
Description:
1. Power play attack vs 2 Fand 2 D.
2. Defenders ice the puck and rest.
3. Group waithing at far blue attack.
4. Original attackers now defend 1 short.
5. Goalies rotate in.
6. Create any situation by changing the number of attackers or defenders.
7. Even strength can also be practiced.
*Option is to have waiting players breakout from behind the goal line and do a pk forecheck.

7 min.
E1 Change on the Go with Pass Shootout

Key Points: Players should work on selling the fake, change of pace and making the goalie move first. The goalie must time his retreat into the net to keep good angles on shots and cover the goal line on dekes. Description: 1. Players are in the box and one puck on each blue line for every player.
2. Player from each team leaves the box and tries to score.
3. If they score they race to the box and touch the boards and then the next player can leave.
4. If they don't score they pass to the next player who comes out of the box.
5. Losing team do something for every goal they lose by.
*To make it realistic the goalie should practice starting from the goal line and coming out.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120415181657595

1 min. pucks, summary, cheer in middle.





Oct 13-14 Weekend Games

Posted on: October 14 2012 @ 05:00 AM
By: TomM

Content:

Game one vs the other Calgary team went our way.. Our manager charts shots and where they are from on a rink diagram each period and he has us 16-2 in the first and ahead 2-0, 9-6 second and 3-0 and 10-9 third 6-1. They had a really hard time with the Tsunami and the players were pumped as it is the other Calgary team and our big rival. I will attach a pdf of the shot chart we keep.

Play the same team tomorrow morning and it will be a tough game.
--------------------------------------------------------------------
In the morning I ran an on ice coaching clinic for two groups with two of my assistant coaches. Each group has a dozen coaches and I had half of them put on red pinnies for games. We did some skating, puck handling, passing to demonstrate how to practice those Hard Skills. There are lots of drill books etc. for the coaches so I used the last 40 minutes to demonstrate how to use the ice efficiently and play 8 different games to teach the Soft Skills of where, when, why. We played cross ice, one zone from the blue line in, on one net starting from the red line, on one net from the far end and finished with one full ice game. I changed the game every five minutes. Some games had skill rules, some passing rules, some Jokers.

Most coaches run lots of skill circuits but don't know how to teach 'how to play the game.' and that was my focus. Right after we changed and headed to another arena for my teams game. (My car got broken into in the parking lot and they got my visa but only got $100 on it before I cancelled it)
-----------------------------
Game Two was as hard as we expected. We dominated the first in shots 13-3 and 1-0, second they outshot us 12-8 and 1-1 and the third we again outshot them16-6 and 2-2. Total shots 37-23. Their goalies kept knocking the goal off it's mourings when we had a lot of pressure and that stopped the play. (I think it is very poor sportsmanship but many teams do this). I was happy with the effort and we probably deserved more than a tie but 3 of 4 points is good.)

Their coaches did a good job of figuring out how to counter the Tsunami in the second and they continually did D to D and back to D or D to W and back to D. It works is F1 chases the pass. We countered by having F1 stay with the D until the puck was up the ice and that is why we outshot them again in the third.

This week we practice Tuesday and Thursday 90 minutes each practice and do spin on the bike Wednesday and have a 9 hour drive north to Grande Prairie Saturday morning and play two and will probably get back around midnight on Sunday. Great way to spend a birthday.
I will attach the shot chart.


Tuesday Oct. 16

Posted on: October 16 2012 @ 01:31 PM
By: TomM

Content:

I met with one of my players and her father last night. She got a concussion three weeks ago and is still having serious symptoms. She moved to Calgary in the summer and played in a differennt city last season. She has decided to sit out the rest of the season. Last year she also had a concussion and she thinks she got a mild one the game before this one but she didn't tell anyone. I told her it was a good decision. She can only go to school a few days a week and sitting in the car makes her nauseous. So it is a serious injury and is affecting her entire life and schooling. She is in grade 12 at school and was my second overall pick in the draft. The first forward we chose. So she is a good player. So since the draft we have lost her and another player who went to Notre Dame in Wilcox, Sask. to attend the sports school there and is playing on their team. She also is a good player. (she thought she could do better in school if she was away from her friends and could just focus on school and hockey. She was at our games this weekend).

So you always have to expect the unexpected. They are both 3rd year players and that makes the average age of our team younger. 5-95 (1 G), 6-96, 7-97 (1 G) born. Composure under pressure and confidence are two things we have to nurture with such a young team.


Oct. 16 practice

Posted on: October 16 2012 @ 04:14 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Post Practice Comments:
I got a text from one goalie that she had a late class and would be late then the other goalie got stuck in traffic; so we had no goalies the first 20 minutes and 2 the last hour. I did a lot of puck handling demo and instruction about rolling the wrist, making little noise, controlling the stick with the top hand, using fakes etc.. When I had the forwards we did one timers and snap shots off a pass. Sean took the D and then he ran a continuous 2 on 2 full ice transition game with the wrinkle that the D jumped into the play and F3 backchecked, so it was a 5-5 at each end. It went really well. I changed the full ice game at the end to a game with 3 lines. White attack vs Green at one end while Red keeps moving in their half of the neutral zone until Green attacks vs. them. White now actively waits saving ice in the neutral zone for the attack from Red. This three line game keeps going in that rotation.
It went really well. Because the goalies didn't get that many shots we had a 2 shot shootout. After practice we met to teach isometrics for the neck and the same exercise isotonic where they move against the resistance from their hands. We need to strengthen the neck to prevent concussions.
I stopped the game a few times to show them how if you skate to the inside you pull the defenders inside the dots with you and then pass to the outside where there is room for wide entries. For some strange reason most youth players skate wide and then pass to the middle right into traffic.
-----------------------------------------------------------


Flyers Practice Plan Date: 10-16-12 Time: 16:00-17:30 Max Bell
Notes:
Theme of Practice: Back check, D join rush, back pressure, Identify coverage when backchecking, One timers, shooting, break outs, Goaltending.


8 min.
4 min. edges

4 min. moves and a shot

A300 Puck Handling Moves With a Shot
Key Points:
Do various moves with the puck and finish with a shot.
Description:
One group rotate clockwise and the other counter clockwise.
1. Do various skating moves with the puck.
2. Big moves all around the body, in the skates, through the legs etc.

10 min.
B Skills Warm up Finnish U17

Key Points:
This is a great way to warm everyone up at the start of a practice. Defense do the various breakout options and read where the pressure is coming from. Pass the puck back to the coach and move thru everyone. Forwards pass with good technique and eye contact. Goalie coach work on technique and rebound control.
Description
A. Defense work with two doing breakout options vs one forechecker.
B. Forwards lines of 3 work in the neutral zone.
1 - Stationary pass with eye contact.
2 - Pass while moving always face puck.
3 - #8 around partners give and go.
4 - Keepaway 2-1 in four areas.
5 - Two lines move and pass to other two lines on the blue line.
6 - Two lines of 3 pass while skating on one side of the neutral zone.
C. Goalies work with coach at one end. http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/filemgmt/index.php?id=88

9 min.
B6, 1-1, F+D Join=2-2

Key Points:
The D skates hard to join the attack and get open while the forward back checksDescription:
1. D and F in opposite corners each end.
2. D1 pass to F1.
3. F1 skate outside of dot and attack D1, 1-1.
4. On whiste F2 and D2 repeat at other end.
5. D1 join F2 attack and F1 backcheck.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20101007154527928

15 min.
Sean and Kevin with D at one end.

15 min. Tom and Tom with F’s one goalie.

8 min. -Tom G. shooting technique Tom M. one timers.

7 min. – 3 on 3 quick transition.

15 min. Sean
Continuous 2-2 with D joining and back pressure.


10 min.
C2 Low 3-2 to 5-5 Rush and Backcheck – Flames

Key Points:
Good way to practice low zone coverage, D joining the play and F's coming back into the zone. A good habit is to turn up ice and find your check when you see everyone in front of you is covered.
Description:
1. Red F1-F2-F3 attack low vs. Blue D1-D2.
2. Blue F1-F2-F3 wait with a puck at the top of the circles. Extra players along the boards.
3. Red D1-D2 are ready to defend the 3-2 attack.
4. On whistle Blue F1-F2-F3 attack R D1-D2.
5. B D1-D2 join attack and R F1-F2-F3 backcheck.
6. Play 5 on 5.
Alternative: Use one puck and defense pass to waiting forwards instead of 2 pucks and a whistle.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121016102144194

D100
4-4

Rules: One pass in each zone minimum.

Goals must be on one timers.

7 min.
E1 Rebound


1 min.

Pucks, summary, cheer






Flyers Practice Plan Date: 10-18-12

Posted on: October 18 2012 @ 09:49 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Flyers Practice Plan Date: 10-18-12 Time: 17:15-18:45 ECTAS
Notes:
Backcheck, d join play, pp and pk, angling Face-off, goaltending


8 min.
5 min. edges
5 min. moves and a shot

A300 Puck Handling Moves With a Shot
Key Points:
Do various moves with the puck and finish with a shot.
Description:
One group rotate clockwise and the other counter clockwise.
1. Do various skating moves with the puck.
2. Big

8 min.
B500 Overspeed 2-0 with a Pass

Key Points:
Players must challenge themselves out of their comfort zone. Make as many moves as possible and continue until they have shot and looked for a rebound. Take the pass and shoot right away without over handling.
Description:
1. Line up along boards on one side.
2. Players 1 and 2 start on the goal line.
3. Players 3 and 4 leave and make moves at top speed.
4. Coach whistle every 7" and they players attack the net.
5.Closest attacker give and go with 1 or 2.
6. Second closest do a tight turn then give and go with 1 o 2.
7. With only one goalie go one way only.
8. After passing return to the back of the line.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20111004075623113

8 min.
B6 3-0 Weave With D Regroup

Key Points:
-Skate with the puck to the big ice between the dots and then pass.
- Pass and follow your pass.
-Stay wide until you get the pass.
Description:
1. Half the forwards at each end in three lines behind the goal line with the D waiting at the bluelines. Whites at one end and Blues at the other.
2. Middle player start by skating toward the strong side and pass to the wing and follow the pass skating behind the new puck carrier.
3. Wing skate to the big ice between the dots and pass to the far wing then follow the pass.
4. Wide wing skate to the big ice and pass to the original centre who is now in the opposite wide lane.
5. The D is skating backwards thru the middle zone and the puck is

10 min.
D4 Two Pass

Key Points:
My favorite game to warm up the players at the start of practice. The quicker they make
the passes after regaining the puck the more scoring chances they produce.
Description:
1. Players must stay inside the blueline and if they puck goes out the other team gets it.
2. Before scoring the offensive team must make at least two passes.
3. When the defenders regain the puck they must make at least two passes before a
shot.
4. Make rules with skills for skating, shooting, passing or good habits.

10 min.
Sean – D

Tom B5 AnglingChecker approach at the back shoulder. Body on body and stick on the puck. Follow from about a half stick length.
B5 Angling
1. Players line up behind the hash marks.
2. Offensive player carry the puck behind the net.
3. Defensive player follow a half stick length behind.
4. Defensive player steer the player, angle and finish with stick on the puck and body on body.
5. Progress from slow and focusing on the steer and angle, then faster, then the offensive player tries to get out of the zone and the defensive player tries to get the puck and score.
6. Practice from each side.
TURN AND LOOK WHEN ENTERING DZONE

10 min.
DT100-D Join Attack and F Backcheck

Key Points:
This is a continuous 2-1 transition game using only one puck and no whistles. It practices situations in the nzone, teaches players who to cover in the dzone and how to support the attack. Forwards enter the zone to support the defense and then attack and backcheck.
Defense support from the point, defend and then join the attack. Coach can vary the number of F or D to create different situations in each zone.
Description:
1. Red F1 and F2 attack 2-1 vs blue D1.
2. Blue F1-F2 support D1, Red D1 support F1 and F2.
3. Play 3 on 3
4. On Transition Blue F1-F2 attack Red D1.
5. Red F1-F2 Backcheck and Blue D1 join the rush.
6. Blue D2 and Red F3-F4 support when puck enters the zone.
7. Play 4 on 5 and continue flow.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20090726093546253

10 min.

Kingston pp rotation.


10 min.
D1 Full Ice 3 Team Scrimmage

Key Points:
Give close support to the ball or puck. Defending team create speed through the neutral zone after the breakout. New defending team identify coverage when the attackers enter the zone.
Description:
Three teams play full court or full ice.
1-Red attacks vs Green at one end.
2-Green breaks out and attacks vs. Black waiting at the other end.
3-Black breaks out and attacks Red.
4-Green rests at the original end.
5-Black attack vs. Green.

10 Goalies Choice and Face-off practice

B7 Face-off Practice-Washington
Key Points:
Watch the puck all the time. Read what the other player is going to do by how they hold the stick and where their team mates are. Practice winning clean and scrambling the draw.
Description:
1. Either a coach or another player drop the puck for a face-off.
2. Players compete to win the face-off.
3. Add competitions.
4. Practice both forehand and backhand.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20101210084123920




Road trip

Posted on: October 21 2012 @ 04:00 AM
By: TomM

Content:

We left at 7 this ''morning and drove 8 hours north to Grande Prairie. It is a booming small farming and oil gas city.
Played a really hard gane and lost 2-3. Outshot then 38-36 and they got a late goa; to win Game two tomorrow.

Game two was really hard fought. They got a 0-2 lead in the first. We got one in the second to make it 1-2 and two in the third to win 3-2. Goalies on both sides were solid. It is an eleven team league and we both have 3 players in the top 7 scoring stats. So 6 of the top 7 scorers and 9 of the top 15 in the league were playing so there were a lot of scoring chances.

It was my birthday so it was a nice present. My team also gave me a coaching manual by Tarasov. The bus driver really flew back and the 8 hour trip was 7:15, so we got to bed before midnight.

These are the new scoring stats as of this morning. They changed quite a bit.

Name
Team
G A Pts

Cunningham
Grande Prairie Nor-Lan Chrysler Storm
12 5 19

Daudlin (96)
Calgary Flyers
7 10 17

Rassell (95)
Calgary Flyers
7 8 15

ARNOLD (1995)
Red Deer Sutter Fund Chiefs
9 5 14

Geib (95)
Calgary Flyers
6 8 14

Potts
Highwood Raiders
8 5 13

PIITZ
Southeast Tigers
7 6 13

Toews Carlee
Grande Prairie Nor-Lan Chrysler Storm
6 7 13

Toews Averyl
Grande Prairie Nor-Lan Chrysler Storm
6 7 13

MORIN
St. Albert Slash
6 6 12

BOUCHER
Edmonton Thunder
8 3 11

WILSON (1995)
Red Deer Sutter Fund Chiefs
4 7 11

MORIN Ashley
St. Albert Slash
5 5 10

Gordon
Highwood Raiders
5 5 10

NEWTON
St. Albert Slash
4 6 10

Toews Muranda
Grande Prairie Nor-Lan Chrysler Storm
4 6 10

CAVELL
Edmonton Thunder
1 9 10

Carver (96)
Calgary Flyers
5 4 9


Re: Diary of a Season 2012-13

Posted on: October 23 2012 @ 07:21 PM
By: TomM

Content:

My asst. coach just texted me to comment on what a good practice it was. The players did everything with a purpose and competed hard. They were happy to hear the news that we have been invited to the Notre Dame tournament in Wilcox, Saskatchewan. Not a big tourist place but the home of one of the most storied hockey factories in the world. They get a lot of college scouts there. That come from behind win on Sunday was probably the deciding factor. It kept us in second place.
For the Nervous System Overload puck handling warm up I put out 40 balls of various kinds. They started with handling two balls at once, then had to change the kidn of balls. I then added one puck; so they had one puck and two balls. They finished with one puck and big moves and then we went to practicing the moves in two opposite travelling elipses and each colour shooting at one end.
I changed the DT100 transtion game because Sean planned the same game but with the twist that they had to get to the big ice between the dots before crossing the blue line and then they can pass. Most youth players play the game backward. They skate wide (where defenders want them) and then pass into the middle (where the defenders are) instead of skate to the inside (draw defenders there) and pass to the outside.
I changed to a cross ice game of 2 on 2 with a joker on each team at each end and extra players along the blue line. Rule was you have to pass to a joker at either end before you can score. It went really well.
Another adjustment was the last SAG we played. Insted of having F and D as the Jr. A team did I had the green play D on one net and white the other net and rotate from net to net so everyone attacked 2-1 and defended 1-2. 'Total Hockey' requires that all players can play all four game playing roles in all areas of the ice.
--------------------------------------------------------------
Flyers Practice Plan, 10-23-12, 16:00-17:30, Max Bell

Themes:
Passing, defensive skating, nervous system, Nervous System Overload, passing, one timers, quick thinking


8 min.
A3 Puck Handling Nervous System Overload

Key Points:
Keep the balls and pucks within a stick length and move them
around the body. Stress rolling the wrists big moves.
Description:
1. Combine using up to 3 balls or 3 pucks.
2. Use balls of different weight and bounce i.e. tennis, racquet,
hockey balls.
3. Example. Start with 3 kinds of balls and after each time around
replace the balls with pucks so you have 3 pucks, Each lap take
away one puck and then add speed when a single puck is left.
4. When you get down to one puck shots at each end can be done.
5. Use the lines and dots as places to do various moves.
The first part of this college women’s practice has them handling
one ball and one puck.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080722204547549

7 min.
A2 Defensive Back Skating

Key Points:
All the players including the goalies do this. Zig zag back keeping
good posture and practice reaching with a poke check with the
knees bent and the back straight.
Description:
1. Players start in 3 lines at one end of the ice.
2. Skate backward 3 or 5 strides in a zig-zag pattern from one side
to the other.
3. Keep the elbow back to hide the reach of the stick and then
extend the stick at the finish of each repetition.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090805115341660

8 min.
B6 3-0 One Touch Regroup - 3 Shots

Key Points:
Face the puck and one touch two passes to start. Shoot while
skating and follow the shot for a rebound. This is done out of
diagonal corners at the same time.
Description:
1. F1 and F2 leave from the corner and exchange the puck twice with the
D1.
2. F1 continue and get a pass from coach in the corner shoots and screens.
3. D1 pivot and Pass to F2 who shoots and screens.
4. Red F1 cycle out of the corner and pass to Blue D1 who shoots from the
point.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121019093156592

7 min.
D4 - Two Pass and goals can only be scored using one timer shots.


Sean D 15 min. and Tom F 15 min.

Forwards:
D202 Keep-away With Jokers on Line 8 min.

Key Points:
Protect the puck, use fakes and change the type of passes and the
situation.
Description:
1. Active players are in the middle.
2. Jokers are lined up along the blue lines.
3. Passes to Jokers are allowed.
4. Play even situations up to 3-3.
5. Vary the situations 2-1, 3-1, 3-2.
6. On whistle leave from one end and return to the line-up at the other
end.
* Award one point for making 5 consecutive passes and keep score.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121011224955196

7 min.
B202 Luhowy Puckhandling and Passing Circuit

Key Points:
Control the puck and “lock and load” when you carry the puck; meaning
move it from in front to
your side. Keep a strong skating position with the knees bent and head up.
Description:
Line up behind the top of the circle with 2 or 3 players facing 2 or 3 players
at the other end.
Have between 2 and 4 groups depending on the number of players. A group
of 4 is the smallest.
1. First player in each line skate towards the other line and pass to the far
line.
2. Exchange pucks and pass to opposite line.
3. Skate to red line tight left turn and pass to original line.
4. Repeat but make a tight right turn.
5. Carry toward other player and head and shoulder fakes with legs wide
then pass.
6. Alternate knee touches and pass to far line.
7. Carry the puck and do a lateral push to face the other player and
exchange pucks.
8. Exchange pucks twice then pass to the far end.
*Other passes like backhands, saucer or moves like in the feet, toe drag can
be added.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=2008072023504376

Sean 15 min. with whole team

10 min.
D100 Transition Game of Support, Defend, Attack, Rest 3-3

Key Points:
This is a great full ice transition game to practice offense and
defense in all three zones. The coach can decide what to
focus on each time you do it. Instead of stopping the game talk to
the players when they come back to the line. You can do this from
1-1 to a 3-3. I will put a modification that adds other nuances to the
game at another date. Point men only get one second with the puck
to shoot or pass. Defenders cover the low players and ignore the
pointmen.
Description:
A. 1 and 2 attack vs a and b and are supported on the blueline by 3
and 4 The pointmen cannot go farther than the top of the circle.
When the puck goes to the point a and b control te sticks of 1
and 2. Attackers cycle, screen, tip, drive the net. Defenders work
on low coverage and B.O.
B. When a and b breakout over the blueline 1 and 2 are finished
and there is a 2 on 2 in the nzone with a and b attacking 3 and 4.
C. After the puck crosses the blueline c and d support a and b from
the point.

10 min.
D100 4-4 Full Ice - At least one pass in each zone.

45 “ shifts and pass back to goalie on the whistle.

10 min.
D400 Small Area 2-1 x 2 Jr. A

Key Points:
Defender eliminate the puck carrier crossing the midline of the
net and the cross pass. Goalie and defender work together to
make it a 2-2. Attackers use quick passes, quick shots, fake shots,
one timers. Get the goalie moving and shoot where he came from
and not where he is going.
Description:
1. Nets are at one end facing the corner.
2. Extra players wait between the two games.
3. Spot the puck with one of the offensive players to start.
4. Play 2-1 about 20".
5. Coach put in a new puck when a goal is scored.
6. Keep score.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=201210230903249


Oct. 25 Practice

Posted on: October 25 2012 @ 04:09 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Post Practice Comments: We did a lot of team play after the first 30 minutes of skills. I did saucer passing with the forwards, first static with instruction then moving and then 2-1 keepaway with their line. We then did a transtion game of 3-3 where the line dumped the puck in and we go man to man on the 2 players playing as D and the player on the boards. This is to review our Tsunami forecheck. A lot of times we don't cover the player on the boards and all three go deep.
Sean did a lot of the skills in the pro video on D skills. We did the 2-2 transtion game with the D joining the play and the F backchecking. Great way to get a 5-5 scrimmage with less than 20 skaters and to get the D involved in the offense and the F coming back hard. http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121026092747403 is a link to a one minute video of the game during last nights practice.
The Kingston rotation with one group working the pp either 5-0 or 5-1 with a coach and the other two units together working on specialty teams worked well. We focused on the 4-5 pk. 5 minutes per unit and every unit got to work on the pplay options.
In the 3 line scrimmage we practiced 5-5 and then rotated which line they play against and played 5-4 and then 5-3 with a quick review before.
Natalie my goalie coach chose a E1 Shoot Until You Score Race1-0, 2-0, 3-0 change on the go shootout. It forces the goalies to really battle and not give up on the puck. http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20121026142749173

We have a home game Sat. and play the other Calgary team at their rink Sunday.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Flyers Practice Plan Date: 10-25-12 Time: 17:15-18:45 Venue: ECTAS

Theme:
Individual forward and defense skills. Penalty kill, power play, breakouts, D join Rush F Backcheck.


10 min.
B6 or B4 Crossover Skating and Puckhandling

Key Points:
This is a great skating and puck handling warm up drill. Many variations can be used with the puck or in skating tasks.
Do a different skill in each zone. Keep the feet moving it is crossover in large #8's and not tight turns. You can also do as a B6 and start out of opposite corners.
Description:
Cross Overs and Puck Handling Skills
Do figure 8's in each zone.
1. Quick hands and quick feet fwd
2. Skate backwards
3. Face the far end transition skate
4. Carry puck using only the forehand
5. Use only the backhand.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20120418155124444

20 min. D – Sean
B2 - Defense Individual Skill and Partner Drills – Pro

Key Points:
Defense do a series of drills to practice shooting, passing, hinge, breakout options.
Description:
1. Point shots while moving.
2. Keep the puck in then shoot or pass.
3. Skate to the big ice and pass.
4. Set up shots from the mid point.
5. One D breakout options.
6. D partners hinge and double hinge.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080720200747488

20 min. F – Tom – Neutral Zone
10 min. Passing Skills

10 min. offensive triangle – one end

10 min. G – Natalie – one end

10 min.
B600 Double Regroup Options

Key Points:
Regroup with each D and support from about a half zone away. Give a target and face the puck. Pass hard and always give strong side wall support and middle support.
Description:
1. Blue F1 leave and pass to F2.
2. Cross and regroup with Red D1 and D2
3. Red D1 hinge and Pass to D2.7
4. Red D2 pass to Blue F1 or F2.
5. Blue F's regroup with Blue D1 or D2.
6. Blue D's hinge and pass to Blue F.
7. Blue F's attack the far net vs either zero, one or two D.
*Options: vary the amount of F up to 3 or D up to 2. Add a dump in instead of a second regroup to work on breakouts or even a forecheck.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120301090901108

10 min. Sean Introduce Game
DT100 Continuous 2 on 2 D - Join Attack F Backcheck

Key Points:
Forwards cover D and D cover F's. One D should join the attack to create triangles and one forward backcheck. Play tight gaps and attackers create 2 on 1's on the rush. Play 5-5 at each end.
Description:
1. Forwards line up on one side and defense on the other.
2. Start with a 2 on 2 attack Blue F1 and F2 vs Red D1 and D2.
3. When the puck enters the zone defensive Red F1 and F2 support Red D1 and D2 and Blue D1 and D2 support Blue F1 and F2.
4. On transition Red D1 join new attack and Blue F1 backcheck
5. If the puck is dumped out with no possession the offensive team regroup and attack again.
6. Red F1-F2-D1 now go 3 on 3 in the other direction vs. Blue D1-D2-F1.
7. Blue F2 - F3 support Blue D1-D2-F1 and Red D3 and D4 support attacking Red F1-F2-D1.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121026092747403

8. This rotation continues with a 5-5 in each zone.

15 min.
T2 Kingston Team Play Rotation

*Sean and Kevin one end teach Pk. 5 min. per group. Breakout with offensive group who now go on pk. vs the group at far end who do PP.
Rotation – 5-0 PP. 5-4 PP. 4-5 PK http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121022102206766

15 min.
D1 Full Ice 3 Team Scrimmage 5-5, 4-4, 5-4, 5-3

Key Points:
Give close support to the ball or puck. Defending team create speed through the neutral zone after the breakout. New defending team identify coverage when the attackers enter the zone.
Description:
Three teams play full court or full ice.
1-Red attacks vs Green at one end.
2-Green breaks out and attacks vs. Black waiting at the other end.
3-Black breaks out and attacks Red.
4-Green rests at the original end.
5-Black attack vs. Green.
They keep this rotation and play a game up to 5. Start another game at 0-0 but switch who they attack first i.e. now Green attacks Red and Red attack vs. Black and Black vs. Green. This rotation can be used to practice team play at full strength and power play and penalty kill.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=2012013110134174

10 Shootout – Goalies Choice

Natalie decide which shootout or game to finish with.
E1 Shoot Until You Score Race1-0, 2-0, 3-0
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20121026142749173






Tsunami Forecheck

Posted on: October 26 2012 @ 09:45 PM
By: TomM

Content:

This is a short clip of the Tsunami Forecheck in action at our practice. Notice how the D slides across to fill so a D and not a F is taking the 1-1 if they breakout. Every time the puck moves to the other side ot fhe ice the player on the weak side point pinches. If it happens once the week side D pinches and if the puck is moved to the original side now the weak side F who is covering the point pinches and the two D are back on the point. When the D pinches they join the two forwards in the attack, they don't just return to the point.

To eliminate some of the confusion we now have the wings stay on their side unless they are first in the zone by a lot, i.e. on a line change. They the C convers the wing on the boards but the wing stillc stays and fills on the new weak side point if the puck is moved to the other side and the weak side D is pinching. Do our C forechecks on both sides and the W on their side.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121026122415786


Weekend Games Oct. 26-27

Posted on: October 28 2012 @ 01:53 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Crazy game on Saturday. We totally dominated the first period outshooting them 17-6. We watched our top scorers younger brother play U16 AAA the game before and score 5 goals (her older brother was leading the Alberta Junior League at the start of last week) They all have sweet hands are skinny and slippery; kind of like that Gretzky kid used to be. We kidded our player that she had to do the same thing and she scored our first 2.

The problem was we were scored on late in the period and only led 2-1. We outshot them 13-11 in the second but were really soft in our end and they scored 3 to lead 4-2 after two. We came out and scored in the first minute on a PP in the third and two more in the first four minutes and led 5-4. I changed goalies to restart (first one played ok) We got another with five min. to go and they scored right after. The score ended up 6-5 for the good guys. We outshot them 16-9 in the third and 46-26 overall. (she got 3 and is now second in the 11 team league scoring). This size thing in hockey is crazy. She didn't make the Provincial U18 team but she led the league in playoff scoring last year with 12 goals.

The key was we got 3 PP goals to their 1. They took 10 penalties to our 3. Playing from the defensive side with body on body and stick on the puck is not only good defensive technique but it is legal.

It is always a problem if you are totally dominating a team but not scoring much. You only lead by a goal or two but it feels like you are winning by 4 or 5. They get a late goal and it gives them energy and sucks your away. We were really playing loose in our end the first two periods.
The shot and +/- chart is attached.

We play the other Calgary team in a few hours at their rink.
------------------------------------------
It was a hard fought game on a small ice surface. Ours is almost International size and their's is about 3 m. shorter and narrower. So it is a different game. The ref allowed hitting; so the game was rough by this leagues standards. Like always there are the official rules and then each game has it's own set of rules determined by the ref.

They dominated the first shift but we made our first rush and our goal scorer scored her 4th of the weekend. 1-0 at the end of the first and shots 4-4. We scored another in the second.. A player who was the only forward without a goal until last weekend and she got her third in three games. 2-0 after two and we outshot them 9-6. We got another in the first half of the third to lead 3-0 but then got a penalty with 1:30 left. They called a time out and pulled the goalie. The D got a shot thru and one of the extra players scored on the rebound with 45" left. Too bad for our goalie who lost the shut out. We outshot them 12-8 in the third and 25-18 overall.

Now we are 8-4-1. We lead the league in goals for but are in the bottom third in GA. Two of our last three wins were against teams that beat us earlier in the season. They didn't get any outnumber situations in the game. Having wings stay on their own side when we pinch when the puck is moved to the weak side has eliminated most of the confusion about who pursues and who fills in at the point.

Next weekend two home games. One vs. a North Division team and the other vs. Medicine Hat who are leading our division. We haven't played them yet but will meet them three weekends in a row. We will see how good we are then.


Oct. 30 Practice

Posted on: October 30 2012 @ 08:55 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Post Practice Comments: We got everything done that I planned. Two forwards were sick and one affiliate player came so there were 15 skaters. My assistant coach jumped in a few times to give us 4-4 and 8 forwards when we went 2-1 and 2-2 in the full ice transition game. They did a lot of puck handling and I showed them how to move laterally to make the defenders adjust sideways which is a lot harder than simply keeping a good gap when a player is going straight and trying to beat you.
That DT100 transition game with the D jumping up and the F backckecking is one of the best ways to practice those skills in gamlike situations. A 1-1 creates a 3-3 at each end when the supporting F and D join the play. A 2-1 gives a 4-4 at each end and a 2-2 results in a 5-5 at each end. When the goalie freezes the puck or after a goal the defenders get a free breakout.
Another great transition game is the DT400 we did. All the players have to defend and attack a 1-1 and we had the F supporting the D give back pressure after the puck crossed the blue line. So the 1-1 lasts about 3" before it becomes a 1-2. Very game like as well.
The players are all getting better at the skating balance and agility exercises as well as the tasks during the figure 8 in each zone. Shoulders are loosening and the range around the body that they can carry the puck is increasing.
I wanted a lot of volume tonight as we cancelled our Spin class on Halloween night and we achieved that.
-------------------------------------------------------------
Flyers Practice Plan Date: 10-30-12 Time: 16:00-17:30 Max Bell 2
Theme:
Individual offensive skills. Skating Puck handle, shoot, pass,
Battle, 1-1, 2-1, 2-2

Green vs. White in all games.


10 min.
5 - A3 Balance and Edges


5 – Big Moves
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121031084114911

8 min.
Figure 8’s
-only forehand
-only backhand
-face far end and shoot
-only forward
-only backwards
-face inside on turn and shoot.

10 min.
C2 1-2-3-4-5-5-4-3-2-1 Pass and Shoot Warm-up

Key Points:
Face the puck and pass on the forehand. Stay in each zone until all players have made a pass.
Description:
1. One then two then three then four then five players leave, one touch in the ozone, shoot, rebound.
2. Next sequence is 5-4-3-2-1 leave the other way.
3. All players make one pass in each zone.
4. In neutral zone skate figure 8's while facing the puck and making forehand passes.
*When there is only one player do a figure eight or touch both knees.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20111103221612750

7 min.

D4 Two pass at each end.


10 min
1 vs 1 vs 1 at each end.


8 min.
C3 1 on 1 Both Sides


Key Points:
Tight gap for D
Attack with speed and go for the rebound
Description:
Drill is done on both sides; opposite direction
1a. F1 get a pass from F2 on whistle
1b. D1 get a pass from D2
2a. F1 shoot and skate into a pass from D1
2b. D1 pivot then pass to F1 and close the gap
3. F1 attack D1 1 on 1
4. Finish the play by fighting for the rebound

10 min.
DT400 1-1, 2-2, Support-Attack-Defend

Key Points:
Defending player stay on the defensive side. Supporitng player give a target for the pass and get into an open lane.
Description:
1.F1 attack D1 at each end. 2. Players line up on the boards with the first player in line D1 supporting the defense. 3. The coach can determine whether the supporting defender is passive or active. 4. On a turnover or a goal the breakout pass is made to the supporting defender from D1 to F2.. 5. Carry the puck to the red line or if the team has a full ice practice, carry the puck to the far blue line. 6. F2 Attack vs. the original attacker F1. Practice various situations. The big left handed player with the sweat suit is Dany Heatley. It is just after he won the Calder trophy. He came to say hi to the players but because we were playing transition games participated in the whole practice and then stayed and posed for pictures with each of the players.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20090726104059741

17 min.
DT100-D Join Attack and F Backcheck 1-1, 2-1, 2-2

Key Points:
This is a continuous 2-1 transition game using only one puck and no whistles. It practices situations in the nzone, teaches players who to cover in the dzone and how to support the attack.
Forwards enter the zone to support the defense and then attack and backcheck.
Defense support from the point, defend and then join the attack.
Coach can vary the number of F or D to create different situations in each zone.
Description:
1. Red F1 and F2 attack 2-1 vs blue D1.
2. Blue F1-F2 support D1, Red D1 support F1 and F2.
3. Play 3 on 3
4. On Transition Blue F1-F2 attack Red D1.
5. Red F1-F2 Backcheck and Blue D1 join the rush.
6. Blue D2 and Red F3-F4 support when puck enters the zone.
7. Play 4 on 5 and continue flow.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20090726093546253

9 min.
Rebound.


Pucks, summary, cheer




Flyer Practice 11-01-12

Posted on: November 01 2012 @ 06:36 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Post Practice: Just before leaving for practice I got a text saysing one of my goalies had cut off part of her thumb and was on the way to the hospital. She got it stiched back together but will be out for a while. It really changed the practice and I had to do one net games instead of full ice. We did the Murdoch breakout sequence but with five players at once. I want them moving and never standing still. I also want the weak side wing to stretch if our D has no pressrue and toe caps are up ice..I also added a 5 on 3 at each end but with a low dice 2-1-2 with two attackers below the goal line, one in the middle at the has and two D at the top of the circles. The pplay was scoring lots with this setup. I saw it at the world championships last year.

Instead of a shootout we ended with a one net game in one zone. A coach sent out 1 to 3 players on each team and the other team doesn't know how many they send; so it could be a 1 on 3. If you pass to the first player in line they can join the attack up to 4 players; so it could be a 1-4. They play about 30". The game requires constant reading of the situation.

We did the three line pplay game as an attack-defend-rest sequence with the waiting group at the far blue line and the new defenders had to tag at the red line before the attack started. It ended up being a productive session. We play both sat and sunday on the weekend.

I put in the description and diagram of the Low Dice 5-3 and the DT400 game in the Daily Drill section.
=============================
Flyers Practice Plan Date: 11-01-12 Time: 17:15-18:45 ECTAS

Game Prep Practice:
Breakouts, spectialty teams, back checking Puck support, low zone play.


10 min.
T2 B5 5-0 Breakout Practice

Key Points:
Breakout from both sides and practice all the options including D to D passes.
Description:
1. Coach dumps the puck in.
2. D go back and get the puck, move between the dots and pass or go D to D.
3. Forwards break out.
4. Pass the puck to the coach.
5. Coach dumps the puck in the other corner for another breakout.
6. Do all of the options; go, counter, wheel, reverse, reverse to wing, over.
Option: do a third breakout and the forwards skate to the red line and turn back attacking 3-2.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121101085219680

8 min.
B6 D Double Pass to F x 2, Point Shot - Jalonen



7 min.
C3 Go, 3-0, Point Shot - Jalonen



5 min.
C3 D Reverse, 3-0, Point Shot - Jalonen



5 min.
C3 D Behind, D-D, 3-0, F-D Switch - Jalonen



10 min.
T2 Kingston Power Play and Team Play Rotation

Key Points:
. Coach in each zone
Description:
- Line A at one end practice attack options.
- Line B at other end practice attack options. Both walk through pp 5-0.
- Line C in middle passing practice.
- On whistle line A dump the puck to the other end and breakout returning to the original end while group C replace group B at the far end and group B pass in the neutral zone.
- Repeat with group C breaking out and back and group B switch with group A who move to the middle.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121022102206766

10 min.
D1 Full Ice 3 Team Scrimmage

Key Points:
Give close support to the ball or puck. Defending team create speed through the neutral zone after the breakout. New defending team identify coverage when the attackers enter the zone.
Description:
Three teams play full court or full ice.
1-Red attacks vs Green at one end.
2-Green breaks out and attacks vs. Black waiting at the other end.
3-Black breaks out and attacks Red.
4-Green rests at the original end.
5-Black attack vs. Green.
They keep this rotation and play a game up to 5. Start another game at 0-0 but switch who they attack first i.e. now Green attacks Red and Red attack vs. Black and Black vs. Green. This rotation can be used to practice team play at full strength and power play and penalty kill.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=2012013110134174

10 min.
DT100 Backchecking Transition Game

Key Points:
Attack quickly and the defender tie up the stick on the rebound then look for the puck.
Description:
Full ice game with the defenders getting support. New attackers have to get the breakout pass inside their zone. This works on quick passes and attack or the backchecker catches up. The backchecker must tie up sticks on the rebound and don't allow a second shot. The attacker must be quick and follow the shot. Defender make a breakout pass to the supporting player in the high slot.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20111102073308428

9 min.
DT400 Active Jokers at Point


Description:
Part One: Each team has jokers at the point.
1. When defenders regain puck they must pass to the point to go on offense.
2. Jokers can shoot or pass.
3. Jokers can check the opponents Joker.
Part Two:
4.Jokers can jump in for one timer shots.
5. Defending joker should cover the attacking joker when he jumps in.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120603101824103

9 min.
DT400 Transition Game of Low Battles with Point Support

Description:
1. One team is lined up behind each faceoff dot. From one to tree players leave at a time.
2. The next player in line plays the joker at the point and must pass or shoot within a second.
Defenders do not check the joker as he can’t go in and score.
3. The coach dumps the puck in or shoots on net and the teams race for the puck. Whoever gets
the puck can shoot right away.
4. When the defending team gets the puck they must pass to their joker at the point to transition
to offense.
5. If the puck is shot out of the zone the coach passes to the non offending joker.
6. Play 20-30” and on the whistle the players pass to the coach and skate hard out of the zone
before the coach shoots a new puck in.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20090726102317243

8 min.
E1 – Goalie choice shootout




Nov. 3-4 Games

Posted on: November 04 2012 @ 01:59 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Played Saturday afternoon at home. The first period was even and we both got 8 shots on net. We had two breakaways but both players shot over the net. In the last 30 seconds they caught both D flat footed at the blue line and got a breakaway goal. We were all over them in the second period and outshot them 17-3 but didn't score. We got two pplays in a row and had lots of pressure but an errant stick hit one of their helmets and the second pp was wiped out with a 4 minute hit to the head. Third they outshot us 8-5 and scored a late goal on a deflection from the point. We had about 60% of the play and our goalie only let in two but you have to score to win. We play the top team in our division today.
Shot chart is attached.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sunday Game: The hockey gods have a way of evening things out. We lost one that we should have won on Saturday and Sunday we won one we should have lost. We were badly outshot. I just watched the video and we weren't out chanced that much. Anyway it was 3-3 after one and we were outshot 21-9 and had a 3-1 lead for a while. No one scored in the second and we were outshot 3-13 and then they got a two man advantage and scored and within a minute we got a shorthanded goal to tie it 4-4. With about 5 minutes left our top scorer stripped a puck in the neutral zone and beat two forwards and then weave through two D and deked the goalie and we won 5-4. Shots in the third were 7-11.

We need to work on angling and puck protection this week. We play the other Calgary team and the team we played today next weekend. Both away games.


Nov. 6 practice

Posted on: November 06 2012 @ 08:04 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Pulled my quad pretty badly yesterday playing so I am not moving on the ice very well. We are going to do a lot of games situation and passing today along with 4 Finnish drills that I couldn't do last practice because my goalie cut off the end of her thumb and had to have it stiched on. It was the meatiy part where the fingerprint is. Cutting frozen butter can be dangerous. We will have an affiliate goalie today. The practice is right after school so the goalies are usually a little late because it takes longer for them to dress, so the first activity doesn't need goalies.

Post Practice Comment: We did everything but the backchecking transition game. The Perry Pearn was ver competitive so I let it run longer and added about 3 minutes to the 2-0 shootout race. Lots of touches for everyone. The Finnish drills by Jukka Jolanen were very good, especially for the defensemen. There was good tempo the entire practice and we focused on skating to open ice when they get the puck and after they pass skate for a return pass. Eyes up when shooting and passing. Fake passes and not looking right at the pass receiver. My asst. coaches played in the games and were pretty worn out after.
--------------------------------------

Flyers Practice Plan Date:11-06-12 16:00-17:30 Max Bell
Lines: Notes:
Individual offensive skills, passing, shoot , BREAKOUTS, keepaway, SAG, shootout, poin shots, F and D exchange


8 min.
5 - A3 Balance and Edges

5 – Big Moves

10 min.
D202 Keep-away With Jokers on Line

Key Points:
Protect the puck, use fakes and change the type of passes and the situation.
This is a great game to practice puck support, getting open, passing and puck protection.
Description:
1. Active players are in the middle.
2. Jokers are lined up along the blue lines.
3. Passes to Jokers are allowed.
4. Play even situations up to 3-3.
5. Vary the situations 2-1, 3-1, 3-2.
6. On whistle leave from one end and return to the line-up at the other end.
* Award one point for making 5 consecutive passes and keep score.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121011224955196

8 min.
B6 Pass and Replace x 3

Key Points:
Pass while skating then turn and face the player who is passing to you. Shoot before the hash marks and follow the shot for a rebound.
Description:
A. 1 pass to 2 and follow the pass and turn and face 5 for a pass.
B. 2 pass to 3 and follow the pass.
C. 3 pass to 4 and follow the pass.
D. 4 skate in and shoot-rebound- go to the corner.
# Do 2 or 3 minutes from each side. Alternate task by requiring backhand or saucer passes or a move before passing , etc.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20110413082013321

8 min.
B6 D Double Pass to F x 2, Point Shot
- Jalonen.wmv
http://sdrv.ms/TIHxW9

8 min.
C3 Go, 3-0, Point Shot
- Jalonen.wmv
http://sdrv.ms/TIHxW9

5 min.
C3 D Reverse, 3-0, Point Shot
- Jalonen.wmv
http://sdrv.ms/TIHxW9

5 min.
C3 D Behind, D-D, 3-0, F-D Switch
- Jalonen.wmv
http://sdrv.ms/TIHxW9

9 min.
DT100 Backchecking Transition Game

Key Points:
Attack quickly and the defender tie up the stick on the rebound then look for the puck.
Description:
Full ice game with the defenders getting support. New attackers have to get the breakout pass inside their zone. This works on quick passes and attack or the backchecker catches up. The backchecker must tie up sticks on the rebound and don't allow a second shot. The attacker must be quick and follow the shot. Defender make a breakout pass to the supporting player in the high slot.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20111102073308428

11 min.

DT400 Perry Pearn 2 on 2


Two six minute games.

Keep Score

10 min.
D100 One Pass in Each Zone

Key Points:
Close support, skate to open ice with the puck, give a target.
Description:
1. Play full ice either in shifts or all on the ice at once.
2. There must be at least one pass made in each zone. If not the other team gets the puck.
3. Controlled scrimmage so everyone stop on the whistle for coach input.
4. With shifts in a D100 game pass back to the goalie on the whistle.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=2011032414361323

7 min.
E1 Two Goal Relay Race

Key Points:
Work on shooting one timers and scoring on rebounds. Good habits like face the puck, give a target with the stick on the ice. Limit of 2 passes before each shot.
Description:
A. 1 and 2 attack 2-0 on opposite net.
B. Pass and shoot to score.
C. Get a new puck from 3 or 4 after scoring.
D. Score a second goal.
E. After the second goal race back to the blueline and touch 3 or 4 with stick on shin pad.
F. Team to score most goals in certain time wins.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120914084920694


thurs. Nov. 8 Practice

Posted on: November 08 2012 @ 09:50 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Post Practice: Very good tempo in the practice. Two players were late because there is a snow storm and the traffic was really slow but they only missed the first 10 minutes. Lots of skating and passing. I focused on angling with the forwards when we broke into groups for 12 minutes. We have two hard away games this weekend. Last night we did spin on the exercise bikes. Last week I cancelled it because of Halloween. It really helps us in the third periods. We have come from behind or won the third in most games so far. The challenge is to get all of the players to assert themselves and use the talents they have with confidence.
We met in an empty dressing room after practice and I asked the captains to each say some things about the next team we play. They are our cross town rivals and we have played them 3 times already and have 2 wins and 1 tie. They compete very hard. The captains did a good job.
-------------------------------------------------
Flyers Practice Plan Date:11-08-12 Time: 15:15-18:45 Ectas

Lines: Notes:

Breakouts, shoot, pass, goaltending, Shootout, rebounds, 5-4, 5-3 PP, PK ,Backcheck


10 min.
A300 Edges and Puck Handling with a Shot

1. Dark group skate down half the rink with a puck and shoot from the middle and white group skate the opposite way and shoot on the other net.
2. Skate on all of the edges and use big moves by reaching the opposite. i.e. Skate left and reach as far as you can to the right.
3. The players skating down the middle finish with a shot and then get a new puck.
4. Exercises are done while zig-zagging in and out.
a. Forward skate and alternate on the front inside edges.
b. Backward skate and alternate on the inside edges.
c. Skate forward and cross-over alternating on the outside edges.
d. Skate backward and cross-over alternating on the outside edges.
e. Open hip turn each way.
f. Slalom and reach as far as possible with the puck the opposite way.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121108114316285

8 min.
B6 1-0, 2-0, 3-0 Small Horseshoe

Key Points:
This is a great timing drill with good flow for early in the practice. Pass hard and get your
top hand away from your body. Call for the pass. Give your stick and skates as a target.
Description:
1. Skate to the top of the circle and pass.
2. Continue and get a pass from the other end.
3. 2-0 first player passes and swings wide and second player skates into the middle
lane. Pass to the player in the middle.
4. Player in the middle one touch the puck up to the wide man. Stay onside.
5. Shoot and go for the rebound.
6. On the 3-0 the third player goes up the boards and enters as the high man. Add a
trailer pass to the high man as the first shot.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20120301081936833

10 min.
B600 Double Regroup Options

Key Points:
Regroup with each D and support from about a half zone away. Give a target and face the puck. Pass hard and always give strong side wall support and middle support.
Description:
1. Blue F1 leave and pass to F2.
2. Cross and regroup with Red D1 and D2
3. Red D1 hinge and Pass to D2.7
4. Red D2 pass to Blue F1 or F2.
5. Blue F's regroup with Blue D1 or D2.
6. Blue D's hinge and pass to Blue F.
7. Blue F's attack the far net vs either zero, one or two D.
*Options: vary the amount of F up to 3 or D up to 2. Add a dump in instead of a second regroup to work on breakouts or even a forecheck.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120301090901108

12 min. F-D-G Skill Circuit

Sean – D breakout
Tom – Forward skills
Nat - Goalies

12 min.
Kingston rotation

5-4 PK with Sean with 2 groups.

5-4 PP Tom G

10 min.
Kingston Rotation - 2


PK Review 5-3 Sean
PP 5-3 Low Dice – Tom G

10 min.
DT100 Backchecking Transition Game

Key Points:
Attack quickly and the defender tie up the stick on the rebound then look for the puck.
Description:
Full ice game with the defenders getting support. New attackers have to get the breakout pass inside their zone. This works on quick passes and attack or the backchecker catches up. The backchecker must tie up sticks on the rebound and don't allow a second shot. The attacker must be quick and follow the shot. Defender make a breakout pass to the supporting player in the high slot.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080719141212210

10 min.
D200 1-1 Pass to Line on Transition

Key Points:
Defender coming on play a tight gap. Attacker use quick moves and get a shot on the net and follow for a rebound.
Description:
1. B1 attack vs. R1.
2. On a turnover or goal R1 pass to R2.
3. R2 return pass to R1.
4. B1 leave and B2 defend vs. R1.
5. Continue this rotation and create situations from 1-1 to 3-3.
*Keep Score.*
https://skydrive.live.com/redir.aspx?cid=bd6fa116988317e9&resid=BD6FA116988317E9!4012&parid=BD6FA116988317E9!4011

8 min.
E1, 2-0 Rebound Shootout at each end.


-Pass from middle to wide lane.
-Shoot from oustside the dot to the far pad.
-Original passer crash the net lfor a -rebound.
-Keep score
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/admin.php?mode=mediaedit&s=1&album_id=27&mid=20121108160612789





Nov. 10-11 Games

Posted on: November 11 2012 @ 03:07 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Someone made the hockey gods angry. We played a really solid game vs. our cross town rivals. Outshot them 8-6, 12-9 and led 1-0 after two periods. We totally dominated the third outshooting them 17-5 but gave up a goal on a scramble in front and then they took two bad penalties and we had a 5-3 with 4 minutes left and a player bobbled the puck at the point and they got a breakaway and scored to win 2-1. We need to score more than one goal when we get 37 shots.

I think I made a mistake in teaching them a new power play for 5-3. We got confused and it cost us the game. It worked great in practice but some players were lost in the real game.

Today we bus for 2 hours to play the team that is in first in the division.
--------------------------------------------
Game Two: It was SOOOOO cold in the arena that I asked their equipment guy for another jacket and he had a fleece he lent me.

It was a really hard played game. They got 4 pplays and us none. Contact all over. They outshot us 33-21 but most of their shots were from the outside. Goalie made one great save on a breakaway by the best player in the league. 7-9, 3-15 and 11-9 by periods. We led 1-0 after one, 1-1 after two and it ended 1-1. We outplayed them in the third.

So we only gave up 3 goals on the weekend and came out with one tie but I really liked the way we played. Sometimes the goals just don't come.

Next weekend we play Edmonton who is in first overall and then Southeast Alberta (same team as Sunday) who are second overall. We are third overall out of 11 teams.


13-11-12 Practice

Posted on: November 12 2012 @ 10:11 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Post Practice Comments: Both goalies are injured. One cut off the end of her thumb and will be out another week and the other strained her back in the last game. We had an affilitat and my goalie coach in the nets.
It was a really fast paced practice. Instead of going ten minutes on the double pass I had them do a 3-0 weave for 5 minutes.
The full ice 2" game of 3-3 is a great way to practice close support, head up, looking before you get the puck, give and go etc. We had 16 skaters so two of the coaches played to make 3 sets of 3 on each team. I am going to use this game at least once a week. The games where you must pass to the joker at the point on transition puts a lot of pressure on the point and they have to move to get the shot through. The two goal Kibyuk game creates a lot of battles and the nets back to back was very competitive.
Good tempo with a lot of good habits required.
The players have good skills for their level. We have to continue to work on making GOOD Habits and HABIT.
We played Sat and Sunday and practiced Mon. and have 90 min. Tues, Spin on Wed, 90 min. on Thursday and play the top two teams in the league Sat and Sunday.
---------------------------------------
Flyers Practice Plan Date: 11-12-12 Time: 20-21:15 Bowness

Themes
Passing, shooting, puck support, tight zone, compete, - Play,




10 Skating Edges and Big Moves with a shot.

10
B600 Double Cross and Pass

Key Points:
Make hard passes. Players should face the puck.
Description:
A. Player 1 pass to 2 and cross behind.
B. Player 2 pass to player 3 and exchange lanes crossing with player 1.
C. Player 3 pass across ice to player 4.
D. Player 4 pass across ice to player 1.
E. Players 1 and 2 attack 2-0.
F. Player 3 pass to player 4 who repeat the other way 3-4, 4-1, 1-2, 2-3, attack.
Options:
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090823205117104

15
DT100

3 on 3 2” game
D1-D100 Two Second Game
Key Points:
Supporting players must give close support plus depth and width. Puck carrier must skate hard to open ice and use escape moves, drive skating and cut backs to create passing lanes.
*This game can be played full, cross, half ice.
Great game for on ice awareness, passing skills and offensive support and defensive coverage.
Description:
1. Play full ice with either all the players on the ice at once or in shifts.
2. Players can be in possession of the puck for a maximum of 2 seconds.
3. Stress that when you get the puck the order of priorities should be:
A-Make a play.
B-Regroup.
C-Gain a zone.
3. When over 2 seconds the other team gets the puck (coach monitor).
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20110324143851598

10 min.
DT400 Kibyuk Small and Smaller Area Games at Once

Key Points:
Set one net up on the goal line below the face-off dot facing up ice and the other net facing the corner just inside the circle. The game is continuous and thecoach shoot in a new puck on a goal.
Description:
A. Blue 1 and 2 attack Red 1 and 2 in the corner and Blue 3 and 4 attack Red 3 and 4 from the red line.
B. Coach whistles and Red 1 and 2 carry the puck out to the red line and attack the other net vs. Blue 3 and 4.
C. Coach shoots in a new puck and Red 5 and 6 attack vs. Blue 1 and 2 in the corner. Red 3 and 4 return to the line.
Option: Vary the number of players from 1 to 3 and switch up who starts on offense half way through the game.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121012034957748

10
DT400 Active Jokers at Point

Key Points
Each team has two jokers at the point. Introduce the game allowing jokers to check jokers and then add that jokers can come in for one timer shots.
This transition game creates three situations. In the first part the players at the point must get open and take a shot or make a pass. The defender practices covering the point. In the second part add that the jokers at the point can come in for a one timer shot
Description:
Part One: Each team has jokers at the point.
1. When defenders regain puck they must pass to the point to go on offense.
2. Jokers can shoot or pass.
3. Jokers can check the opponents Joker.
Part Two:
4.Jokers can jump in for one timer shots.
5. Defending joker should cover the attacking joker when he jumps in.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120603101824103

10 min.
D200 Game Nets back to back with Jokers

Key Points:
Transition from one role to another. Jokers can only hold the puck 1-2".
Description:
1. D200 Cross Ice game extra players wait outside the blue line.
2. Play 20-30" shifts
3. Either coaches or players be the joker.
4. Pass to the joker when you regain the puck.
-you can vary joker rules
5. On whistle either pass to side coach or the

10
E1 Gambling Shootout

Key Points:
Simulate a real shootout by placing the puck on the dot and the player starting on the whistle and the goalie not moving until the player touches the puck. Get the goalie used to shootout skating.
Description:
1. One player at a time shoots.
2. Simulate a real shootout with the same rules.
3. Players bet and go to one side if they think a goal will be scored and the other side if they think save.
4. Players who bet wrong must skate across and back.
5. Alternate ends.
Explanation/Notes:
Explanation/Notes:





Re: Diary of a Season 2012-13

Posted on: November 14 2012 @ 02:38 AM
By: TomM

Content:

It is always a challenge having a full ice practice with one goalie. We did the first half hour of skill exercises and I moved the keepaway to before the DT400 game. We had 16 skaters so 4-4 was perfect for two teams of 8. At the end I had the D practice point shots while the F's played rebound. The last game we had the defending team dump it in and the waiting team breakout and attack vs the team that had just played offense. I had 5 red pinnies so a red, green and white line of 5. Good practice with lots of touches for everyone.

----------------------------------------------
Flyers Practice Plan Date: 11-13-12 Time: Venue: Max Bell
Lines: Notes:
Shooting, passing, moves, one timers Game situations.

12 min,
- British Bulldog
- Puck Dog
- Pass Dog

8 min.
B2 Transition Skate Shooting

Key Points:
Keep 2 hands on the stick and keep the feet moving. Hit the
net.
Description:
B2 Transition Skate Shooting
1. Lineup on blue lines.
2. Skate to top of circle, back to blue, top of circle and shoot.
3. Next player leave when the first is going backward.
4. Each player have 3 or 4 pucks and keep shooting until the
are all gone.


10 min.
B500 One Timers at Each End

Key Points:
Square up for the shot and have the stick back as the pass is being
made. Follow through with the whole body to the net and the lead
knee pointing to the target.
Description:
1. One leave the line and get a pass from 2 on the off wing and
shoot.
2. Two leave after passing and get a pass from three.
3. Continue this rotation and progressively increase the speed of
the passes.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20090812164222165

10 min.
B3 Passing and Partner Practice

Key Points:
This is a great formation for partners to work together
on passing or puck handling. You can even progress to
one net or cross ice games and include more players.
Practice shooting quickly, Use many moves vs. a
passive opponent and increase the movement
progressing to cross ice games.
Description:
1.Partner pass stationary and then skating.
Incorporate going around each other as well.
2. Skate across ice and shoot at boards.
3. Skate-give and go-deke-shoot quickly.
4. Skate-give and go-deke moving D-Shoot.
5. Give-go,defender close gap-deke-shoot.
6. Partner keep-away.
7. 1 on 1 game-use line on boards or nets.
8. 1 on 1 game. Pass to waiting partner on whistle,
goal or when defender regains puck.
9. Cross ice game and use small nets or the line on the
boards as the goal. Play tournaments.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120430092803104

12 min.
DT 400 Game with Attack-Defend-Rest Rotation 4-4

Key Points: Mike Johnston demonstrates a quick 3 on 3
transition game. It is similar to the Perry Pearn game but the
emphasis is on quick transition and the offside rule and
gaining the blue line first isn't stressed. This rotation can be
used from 1-1, 1-2, 2-2. 3-2, 2-3 3-3, 4-3, 3-4, 4o-5, 5-4, 5-5,
6-5 to practice team play, especially if you have 15 or less
skaters. Mike explains the benefits of using transition games
and suggests that only two colours be used at practice to
enable more game like drills and games. Put half the D and
half the F in one colour each. You can have more than two
groups per team.
Description:
1. Players line up behind the red line with the defending team at
the front of the line. Use two colours, i.e. white and blue.
2. Three whites attack vs. Three blue defenders.
3. After a goal, a puck frozen by the goalie or the defense gains
possession pass to blue team mates at the red line.
4. Original white attackers defend vs the three new blue players
and the original three blue defenders rest at the back of the line.
*This is a great rotation to practice team play.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20110305095950592

10 min.
D200 Keepaway U22

Key Points:
Role One - the player with the puck must protect it and skate
to open ice.
Role Two - player without the puck must get open and give a
target.
Role Three - player checking the puck carrier must have the
stick on the puck and in the passing lane.
Role Four - player away from the puck must see the puck
and the player they are covering. Stick in the passing lane
and body on the defensive side.
Description
1.Players line up on both blue lines. Two players from each
team play keepaway in the neutral zone.
2.They pass to each other or to the same colour on the blue
line.
3. Keep score with a point for making 5 or 7 consecutive
passes.
4. Rotate in from one end of the line every 30 seconds.
5. Variation is to focus on skills such as: only forehand
passes, backhand, skating backwards, one on foot, sticks
the wrong way, one hand only on the stick, pivot before
passing, skates on the ice and skull.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120806085000699

10 min.
DT400 Regroup Game of 3-3

Key Points:
This is a continuous flow game. When supporting from top of the
circles act like wingers and give wall and middle breakout options.
If the attackers come above the top of the circles the defenders
there can check the puck carrier.
* Add regroups-dump ins.
Description:
A. Players line up below the circles on each side.
B. Offensive 1 and 2 attack vs. defenders 1 and 2.
C. Defenders 3 and 4 support 1 and 2 from the top of the circles.
D. After a goal, frozen puck or breakout 3 and 4 regroup with the
opposition 3 and 4 who hinge and pass.
E. 3 and 4 attack vs original offensive 1 and 2.
F. After hinging the new 3 and 4 support the defending 1-1 from
top of the circles.
G. Continue this flow of hinge and pass-support-breakout-regroupattack-
defend-rest.

10 min
DT400 One Goal Full Ice Team Play Scrimmage

Key Points:
Practice team play situations with 3 groups. It is best
to have one colour for each group. The next group to
attack waits at the far end.Practice from 3-3 to 6-5 in
a controlled scrimmage mode. Coach can give input
while the players wait at the far end.
Description:
1. Red circles attack vs. Blue triangles either even or
odd situation. Extra blue on the side if it is on the pk.
2. On a goal, frozen puck or turnover the blue fires it
to the other end and forechecks.
3. Purple breakout and attack vs. blue and the red sets
up to breakout at the far end.
4. Continue this rotation of ATTACK-DEFEND-SET
UP AT FAR END.

8 min.
Reboumd

C faceoffs


Re: Diary of a Season 2012-13

Posted on: November 16 2012 @ 03:37 PM
By: TomM

Content:

We play Edmonton who is in first overall and only lost two games and Southeast who are second overall. We are third. Problem is both out goalies are injured and our top affilitate is playing so can't be there until the second period. We are trying to get another affiliate from a lower league.

Edmonton is averaging 2 pplay goals per game which is unheard of. I haven't seen them play and they have changed coaches; so last seasons video is of no use. I prepared my team to kill a diamond pp with a diamond pk. We also put our top three young players together. They are all big, strong, can skate, compete hard, train all year and have good skills. Two were the centres of other lines and one was playing D. We did a lot of team play so they can get used to playing with each other. I put them together in the third period of our last game and they dominated. They are all possible Div. 1 or CIS players.
-------------------------------------------
Flyers Practice Plan Date: 11-15-12 Time: 17:15-18:45 Venue: ECTAS
themes
Edges, Big Moves, 1-1, low zone play, pk, pp Battling, defensive concepts.



10 min.
Balance and Edges with a puck. Green one way, white the other shoot at one end each.

5 min. Switch Direction and
Do big moves warm-ups.
Captains lead.


6 min.
B5 Murdoch Breakout Routine A and B

Key Points:
This is a good routine to use at the start of practice instead of just skating around the ice
aimlessly.
- Work for 5-10 min. and get in a lot of reps.
- D shoulder check on the way to the puck.
- Forwards funnel through middle lane and watch puck before swinging up the boards.
Description:
Wings and Defense
A. Coach shoots puck in and D gets the puck and passes to the wing who times his skating from inside to outside. D to W back to D and up to wing. Then repeat on the other side. All forwards
take turns getting the pass on the wing.
B. Coach shoots the puck in and D skates back to get in while the wing times his skating from the middle to the outside lane.
The D drives the back of the net and stops and goes out the same direction making a counter pass to the wing, who returns the pass and gets another pass.Repeat on the other side.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20080720200745971

6 min.
B5 Murdoch Breakout Routine C and D

Key Points:
Defenseman Shoulder check on the way to read the forechecking pressure.
Forwards read the play from the middle lane and time it so they are skating up the boards for the
pass. If the forechecker follows you behind use the reverse.
Description:
C. Coach dumps the puck in and the D gets in and drive skates hard to the back of the net and up the ice between the dots. Pass D to W to D to W.
D. Coach dumps the puck in and the D gets it and drive skates to the back of the net to draw the forechecker then passes back off the boards to the other D who has called reverse from the front of the net. D2 passes to W to D2 to W and out.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20080720200746400

8 min.
B5 Murdoch Breakout Routine E and F

Key Points:
On all of these both wingers can go and time their skating to be available for the pass. Add the
centreman to do 5-0 full ice reps.
Description:
E. Coach dumps the puck in D1 gets it, D2 skates to the front of the net and calls for the pass D to
D. Both wings watch the puck from the middle zone and time their skating to be available for the
pass. D1 behind to D2 to F1 to D2 to F2 and out. try to pass to all three forwards and back to D
twice. i.e. D to C to D to F2 to F1.
F. Coach calls the breakout (i.e. reverse) and all 5 breakout and try to score at the other end.
Practice all of the options doing about 2 reps each line of 5.
Example:
At my last nights practice I had groups of 5 in the middle and they did from A-F as a 5-0, I dumped the puck in one side and then the other and they passed back to me when they got over. After two breakouts they return 3 on 2.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20121101085219680

10 min.
C3-B600, 1-1 x 2

Key Points:
Hard passes and face the puck always giving a target. D should get a tight gap as soon as possible.
Description:
1. F1 from each side pass to their D1.
2. D1 pass to D2 on the same side.
3. F1's swing to the other wide lane after passing.
4. D2's pass to the F1's
5. F1's attack vs D1's on the other side.
6. F2's pass to D2's to repeat drill.
- http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090812173641629

10 min.
C3 15 Goal 3-0 3-1, 3-2

Key Points:
Forwards create 2-1 situations with close support and speed. One player always hard to the net on a middle drive on a shooting play and a wide drive if they are open. Headman
the puck and move through the neutral zone quickly and make the first pass in the offensive zone early.
Defenders must talk and identify coverage. Protect the middle of the ice and only play the puck carrier if he is vulnerable. Give the shot from the outside. Jam the trailer with legs in the shooting lane and stick in the passing lane. It is critical to have tight gaps and not just back in.
Description:
Players are lined up along the boards in the C3 formation. Have 2 colours of jerseys and play one team vs the other if you have enough players. You can have D on one side and
F on the other or they can wait on the side they will be playing.
1. Three forwards take a puck and attack 3-0. The attack is over when the puck is over the goal line. (unless the coach wants a cycle and a shot).
2. Use the same puck and go the other way attacking 3-1 vs a D from the other colour (coach puts in a new puck if there is a goal).
3. Attack 3-2 in the original direction.
4. Three F from the other coloured team attack 3-0 on the vacant end.
5. Repeat sequence.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20120922115420197


25 min. Specialty Teams

-two groups pp and pk review at one end
-one group pp options at one end.
- rotate each 10 min.

10 min.
D400 Transition Game of Low Battles with Point Support

Key Points:
Great game to practice cycling, going to the net, screening, tipping, point shots, shot pass, one
timers on offense. On defense you have the low zone coverage and communication skills. As well
as individual techniques like sealing the stick to the outside, tying up sticks, boxing out,
switching, all from the defensive side.
Description:
1. One team is lined up behind each faceoff dot. From one to tree players leave at a time.
2. The next player in line plays the joker at the point and must pass or shoot within a second.
Defenders do not check the joker as he can’t go in and score.
3. The coach dumps the puck in or shoots on net and the teams race for the puck. Whoever gets
the puck can shoot right away.
4. When the defending team gets the puck they must pass to their joker at the point to transition
to offense.
5. If the puck is shot out of the zone the coach passes to the non offending joker.
6. Play 20-30” and on the whistle the teams hustle out before the next group goes.
7. If a player is offside the other team gets the puck.
DT400 Transition Game of Low Battles with Point Support
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20090726102317243








Nov. 17-18 Games

Posted on: November 18 2012 @ 01:02 AM
By: TomM

Content:

Game one vs. Edmonton was a really hard played battle. We outshot them 10-6 in the first and each team scored one goal. Shots were 7-7 in the second and zero goals. We again outshot them 8-6 in the third for a total of 25-29. No one scored so the final was 1-1. They have only lost two all season so it was a good evaluation of where we are as a team. I don't know the last time I have coached in a game with zero penalties but that was the story today.

It looks like we can compete with the best. Last week was 1-2 and 1-1; so we only have scored 3 in our last 3 and given up 4. We were averaging 4 goals a game. Tomorrow another tough one against the other team that is ahead of us in this 11 team league. We tied 1-1 last week.

Our goalie who has been injured all week played and played well. She was really sore after and is a maybe for tomorrow. The goalie who cut off the end of her thumb can start practicing next week.
-------------------------------
Both our goalies were injured and an affiliated goalie played. She was good. One early weak goal probably because of nerves and then she made the saves she needed to make. Problem was that we only scored 1 goal for the fourth game in a row and lost 1-2. Again we were good defensively but struggled with give aways on our breakout. We practice tonight and will work on moving as a unit when breaking out. Right now the F are standing still when the D are moving so it is easy to pinch and keep the puck in.


Nov. 19 practice

Posted on: November 19 2012 @ 09:32 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Post Practice: We got all of the exercises done. A lady from the university coaching department dropped of some forms for a research study on concussions and also confirmed we will do a skill test for Hockey Canada on Sunday. She was interested in Juuso and my coaching manual so I gave her one.
My goalie who cut off part of her thumb was back in the net after 2.5 weeks along with an affiliate goalie who played on Sunday. I changed the 3 on 3 game a bit. They changed on their own and instead of requiring one pass I spent some time talking about good habits like moving to open ice right away when you get the puck, protecting the puck with the body and passing to a player in better position than you and then skating for a return pass. So I was looking for these things to happen naturally. It is a process. You can have all the skill in the world but if you must be able to see the ice and make decisions based on your reads.
---------------------------------
Flyers Practice Plan Date: 11-19-12 Time: 20:00-21:15 Bowness
Notes:

Pass, skate to big ice, edges and balance, Breakout, F and D switch, protect puck, battle, Quick attack.


10 min.
D1 - Edges and balance game.
-flat footed
-slalom
-one leg
-backward

8 min. Pass to lineup or moving players B6, 2-0 Pass to Line-up or Moving Player - Pro
Key Points:
Always face the puck and give a target. Pass and go for a return pass. Stick to stick passes.
Description:
1. Players are in four spots. At each blue and goal line.
2. Player 1 -2 leave and skate full speed making as many passes as they can in 10 seconds.
3. Pass to each other and the four corners.
4. After a certain amount of passes or on the whistle attack the net and shoot.
5. Maximum of one pass allowed while attacking the net.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121119120038152

8 min.
C1 2-0 Skate Inside and Pass Outside

Key Points
Skate to the big ice between the dots with the puck and pass to the outside. Pass and follow the pass taking the ice behind.
Description:
1. Line up in the C1 formation at the bluelines.
2. Two players leave from the front of each line and get a puck from the corner.
3. The first player skate inside the dot with the puck and pass to the second player on the outside.
4. First player follow the pass and cross ‘taking the ice behind.’
5. The second player receive the pass and skate between the dots.
6. The second player now passes wide to the first player and follows the pass.
7. Shoot and rebound after one pass in the offensive zone.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20111103221221695

12 min. Sean do with variations in D to D
C3 Breakout-Attack-F Cycle up and Drop to D - Finland
Key Points:
This drill has a breakout at each end with a 3-0 attack 2 F and 1 D. Attackers move to the big ice when they get the puck. It ends with a high cycle and pass to the strong side D.
Description:
1. D1 drive the back of the net and pass across to D2.
2. D2 move the puck up the ice quickly to either F1 or F2 who is cutting across from the weak side.
3. F1 and F2 always carry the puck to the inside and pass to the outside and shoot at the far end.
4. Either F1 or F2 get a puck from the corner and cycle high up the boards and pass to D2.
5. D2 either shoot or pass to F1 or F2 who is skating to the net on the weak side.
6. This drill happens at each end at the same time.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121028211245159

10 Full Ice 3-3 One pass in each zone.
Change on the go.
Keep score.
Loser do task.

10 min.
D200 Coach Call Options - U22

Key Points:
Player with the puck must protect it or make plays depending on the number the coach calls. The player without the puck either gets open for a pass or sets picks and screens to support the puck carrier.
Description:
1. Play cross ice 2-2 to 5-5.
2. If the coach calls out 1 then the player cannot pass the puck.
3. If the coach calls out 2 then the player can pass.
4. Keep score and play 20-30 second shifts.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121109165327614

8 min.
D200 Game with Various Situations

Key Points:
Players must be alert to the changing situations from one to four opponents and communicate with each other. Only use one puck and pass to team mates on the whistle. Extra pucks can be dangerous when stepped on and hockey is played with one puck.
Description:
1. Teams line up near the dots outside of the blue line.
2. Coaches tell each team how many will go on the whistle.
3. Send from one to five, depending on how many are at the practice.
4. Shifts of 20”.
5. Keep score.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/album.php?aid=4&sort=0&page=2



8 min.
E1 Speed Scoring 2-1 to 2-2 - Suomi


http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121119180045227







Flyers Practice Plan - 11-20-12

Posted on: November 21 2012 @ 01:39 AM
By: TomM

Content:

We worked on our forecheck to make sure F3 is covering the strong side boards. Lots of transition and skating and good habits with the puck. It is our last on ice session before an away game Friday. We have sping class on Wednesday and Thursday off.
-----------------------------------------------------------------
Flyers Practice Plan Date: 11-20-12 Time:16:00-17:30 Venue: Max Bell
Notes:
Breakout, forecheck, power play, D join attack 1-1, 2-1, 2-2


10 min
A300 Edges and Puck Handling with a Shot

Key Points:
Move the puck all around the body in two circles going opposite directions. Finish with a shot. Use all of the edges and big moves reaching as far as possible.
Description:
1. Dark group skate down half the rink with a puck and shoot from the middle and white group skate the opposite way and shoot on the other net.
2. Skate on all of the edges and use big moves by reaching the opposite. i.e. Skate left and reach as far as you can to the right.
3. The players skating down the middle finish with a shot and then get a new puck.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121108114316285

12 min
Two Pass x 2

Description:
1. Players must stay inside the blueline and if they puck goes out the other team gets it.
2. Before scoring the offensive team must make at least two passes.
3. When the defenders regain the puck they must make at least two passes before a
shot.
4. Game 1 – only forehand passes
Game 2 – must take 3 hard strides.

8 min.
B600 Regroup, Hinge, Quick Up-Detroit

Key Points:
Hinge and push the puck up the ice quickly. Strong side F stretch and weak side give middle support.
Description:
1. F1 skate and regroup with D1.
2. D1 skate to the middle and pass to D2 in the wide lane.
3. D2 quick up to F2 who stretches on the strong side boards.
4. F1 and F2 attack.
Repeat the other way with F3 regrouping with D3.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20101128092923497

8 min.
C3 Breakout 5-0, Regroup 5-0, Attack 3-2

Key Points:
One stretch, one middle support and one wall support.
Description:
Breakout 5-0, regroup 5-0, attack 3-2.
One stretch, one middle support and one wall support.
1. F dump in the puck and breakout 5-0.
2. Regroup with the D at the other end.
3. Attack 3-2 vs original D.
4. Repeat with new F breaking out with 2nd D.

8 min.
DT100 Continuous 1 on 1 D - Join Attack F Backcheck

Key Points:
Forwards cover D and D cover F's. One D should join the attack to create triangles and one forward backcheck. Play tight gaps and attackers create 2 on 1's on the rush. Play 5-5 at each end.
Description:
1. Forwards line up on one side and defense on the other. 2. Start with a 1 on 1 attack Blue F1 vs. Red D1. 3. When the puck enters the zone defensive Red F1 support Red D1 and Blue D1 support Blue F1. 4. On transition Red D1 join new attack and Blue F1 backcheck 5. If the puck is dumped out with no possession the offensive team regroup and attack again. 6. Red F1-D1 now go 2 on 2 in the other direction vs. Blue D1-F1. 7. Blue F2 support Blue D1- F1 and Red D3 support attacking Red F1-D1. 8. This rotation continues with a 3-3 in each zone.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121104082522829



5 min.
DT100 - 2 on 1 - D Join Attack and F Backcheck

Key Points:
This is a continuous 2-1 with one D joining the rush and the high F backchecking. Forwards enter the zone to support the defense and then attack and one backcheck. Defense support from the point, defend and then join the attack. Coach can vary the number of F or D to create different situations in each zone.
Description:
1. Red F1 and F2 attack 2-1 vs blue D1.
2. Blue F1-F2 support D1, Red D1 support F1 and F2.
3. Play 3 on 3
4. On Transition Blue F1-F2 attack Red D1.
5. Red F1 Backcheck and Blue D1 join the rush.
6. Blue D2 and Red F3-F4 support when puck enters the zone.
7. Play 4 on 4 and continue flow.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121104082851444

5 min.
DT100 Continuous 2 on 2 D - Join Attack F Backcheck

Description:
1. Forwards line up on one side and defense on the other.
2. Start with a 2 on 2 attack Blue F1 and F2 vs Red D1 and D2.
3. When the puck enters the zone defensive Red F1 and F2 support Red D1 and D2 and Blue D1 and D2 support Blue F1 and F2.
4. On transition Red D1 join new attack and Blue F1 backcheck
5. If the puck is dumped out with no possession the offensive team regroup and attack again.
6. Red F1-F2-D1 now go 3 on 3 in the other direction vs. Blue D1-D2-F1.

10 min.
Kingston PP rotation with Forecheck review at one end.

Description:
- Line A at one end practice attack options.
- Line B at other end practice attack options. Both walk through pp 5-0.
- Line C in middle passing practice.
- On whistle line A dump the puck to the other end and breakout returning to the original end while group C replace group B at the far end and group B pass in the neutral zone.
- Repeat with group C breaking out and back and group B switch with group A who move to the middle.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121022102206766

10 min.
D1 Full Ice 3 Team Scrimmage

Description:
Three teams play full court or full ice.
1-Red attacks vs Green at one end.
2-Green breaks out and attacks vs. Black waiting at the other end.
3-Black breaks out and attacks Red.
4-Green rests at the original end.
5-Black attack vs. Green.
They keep this rotation and play a game up to 5. Start another game at 0-0 but switch who they attack first i.e. now Green attacks Red and Red attack vs. Black and Black vs. Green. This rotation can be used to practice team play at full strength and power play and penalty kill.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=2012013110134174

10 min.

E1 Shoot Until You Score Race 1-0, 2-0, 3-0

Key Points:
Players should attack quickly, pass early, shoot to score. Goalies must battle and never give up.
Description:
1. Place one puck on the bluelines for each player on the bench according to the largest team.
2. One player leaves from the bench and must keep shooting until a goal is scored.
3. Scoring player skate hard to the bench and touch the boards with the stick and a player joins him/her and they attack 2-0.
4. Repeat after a goal and attack 3-0.
5. All three players rush back and touch the boards and then repeat.
6. The team that scores all the pucks first wins.
Added Shootout.
Change on the go shootout. Score race back to the players box and next player goes. Don't score pass to the player coming out of the players box.





Nov. 23 Game vs Red Deer

Posted on: November 24 2012 @ 03:27 PM
By: TomM

Content:

We asked for a tournament window hoping to get into a USA tournament during their Thanksgiving Weekend. We couldn't get into any but played Red Deer who is in a tournament in January but it conflicts with a league game with us. We agreed to play them Friday night in Red Deer.

My manager who does the shot chart wasn't there so I didn't have the chart he does which is very accurate. The shot clock said we outshot them 41-35 and the scoresheet has them 12-11-8 = 31 and us shooting 12-12-13 = 37. The score ended 4-4 and it was a sloppy game. Period scores were
1-2, 3-2, 4-4. I was worried about this game because our week was different practice times and game time and we were really sloppy our last practice. We had played the last 3 games and 4 of the last 5 vs the top two teams and RD is in last in the division. They are a little weak in goal but have some of the best players in the league. All their goals were even strength and we got one pplay goal.

The ref gave them a pp on a phantom call with 1:24 left and we got a breakaway and got tripped with no call. Our same player scored earlier with a shot to the high back of the net and quickly out of the tight netting but the play just continued. Sometime the hockey gods are not kind but the 4-4 score reflected the game.

Two away games next weekend near Edmonton and then to Saskatchewan the next weekend for a tournament at Notre Dame.


Flyers Practice Plan 27-11-12

Posted on: November 28 2012 @ 04:18 PM
By: TomM

Content:

This was our first practice in a week. We played Friday and they cancelled our Thursday ice time. The team was tested by Hockey Canada on Sunday to set a baseline for concusiion evaluation. It was a very hard session with speed tests just skating and with a puck and then a form of the beep test on the ice where they had to do a down and back to the far blue line every 30 seconds x 6.

I am changing the forecheck a little to adapt to the talent on the team. It is a combo of the Tsunami, Pounce and 1-3-1 (aggressive and not passive). It is a trap like LA plays. I spent the first half of the season teaching and practicing Total Hockey. Like all teams I have some players who have incomplete skill sets. We will work on this during practice but the adjustment to the system will put the players in situations that they can succeed at with their current skill set and game understanding.

Yesterday I was at COP waiting for my class to arrive and some of the pro's were leaving after their ice time. I was talking with one 85 born who I do private sessions and is waiting for a contract and then another 85er (he is in some of the transition videos from when he was 12) came up and said hi. He plays for Vancouver now. We had a good visit and I aksed if his back is better. He said it isn't perfect but he can play. Too bad the school bus was ten minutes late or I would have introduced both of them to the students. It was nice seeing them. They are both very well mannered young men.

We will do our weekly one hour spin class on the bike Wednesday evening and practice on Thursday. I have had a few emails from university coaches who are coming to watch our weekend games. They are free now as it is exam time and no games are scheduled for most post secondary institutions from Sunday on.

----------------------------------------------
Flyers Practice Plan Date:27-11-12 Time: 16:00-17:30 Venue: Max Bell

Themes
Intro to 1-3-1 Trap, passing, shooting, skate Quick support, breakouts, 1-1, 2-1, 2-2, 3-3, 4-4

10 min.
? A300 Edges and Puck Handling with a Shot

? Exercises are done while zig-zagging in and out.
o Forward skate and alternate on the front inside edges.
o Backward skate and alternate on the inside edges.
o Skate forward and cross-over alternating on the outside edges.
o Skate backward and cross-over alternating on the outside edges.
o Open hip turn each way.
o Slalom and reach as far as possible with the puck the opposite way.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121108114316285

10 min.
B5 Murdoch Breakout Routine 2-0 to 5-0

Key Points:
This is a good routine to use at the start of practice instead of just skating around the ice aimlessly.
- Work for 5-10 min. and get in a lot of reps.
- D shoulder check on the way to the puck.
- Forwards funnel through middle lane and watch puck before swinging up the boards.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20080720200746400

8 min.
B6 Pass and Shoot While Skating

Key Points:
Most players have to coast before passing or shooting. In this exercise the players must keep their feet moving. It is important to keep the stick square to the puck and the hands away from the body.
Description:
1. Leave 2-0 from each corner and allow the players in front 2 or 3 passes before starting.
2. Pass while skating they can be one touch or two touch then pass.
3. Shoot before reaching the hash marks and rebound.
4. Switch sides with the inside player going to the outside when you go the other way.
5. Switch corners after a few minutes so the goalies get shots from the other side.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20080720200746400

12 min.
B6 1 on 1 to 2 on 2 with Both Offensive and Defensive Support

There is a 1-1 at one end and on the whistle there is another 1-1 at the far end. The D jumps up to support the attacker and the F must backcheck. It becomes a 2-2.
Progress to a 2-1 which becomes a 3-3, a 3-1 or 2-2 which become 4-4 and a 3-2 which becomes a 5-5.
Progress.
1-1
2-1
2-2
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120718110748616

15 min.
1-3-1 Hard Trap Introduction

Key Points:
First forechecker pressure inside to outside. Second forechecker pressure the D to D pass and cover the C on if the D with the puck has control or passes to the wing.
Description:
1. C or RW are 1 or 2. One pressures the puck carrier and two support from the middle taking away the pass up the middle and pressure on a D to D or cover the C on a pass to the wing.
2. LW is a defensive forward who stays above the puck and covers RW.
3. LD is the defensive D on the puck side.
4. RD is the offensive D who pinches down the boards on their LW and stays in on the attack on the right side.
5. Player 1 (C or RW) come back through the middle and become F3 on a D to D or rim.

12 min.
Sean with D.
Tom Forwards cut backs.
B500 Cut Backs and Escape Moves

Key Points:
Protect the puck with the body on offense. Cut back turning toward the boards. Defender stay lined up with the back of the inside shoulder and stick on the puck.
Description:
1. Leave on the whistle and practice cut backs, tight turns. Go to the net on the second whistle while the next players leave.
2. Two players leave and the second player stays on the D side with the stick on the puck and gives passive resistance.
3. This is a battle and the defender tries to get the puck. On the second whistle whoever has the puck go to the net.
*Without goalies both sides can go at once and with a goalie alternate sides. Players switch sides after doing both offense and defense.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=2011041612155482

15 min.
D100 4-4 Two Second Game.
Players change on their own. If they carry it too long leave the puck for the other team on the whistle.

8 min.
Full Ice 2 v 0 Scoring Game:

-Play starts on whistle, both sides going at same time
-X1 & X2 race to score 2 goals vs O1 & O2
-After 1st goal X1 & X2 retrieve puck from far blue
-Both players must cross red line on regroup
-After 2nd goal players sprint back to cross red line
-First side to cross red line with 2 goals gets point


Re: Diary of a Season 2012-13

Posted on: November 28 2012 @ 11:13 PM
By: RedwingFan

Content:

Tom,

Great that his back is feeling better. Such a speedster and a joy to watch. (Very entertaining team to watch)

Speaking of the Nucks, I have a question with regards to Daniel Sedin and his passing ability (pass first mentality). (Obviously it doesn't hurt playing with his brother) I was wondering what your thoughts are to develop those types of players? I have a couple players (midget) who struggle scoring and have well above average passing skills. I have not tried to steer them one way or another with regards to the type of players they are but personally I think they would be better off becoming pass first kind of players. I have stopped short of giving them my opinion because I'm not really sure if it will screw them up or help them. Wanted your opinion first.

They both have the knack for finding the open player when they look for it and they do not have the knack for scoring. We have one player who could fall out of bed and put the puck in the net. Even when he screws up the shot he can find the back of the net. This goal scorer is a shoot first type of player and I'm just wondering if trying to get the other two players to think passing a lot more often when coming down the ice, would help them become better playmakers. (Right now they are both about 50/50 with what they look for when coming down the ice. They seem to make the right decision more often than not but sometimes I feel they would create more goals and scoring chances if they leaned towards 90/10 split towards passing/shooting.)

Thanks
------------------------------
Red Wing Fan, that is a tough question. When breaking down the ice everyone should be moving the puck to a player who is in better position than them. Very seldom in higher levels of hockey does the player who crosses the blue line with the puck score the goal. This is when your passers should get the puck.
I would encourage them to be the 2 on 1 close support guy so they can get the puck and make plays in the offensive end, especially in the War Zone where there is very little time and space. Get them to be 270 degree players and try to face the play with their shoulders as much as possible so they see the play in front of them.


Flyers Practice 29-11-12

Posted on: November 29 2012 @ 09:38 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Spin for an hour on the bikes last night. This is the last practice before two weekend away games.
We accomplished what we wanted to in practice. All the players had a chance to practice the forecheck. We have 8 D on the team so the left wing position is easy for them. F2 has to get used to first covering the middle in the slot and then going to D2 on a D to D pass instead of simply focusing on the second D.
The shootout game was really good. I have never done it before. It was intense and fun for the players.
------------------------------

Flyers Practice Plan Date: 29-11-12 Time: 17:15-18:45 Venue: ECTAS

Themes:
1-3-1 Hard Trap, offensive skills, Defensive skills, passing, 1-1, 2-1, quick Support,



10 min.
A300 Edges and then Puck Handling with a Shot

Key Points:
Move the puck all around the body in two circles going opposite directions. Finish with a shot. Use all of the edges and big moves reaching as far as possible.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121108114316285

8 min.
B6 1-0, 2-0, 3-0 Small Horseshoe

Key Points:
This is a great timing drill with good flow for early in the practice. Pass hard and get your top hand away from your body. Call for the pass. Give your stick and skates as a target.
Description:
1. Skate to the top of the circle and pass.
2. Continue and get a pass from the other end.
3. 2-0 first player passes and swings wide and second player skates into the middle lane. Pass to the player in the middle.
4. Player in the middle one touch the puck up to the wide man. Stay onside.
5. Shoot and go for the rebound.
6. On the 3-0 the third player goes up the boards and enters as the high man. Add a trailer pass to the high man as the first shot.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20120301081936833

15 min.
D100 Two Second Game

Key Points:
Players must switch right away from offense to defense to loose puck and constantly change roles from, 1-puck carrier, 2-puck support, 3-check puck carrier, 4-cover away from the puck.
Description:
1. Play a full ice game of 3-3, 4-3, 4-4, 5-4, 5-5, 6-5 with the extra players on the bench.
2. change on their own
3. Players can only have the puck for 2" and must make a play, gain a zone or shoot.
4. Possession from first touching the puck for over 2" leave the puck for the other team.
5. Encourage talking, facing the puck, always give a target.

15 min.
Sean D and LW

Tom RW and C
- Tight area skills.
- 1-1-1
- 1-1 box game in front.

12 min.
DT100 Continuous 1-1, 2-1

Key Points:
Forward gets support from a defenseman and the D gets support from a forward.
Description:
1. Forwards line up in the neutral zone on one side and D on the other on their offensive side of the red line.
2. Start with a 1-1 and the supporting players join the play when the puck enters the zone and play 2-2.
3. This is a game and not a drill, so no whistles. Original players leave when the puck is carried over the blue line and there is a 1-1 the other way with the players who supported.
4. If the puck is dumped out the players stay on and regroup.
5. Situations up to a 3-2 each way can be practiced with this flow.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20100821121211421

15 min.
1-3-1 trap review

Sean – D and LW
Tom – RW and C
1-3-1 Hard Trap
Key Points:
First forechecker pressure inside to outside. Second forechecker pressure the D to D pass and cover the C on if the D with the puck has control or passes to the wing.
Description:
1. C or RW are 1 or 2. One pressures the puck carrier and two support from the middle taking away the pass up the middle and pressure on a D to D or cover the C on a pass to the wing.
2. LW is a defensive forward who stays above the puck and covers RW.
3. LD is the defensive D on the puck side.
4. RD is the offensive D who pinches down the boards on their LW and stays in on the attack on the right side.
5. Player 1 (C or RW) come back through the middle and become F3 on a D to D or rim.

10 min.
D1 Full Ice 3 Team Scrimmage with Dump In to Pracice 1-3-1

Description:
Three teams play full court or full ice.
1-Red attacks vs Green at one end.
2-Green breaks out and attacks vs. Black waiting at the other end.
3-Black breaks out and attacks Red.
4-Green rests at the original end.
5-Black attack vs. Green.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=2012013110134174

8 min.
D200 Cross Ice Uneven Situations

Key Points:
Play 1-2, 1-3, 2-3 to work on both offensive and defensive out number situations.
Stess good habits and moving the puck to a player in better position.
The coach can also implement modified rules to create situation. i.e. goals must come from one timers.
Description:
1. Coach shoots the puck in.
2. Coach calls 2-1, 3-2, etc.
3. Alternate advantage.
4. Play 20-30 seconds.
5. Keep score.
On the whistle either.
a. Pass the puck to the coach.
b. Pass to goalie who passes to a team mate coming on.
c. Pass to team mate coming on. You could also simply leave the puck.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090802114759629

7 min.
E1 D200 Shootout Game

Key Points:
As soon as there is a rebound or goal the defender pick up the puck and attack the other
way.
Description:
1. Coach dumps the puck in and players race for it.
2. Puck carrier try to score defender defend.
3. On rebound or goal defender attack other way.
4. Shooter must get outside of the blue line.
5. When teammate onside then first player in the line backchecks.





Dec 1-2

Posted on: December 02 2012 @ 04:35 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Two games vs teams near Edmonton this weekend.
Game one: We came out flat and were outshot 14-4 in the first but they got nothing for it and it ended 0-0 after one. Second period we reversed it and outshot them 14-6 but it was still 0-0. Third we outshot them 10-8 and scored 2 and won 2-1.

The second game is about 30 minutes from here on the side of Edmonton. It is a big game for my third year players as two universities have contacted me are sending coaches to watch 2 F, 1 D and 1 G.It is a big month for graduating players because the universities suspend play during exams and the coaches have time to go and recruit. Next week we play in a high profile tournament at Notre Dame in Wilcox, Sask. We play 2 sports schools and a top AAA U18 team in our pool. I slways recruited this tournament when I coached intercollegiate.
--------------------------------
Game Two Dec. 2 the focus was on the players getting themselves ready to compete by doing mental preparation. Game one we were not ready to play and got outshot by 10 shots in the first and then dominated the next two periods but were not sharp around the net. We haven't been scoring lately and though we still lead the league in GF our goals per game has dropped from 4 to just over 3. Our GA is better. We also have the least penalty minutes per game which really helps our GA.

We came out and played really well outshooting them 10-6 in the first but it was 0-0. We had a lot of great chances but didn't shoot well. In the second we swarmed them with a 21-7 shot advantage but it ended 1-1 with them scoring on a penalty shot called because a hand on the puck in the crease. We scored on a pplay In the third we outshot them 17-4 and scored 4 goals. One pp, two even and one empty netter. Final score was 5-1 and shots 48-17. We really worked our modified Pounce forecheck. I have tweaked it a little with the RW and C forechecking in a tandem i and the RD staying in on the attack on the right side and the LW on the left side. They tended to drop back after pinching. This way we outnumber the defenders 3-2 if they leave one D in front to the net which many minor hockey teams do. (they should have 2 D and 1 F play a 3 on 3 and the weak side F have net front coverage) So the Pounce in Soccer language has 2 strikers, 2 mid fielders and 1 sweeper. It starts as a 1-3-1 and if the first pass is D to D it is a 2-2-1. A real key is F2 is in the mid slot to cover a pass there first and then react to a pass D to D or D to W (where we pinch and trap)

There were two university coaches at the game and they were interested in some of our players.

We are gauranteed 5 games in 4 days at the Notre Dame tournament. We leave on Wednesday and 3 of the top teams in the tournament are in our group. Two sports schools and a really good team from Regina. It will be a great challenge for our young team. Maybe we can POUNCE on them before they can adjust.


Flyers Practice Dec. 3, 2012

Posted on: December 03 2012 @ 11:32 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Monday practice and we played two away games Sat and Sunday. The goal is to get lots of touches with the puck and compete. No instruction and lots of competition. Tuesday we will do lots of team play to get ready for a tournament with 5-6 games in 4 days.

Post practice comments: The practice went very well with the players competing hard. Lots of nervous system overload with multiple pucks and time restraints with the puck all in game situations.
----------------------------------------

Flyers Practice Plan Date: 03-12-12 Time: 18:30 Venue: SAIT
Practice Goals:
Cooperation, puck skills, passing, Competition, quick thinking, support


8 min.
Figure eight skate with a puck and shot.


One side F-B-Transition

Other side
-Only forehand
-only backhand
-heel to heel

8 min.
C2 1-2-3-4-5-5-4-3-2-1 Pass and Shoot Warm-up

Key Points:
Face the puck and pass on the forehand. Stay in each zone until all
players have made a pass.
Description:
1. One then two then three then four then five players leave, one
touch in the ozone, shoot, rebound.
2. Next sequence is 5-4-3-2-1 leave the other way.
3. All players make one pass in each zone.
4. In neutral zone skate figure 8's while facing the puck and making
forehand passes.
*When there is only one player do a figure eight or touch both knees.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20111103221612750

10 min.
B600 2-0 Quick Ups

Key Points:
Have good habits with the shooter looking for a rebound. New attacker on the puck side should face the passer and player on the weak side cut across the ice and give a target.
Move the puck up ice quickly and call for passes.
Description:
. #1 and 2 attack 2-0.
2. # 3 and 4 follow the attack up ice.
3. Shooter follow shot for rebound,
4. Other attacker get a new puck and pass to 3 or 4.
5. Repeat other way with shooter following the shot and the other attacker passing to 5 or 6.
6. Continue this flow.

9 min.
C3 Reijo 1-1 Both Sides - Gap Control

Key Points:
The defender needs to get within a sticklength of the attacker before the blueline. Attacker should try moves, dekes, fakes, change of pace, shooting beside the D's foot. Description:
1. Attacker and defender both skate from the middle back to their blueline.
2. Attacker turns and goes 1-1 vs defender.
3. Done on both sides of the ice alternating direction.
4. Could do 2-1, 1-2, 2-2.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090823122856482

15 min.
D1-D100 Two Second Game

Key Points:
Supporting players must give close support plus depth and width. Puck carrier must skate hard to open ice and use escape moves, drive skating and cut backs to create passing lanes.
Description:
1. Play full ice with either all the players on the ice at once or in shifts.
2. Players can be in possession of the puck for a maximum of 2 seconds.
3. Stress that when you get the puck the order of priorities should be:
3. When over 2 seconds the other team gets the puck (coach monitor).
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20110324143851598

8 min.
D200 2-2 Shoot Either Net – Flames

Key Points:
Quick reading the rush and change the point of attack. Need quick feet and quick thinking. Get defenders to commit then change direction. No reaching penalties.
Description:
1. Two teams on blue line with one at each half.
2. Play with only one puck in the playing area.
3. Players can score at either end.
4. Keep score.
*Alternative is to play from 1-1 to 5-5 with the same rule that you can score on either net.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120717094107392

10 min.
D200 3 on 3 With 3-2-1 Pucks

Key Points:
-Players can only shoot when the goalie is ready.
-No empty net goals.
Description:
1. Players line up outside the blue lines.
2. Coach shoots in 3 pucks.
3. Players race for pucks and battle to score and defend.
4. Hustle out of the zone on the whistle and play 20-30 seconds only.
5. Leave the puck in the net after a goal is scored..
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=201110060922424

E1 D200 Shootout Game 1-1, 2-2
Key Points:
As soon as there is a rebound or goal the defender pick up the puck and attack the other
way.
Description:
1. Coach dumps the puck in and players race for it.
2. Puck carrier try to score defender defend.
3. On rebound or goal defender attack other way.
4. Shooter must get outside of the blue line.
5. When teammate onside then first player in the line backchecks.






Flyers Practice Dec. , 2012

Posted on: December 04 2012 @ 09:27 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Last practice before going to the invitational tournament at Notre Dame. It looks like we are in a group with 3 of the strogest teams. Team play review practice.

Post Practice: very good tempo in practice. We have now covered all of the team play concepts by doing the 6 on 5 with goalie pulled. It fits in perfectly with the 1-3-1 Pounce. The 3 team scrimmage is the perfect way to practice team play when you have only 3 lines. It gives the players a rest and you can run it as a controlled scrimmage. Going into the tournament our focus we know we don't have the offensive skills of Sports schools which are U19 and we are U18. Our focus is to have better habits, angles, discipline. They get the offensive stars. One of my players twin sister who averaged over a goal a game as an underaged player last year in our league plays for Warner, who we play tomorrow and she is not their top scorer. We have to be really good in our end and forecheck them into the ground and make them play defense to have a chance.

Great challenge. It should be fun.
------------------------------------------

Flyers Practice Plan Date: 04-12 -12 Time: 16:00-17:30 Venue: Max Bell

Notes:
Review team play, breakouts, regroup, One timers, D skills, quick thinking and close. Support, battle, back check, 6-5, 5-5, 5-4


8 min.
B6 – 3 Shots, 3 Zig zags, 3 Shots

Key Points:
3 Leave from diagonal corners about 2" apart, skate around circle then shoot, get a pass from
the other corner, skate 3 zig zags betweeen the blue line and the top of the cricles the fill the 3
lanes and shoot.
Description:
1. Make sure to leave about 2 seconds between shooters so the goalie has time to get set.
2. Follow the shot for a rebound before getting the pass.
3. Do skills while zig zagging 3 times such as;
a, carry the puck with the hands and feet moving all the time.
b. carry the puck only using the forehand side of the stick.
c. only use the backhand side of the stick.
d. transition skate facing the far end forward to backward to forward.
e. skate backward.
f. 360 degree turns.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20091019154513105

12 min.
B600 Double Regroup Options

Key Points:
Regroup with each D and support from about a half zone away. Give a target and face the puck. Pass hard and always give strong side wall support and middle support.
Description:
3 F regroup with 2 D and dump puck in and breakout and attack 3-2.
Next group regroup in other direction.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120301090901108

15 min.
Sean Kevin with D

Tom – Tom with F – Attack triangle and one timers.


http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120301090901108

10 min.
D100 Two Second Game

Key Points:
Players must switch right away from offense to defense to loose puck and constantly change roles from, 1-puck carrier, 2-puck support, 3-check puck carrier, 4-cover away from the puck.
Description:
1. Play a full ice game of , 4-4
3. Players can only have the puck for 2" and must make a play, gain a zone or shoot.
4. Possession from first touching the puck for over 2" leave the puck for the other team.
5. Encourage talking, facing the puck, always give a target.

10 min.
DT100 Backchecking Game

Key Points:
Attack quickly and the defender tie up the stick on the rebound then look for the puck.
Description:
Full ice game with the defenders getting support. New attackers have to get the breakout pass inside their zone. This works on quick passes and attack or the backchecker catches up. The backchecker must tie up sticks on the rebound and don't allow a second shot. The attacker must be quick and follow the shot. Defender make a breakout pass to the supporting player in the high slot.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080719141212210

18 min. One min. explanation before each.

D1 Full Ice 3 Team Scrimmage

6 min. 1-3-1 forecheck

6 min. 5-4

6 min. Faceoff 6-5. Description then play.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=2012013110134174

10 min.
DT400 Transition Game of Low Battles with Point Support

Key Points:
Great game to practice cycling, going to the net, screening, tipping, point shots, shot pass, one
timers on offense. On defense you have the low zone coverage and communication skills. As well
as individual techniques like sealing the stick to the outside, tying up sticks, boxing out,switching, all from the defensive side.
Description:
1. One team is lined up behind each faceoff dot. From one to tree players leave at a time.
2. The next player in line plays the joker at the point and must pass or shoot within a second.
Defenders do not check the joker as he can’t go in and score.
3. The coach dumps the puck in or shoots on net and the teams race for the puck. Whoever gets the puck can shoot right away.
4. When the defending team gets the puck they must pass to their joker at the point to transitionto offense.
5. If the puck is shot out of the zone the coach passes to the non offending joker.
6. Play 20-30” and on the whistle the players pass to the coach and skate hard out of the zone
before the coach shoots a new puck in.


Description T2 6 on 5 with the Goalie Pulled
Key Points:
It is important to prepare your team for late in the game.
Always two on the loose puck. Seal off the boards.
Description:
6 on 5
First get the puck deep into the offensive end.
a.Make sure there are 2 on the puck
b. one player take away the wide rim.
c. one player behind net and one in front.- d
e. point player on the puck side. Keep it deep
1. Try to walk out and score after picks set.
2. Two players pick the defense.
3. Two players get into scoring areas.
4. defense mirror play and keep it deep unless there is a clear shot to the net.

7 min.
E1 Rebound Game

This is a scoring contest that seems to be loved by players of all ages everywhere in the hockey world.
Key Points: Make quick shots and one timers and goalie read the play.
Description: 1. Players line up on both side in the slot with one shooter at the top. 2. Play games to 5 between the goalie and shooter. 3. If the goalie freezes the puck or it hits the boards behind or at the side the goalie gets a point. 4. Players get a point by scoring a goal on a shot or rebound. Only one pass is allowed. 5. Shooter stays if he scores and players rotate if there is no goal.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080723202833407






Notre Dame Tournament

Posted on: December 07 2012 @ 12:49 AM
By: TomM

Content:

Day One: We did the 7.5 hour drive and arrived in Regina at 9:30 losing an hour between mountain and central time and checked into a Holiday Inn.

We played Warner Sports School. Mikko Makela and ex NHL Finnish player is their coach. They are a U19 team and we are U18We They recruit players from all over and have 11 who play for their Provincial U18 teams. We have zero. So we were outmatched in offensive talent. After one the score was 2-0 for them and the shots 10-6, After two it was still 2-0 and they outshot us 10-6 again. They really attacked in the third outshooting us 18-6 and ended up winning 4-0.

I was proud of our effort, especially the individual defensive skills in stripping them of the puck. We turned the puck over way to much with poor passing. The higher pace created mental pressure and we hurried everything. The game showed our players that if they created good angles and have sticks on the puck you can check anyone.

Tomorrow a game at 8 in the morning vs. Regina and another at 18:00 vs St. Mary's a sports school from Manitoba.

The players are having a Ginger Bread House contest tonight and have dropped off the supplies in the coaches room for us to make on and enter it into the contest.

Coaching girl's is very different than coaching boy's.
----------------------------------------------------
Played Regina at 8 in the morning who are another top team. We played well defensively but created no offense and lost 2-0. They got an empty netter with .1 seconds left on the clock. We have to move quickly with the puck and make tape to tape passes if to create some offense. We play St. Mary's, another sports school at 6 pm.
-----------------------------------------------
St. Mary's scored off the opening faceoff 7 seconds into the game and again 1:44 in to lead 2-0. We competed hard to stop the bleeding and it was 0-2 after one and shots 8-14, We started playing really well and it was 1-2 after two with shots 11-9. In the third we scored on a pp and on an individual rush and won 3-2 shots 7-11 (they had a pp last two minutes) Total shots 27-34. Big win vs the tenth ranked sports school in NA.
-------------------------------------------
Played Southeast a team that is leading our league. It is the fourth time this month. We are 1-1-1 with them. They came out hard and we were flat. They got ahead 2-0 and halfway thru the game we started to dominate and then allowed a goal on a 1 on 2 where both D went for the puck and we were behind 3-0. We again took over the third and scored 5 minutes in and again 12 minutes in. to make it 2-3. We got a pp and pulled the goalie halfway thru it with 1:30 left an but we got a penalty in a battle for the puck. They scored an empty netter a second after the horn went but the ref counted it.
The lesson was that when we play with good habits and good angles we are a good team and when we don't we are very average.
Tonight is a skills competition with 5 players from each team entered and tomorrow morning we play our 5th game in 4 days and then the long drive home.
Wind chill tonight will make it -30.
Very nice comment from one of the cleaning staff. She told me that this is team is one of the tidiest and well mannered teams they have ever had here.
Now that is what it is all about.
------------------------------------------
Started game 5 playing hard and then our goalie made a faux pas shooting the puck out on a dump in but partially fanned on it right to their only forechecker who shot it into an empty net. They got another even though we had about 60% of the play. Our 4th top scorer got her 5th goal of the tournament on a rap around to make it 1-2 in the second. We pulled the goalie again and didn't score on many chances. So we played well and rolled the lines in even, pp and pk. None of our top three scorers got a point. On the positive side we didn't allow a pp goal against in five games but we also scored none. If we went with pp units we may have got some goals. Outshot them 38-21 but only scored once. I am sure if we continue to double the other teams shots we will be ok.

Overall it was a great team experience. Everyone played equally and I saw that many players have grown to be able to handle the pk. Our Pounce 1-3-1 worked really well and we bottled every team up for whole shifts. Our goaltending was strong. Scoring went away for the week but that is how scoring goes sometimes.

We really have to work on the d to d and up to the c. Every team we play sends in two on the forecheck and has F3 high; then they pinch on the strong side. Going up the boards doesn't work against that. Pro teams don't pinch like that because chip outs create 2-1 situations. I remember coaching at U of Calgary and we beat the U of Alberta 7 times in a row by simply chipping the puck past the pinching D and then it trapped him and F3 creating 2-1's. They had to stop their signature pinch on us. We had the W go right up to the pointman and fired it to him and he simply chipped it to the nzone and the C and wide wing were off ot the races.

A great tournament for out team. We were competitive against 2 sports schools and the top team in Saskatchewan. Our organization had 19 of the top players go to sports schools this year, so to compete with them almost equally is huge. Maybe parents will save $30 000 of the $35 000 they pay to attend these schools and stay at AAA. Give us one line of the players we lost and I am sure we would have scored more goals. When we got used to the higher pace we showed we can skate with anyone and check any team. Individual offensive skills aren't quite as good. In three more months they will improve.


Re: Diary of a Season 2012-13

Posted on: December 08 2012 @ 05:43 PM
By: Ice Sage

Content:

Congrats!

And sometimes we wonder why we go to all the trouble to be consistent, pro-active and meticulous in this business... the payoff is in being able to inspire your team from the bleakest spot of panic to an amazing performance. What a great growth experience for your crew!

Did you switch goalies @ 0-2?
------------------------------------------------
I was tempted but I left the goalie in. She is a 95 born and I wanted to give her a chance to redeem herself in front of the college recruiters and she did that in spades.


Flyers Practice Plan: 11-12-12

Posted on: December 12 2012 @ 04:03 PM
By: TomM

Content:

This was the first practice after 5 x 60 min. stop time games in four days. Players had Monday off. It ended up being a great practice. It is right after school and not all players can be there on time. We were missing one D and 2 F for health and school reasons.

We worked on the slap shot and one timers. The D have pretty good slappers but the F are brutal at them. Some are pretty good at one timers but it is the same movement pattern and something that is generally weak in female hockey. Even the professional league women struggled with one timers. It is the skill that most PP are based on. We will have to put some time on it every week. Shooting is a skill players can practice on their own. So they are great skaters, pretty good wrist shots but only a few can do the snap shot well, good puck handling skills. Some are great at taking passes and some need work (even watching the Canadian U20 tryout yesterday many players struggles with taking hard passes on the back hand.) We angle really well with the stick on the puck and body on body, Our team defense is excellent, our forecheck is strong. Breakout decisions, making the first pass and scoring on our chances are our challenge. (we still lead our 11 team league in goals though).

The B5-B600 Quick ups x 2 - Latvia U20 drill was perfect for what we need in practicing wall support and quick ups. One goalie was 20 min. late so we changed the 2 pass game at each end to a 3-3 quick transition game at one end. John Kibyuk the father of my asst. coach Sean was in town to see his new grand daughter. He coaches Major Jr. in the Quebec League and has been National Champion Head coach 3 times at various levels like Allan Cup and CIS. He gave a ten minute talk to the girl's about what it takes to succeed as a player and as a team. It was very good.
We have spin class tonight and practices Th and Friday with two games on the weekend. So a busy two weeks.

The next big challenge is the Mac's Tournament in Calgary which starts on Boxing Day - Dec. 26. (for some of the female players their hockey goal is to play in the Mac's. the city really supports it and lots of fans attend the boy's and girl's games.)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Flyers Practice Plan: 11-12-12 Time: 16:00-17:30 Venue: Max Bell 2

Notes:
Nzone regroup, point shots, screen, tip 1-1,2-2, 3-3, 2-1, balance and edges Puck handling, transition

6 min.
A3 Skating Edges and Balance

Key Points:
Skate forward, backward, pivot, Good to just go around when backward. Full speed 8's can be dangerous. A guy I play with collided with his best
friend doing the big 8 and his friend died as a result of hitting his head on the ice.
Description:
1. Player lead or the coach call out the technique.
2. Skate forward and backward.
3. Striding, crossovers, transition forward to backward, backward to forward.
4. Side to side smooth transition.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120911085544248

6 min.
A300 Edges and Puck Handling with a Shot

Description:
1. Dark group skate down half the rink with a puck and shoot from the middle and white group skate the opposite way and shoot on the other net.
2. Skate on all of the edges and use big moves by reaching the opposite. i.e. Skate left and reach as far as you can to the right.
3. The players skating down the middle finish with a shot and then get a new puck.
4. Exercises are done while zig-zagging in and out.
a. Forward skate and alternate on the front inside edges.
b. Backward skate and alternate on the inside edges.
c. Skate forward and cross-over alternating on the outside edges.
d. Skate backward and cross-over alternating on the outside edges.
e. Open hip turn each way.
f. Slalom and reach as far as possible with the puck the opposite way.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121108114316285

8 min.
D4 Two Pass Rules - forehand only and 3 strides

Key Points:
My favorite game to warm up the players at the start of practice. The quicker they make the passes after regaining the puck the more scoring chances they produce
Description:
1. Players must stay inside the blueline and if they puck goes out the other team gets it.
2. Before scoring the offensive team must make at least two passes.
3. When the defenders regain the puck they must make at least two passes before a shot.
4. Make rules with skills for skating, shooting, passing or good habits.

10 min.
B5-B600 Quick ups x 2 - Latvia U20

Key Points:
Forward face the puck and defense get between the dots before passing.
Do everything with the feet moving.
Description:
1 - F1 pass to D1.
2 - F2 get open on boards and get pass from D1.
3 - F2 give and go with F1.
4 - F2 pass to D1 on the other side.
5 - F2 get open for return pass from D1.
6 - F2 attack and shoot.
7 - D1 follow for a pass to the point.
8 - F2 get a puck from corner and pass to D1.
9 - D1 shoot while F2 screen.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121204145927172

15 min.
Sean-Kevin - D Shooting
Tom – Tom – F screen, tip, one timers.


8 min.
DT400 Active Jokers at Point

Key Points
Each team has two jokers at the point. Introduce the game allowing jokers to check jokers and then add that jokers can come in for one timer shots.
This transition game creates three situations. In the first part the players at the point must get open and take a shot or make a pass.
The defender practices covering the point. In the second part add that the jokers at the point can come in for a one timer shot
Description:
Part One: Each team has jokers at the point.
1. When defenders regain puck they must pass to the point to go on offense.
2. Jokers can shoot or pass.
3. Jokers can check the opponents Joker.
Part Two:
4.Jokers can jump in for one timer shots.
5. Defending joker should cover the attacking joker when he jumps in.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120603101824103

10 min.
D100 Transition Game of Support, Defend, Attack, Rest

Key Points:
This is a great full ice transition game to practice offense and defense in all three zones. I have done this the last 2 practices with my team and my skills group. The coach can decide what to focus on each time you do it. Instead of stopping the game talk to the players when they come back to the line. You can do this from 1-1 to a 3-3. I will put a modification that adds other nuances to the game at another date. Point men only get one second with the puck to shoot or pass. Defenders cover the low players and ignore the pointmen.
Description:
A. 1 and 2 attack vs a and b and are supported on the blueline by 3 and 4 The pointmen cannot go farther than the top of the circle. When the puck goes to the point a and b control te sticks of 1and 2. Attackers cycle, screen, tip, drive the net. Defenders work on low coverage and B.O.
B. When a and b breakout over the blueline 1 and 2 are finished and there is a 2 on 2 in the nzone with a and b attacking 3 and 4.
C. After the puck crosses the blueline c and d support a and b from the
point.

10 min. 1-1, 2-1, 2-2
D100 Total Hockey 1-1 to a 3-2

Key Points:
The support can be either passive or active.
Once the new players are in the neutral zone the original players go back to line; unless a regroup is added.
Description:
D100 formation along the boards in the nzone.
Start with a 1-1 and when the puck crosses the blue line each player gets support from the lineup on the boards.
Various situation up to a 3-2. i.e. A 2-1 thru the nzone with the defender getting 2 and attacker 1supporting player makes a 2-1 in nzone and 3-3 at each end. Change the supporting players to create various situations.
Players learn to play in all situations offensive and defensive situations.
The game can also be played using designated positions.

10 min.
DT400 Kibyuk Small and Smaller Area Games at Once

Key Points:
Set one net up on the goal line below the face-off dot facing up ice and the other net facing the corner just inside the circle. The game is continuous and thecoach shoot in a new puck on a goal.
Description:
A. Blue 1 and 2 attack Red 1 and 2 in the corner and Blue 3 and 4 attack Red 3 and 4 from the red line.
B. Coach whistles and Red 1 and 2 carry the puck out to the red line and attack the other net vs. Blue 3 and 4.
C. Coach shoots in a new puck and Red 5 and 6 attack vs. Blue 1 and 2 in the corner. Red 3 and 4 return to the line.
Option: Vary the number of players from 1 to 3 and switch up who starts on offense half way through the game.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121012034957748

7 min.
E1 D200 Shootout Game: 1-1, 2-2, 3-3

Key Points:
As soon as there is a rebound or goal the defender pick up the puck and attack the other way.
Description:
1. Coach dumps the puck in and players race for it.
2. Puck carrier try to score defender defend.
3. On rebound or goal defender attack other way.
4. Shooter must get outside of the blue line.
5. When teammate onside then first player in the line backchecks.


Glendale Community Rink

Posted on: December 13 2012 @ 04:13 AM
By: TomM

Content:

I was just driving by our community rink after Bike Spin Conditioning for my team. It is about 21:00 or 9 pm and -15 C or +5 F out. I took two pictures. The kid's are home but a few older guys were on the ice. The Christmas trees have lights in the background. They have a skating oval around the rink and a pleasure skating rink on the other side of the changing shack. I thought it was a good hockey scene.

There is a video of a shinny game going on during another winter day at the same rink.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080727170324609


Flyers Practice Plan Date: 13 -12 -12

Posted on: December 14 2012 @ 03:39 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Flyers Practice Plan Date: 13-12 -12 Time: 17:15 – 18:45 Venue: ECTAS

Themes:
Power play, slap shot, hinge, point shots Passing,

15 min.
B Skills Warm up Finnish U17

Key Points:
This is a great way to warm everyone up at the start of a practice. Defense do the various breakout options and read where the pressure is coming from. Pass the puck back to the coach and move thru everyone. Forwards pass with good technique and eye contact. Goalie coach work on
technique and rebound control.
Description
A. Defense work with two doing breakout options vs one forechecker.
B. Forwards lines of 3 work in the neutral zone.
1 - Stationary pass with eye contact.
2 - Pass while moving always face puck.
3 - #8 around partners give and go.
4 - Keepaway 2-1 in four areas.
5 - Two lines move and pass to other two lines on the blue line.
6 - Two lines of 3 pass while skating on one side of the neutral zone.
C. Goalies work with coach at one end.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/filemgmt/index.php?id=88

10 min.
B5 Regroup Options and Shots Finnish U17

Key Points:
Face the puck at all times and give a target. Shoot while skating and follow for a rebound. Pass firmly. Done from both sides at once.
Description:
Two D and two F leave from the middle at each end.
1. D1 get a pass from the circle.
2. D1 hinge and up to D2.
3. D2 pass to F1 or F2 not covered by coach.
4. F1 pass to F2 who attacks and shoots.
5. D2 gets a new puck from the circle and passes to F1 who now attacks and shoots.
6. D2 follow attack and get a pass from F2 and shoots from the point while F1-F2 screen.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/filemgmt/index.php?id=89

10 min.
D4 Two Pass – 4-4 Each End – Face Play Rule

Key Points:
The quicker they make the passes after regaining the puck the more scoring chances they produce. Trying to make the players vision 270 degrees.
Description:
1. Players must stay inside the blueline and if they puck goes out the other team gets it.
2. Before scoring the offensive team must make at least two passes.
3. When the defenders regain the puck they must make at least two passes before a shot.
4. Make rules with skills for skating, shooting, passing or good habits.

10 min.
C2, 5 on 3 BO - 5-2 Rush - Finnish U17
Key Points:
D move away from pressure and pass to the middle as much as possible. C swing laterally through the top half of the circle about a stick length behind the D. W's stay on the boards. F2 middle drive.
Description:
1. Coach dump in a puck and call how many forecheckers.
2. Blue offensive team break out 5-3 or 5-4.
3. In NZ rush is 5 on 2.
4. Attack with middle drive and D1 joining the rush.
5. Play 5-2 until the rush is finsihed.
6. Coach dump in a new puck and call out whether one or two forecheckers stay in.
7. Red forwards breakout with original Red D1 and D2.
8. Next blue forward line follow the attack and wait at the blue line for the coach dump in.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121210173057330

12 min.
T2 Kingston Power Play and Team Play Rotation

Key Points:
Practice options where every player gets a shot. Begin with a rotation attacking the seam between the D and the F and read what they give. If the D forces then the low play is available, if the F forces then the point is open. If the pk box is passive then there is a 2-1 at each corner, a 3-2 on each side and seams between players to attack. Force the pace by taking a shot by a different player every 3 seconds. Coach in each zone
Description:
- Line A at one end practice attack options.
- Line B at other end practice attack options. Both walk through pp 5-0.
- Line C in middle passing practice.
- On whistle line A dump the puck to the other end and breakout returning to the original end while group C replace group B at the far end and group B pass in the neutral zone.
- Repeat with group C breaking out and back and group B switch with group A who move to the middle.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121022102206766

13 min.
D100 Two Second Game

Key Points:
Players must switch right away from offense to defense to loose puck and constantly change roles from, 1-puck carrier, 2-puck support, 3-check puck carrier, 4-cover away from the puck.
Description:
1. Play a full ice game of 3-3, 4-3, 4-4, 5-4, 5-5, 6-5 with the extra players on the bench.
2. Play 45" shifts and pass back to your goalie when the coach whistles for a change.
3. Players can only have the puck for 2" and must make a play, gain a zone or shoot.
4. Possession from first touching the puck for over 2" leave the puck for the other team.
5. Encourage talking, facing the puck, always give a target.

10 min.
- 5 min.
- D partner with F to teach them the slapshot
and the last 5 min.practice one timers in partners, shooting against the boards.

B2 One Timers-Pro
Key Points:

Have the stick back early ready to shoot. Keep the stick in contact with the ice and in line with the target for as long as possible.
Description:
1. Player 1 pass to any of players 2-5.
2. Shooters try to one time the shot.
3. Shooter must adjust their position to get square to the puck.
4. Pass with different speeds and also make imperfect passes to force the shooter to adjust.
HIT THE NET
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121109161357768

10 min.
E1 Shoot Until You Score Race 1-0, 2-0, 3-0

Rule Only ONE PASS
Key Points:
Players should attack quickly, pass early, shoot to score. Goalies must battle and never give up.
Description:
1. Place one puck on the bluelines for each player on the bench according to the largest team.
2. One player leaves from the bench and must keep shooting until a goal is scored.
3. Scoring player skate hard to the bench and touch the boards with the stick and a player joins him/her and they attack 2-0.
4. Repeat after a goal and attack 3-0.
5. All three players rush back and touch the boards and then repeat.
6. The team that scores all the pucks first wins.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20121026142749173


Flyers Practice Plan 14-12-12

Posted on: December 14 2012 @ 04:01 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Post Practice Comment: We did a lot of passing at the start. I want to players to stay on the wings and not all get between the dots.

With 16 skaters it is a clumsy rotation. At the Notre Dame tournament we rolled the lines to evaluate where we are and saw. Very strong in goal, good individual and team defense, everyone can kill penalties, we need offensive skill on the power play.
We have 8 D and 8 F on the team. I moved one D to F early in the season because she is young and needs to get stronger to play in the corners and in front of the net. That still leaves us with 7 D. I have changed the lines to have our top 6 offensive forwards on two lines and they will also do the pplays. The other line has 3 first year players and on D plays F each game. So 4 skaters one the lines. We have 2 D that take turns playing either LD or LW. The coverted D is playing C and another RW. One F will rotate through LW-C-RW; much like a rotation when you have 5 D. This group of 4 will kill the first two shifts of all the penalty kills. This gives everyone equal ice time. In practice all the players practice the pp and pk.

Sean reviewed the pk with this group for 15 minutes while I added a few options on the pplay with the other two lines.

Two games this weekend; one home and one away. We haven't played a home game for 3 weeks.

We still sit in second in our division at 11-7-4. We lead the league in goals for and have the least penalty minutes per game. Out goals against has been very good the last ten games and at the Notre Dame tournament.
I am pleased with how we are developing. 9 of our 16 skaters are first year in the league and we only have 4 returning skaters.

One of our 95 born forwards was offered a scholarship to a university in the Maritimes. They want an answer before the Mac's tournament. So she has a big decision. I have four 95 born skaters and one 95 born goalie. All have talked with schools about playing intercollegiate hockey. That is the level we are striving to get the to.
-----------------------------------------------
Flyers Practice Plan 14-12-12

Time: 18:30- 19:45 Venue: SAIT

Focus on Defensive Team Play Passing, skating, shooting, dzone coverage Pk, pp, forecheck.

8 min.
A300 Edges and Puck Handling with a Shot

Key Points:
Move the puck all around the body in two circles going opposite directions. Finish with a shot. Use all of the edges and big moves reaching as far as possible.
Description:
1. Dark group skate down half the rink with a puck and shoot from the middle and white group skate the opposite way and shoot on the other net.
2. Skate on all of the edges and use big moves by reaching the opposite. i.e. Skate left and reach as far as you can to the right.
3. The players skating down the middle finish with a shot and then get a new puck.
4. Exercises are done while zig-zagging in and out.
a. Forward skate and alternate on the front inside edges.
b. Backward skate and alternate on the inside edges.
c. Skate forward and cross-over alternating on the outside edges.
d. Skate backward and cross-over alternating on the outside edges.
e. Open hip turn each way.
f. Slalom and reach as far as possible with the puck the opposite way.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121108114316285

6 min.
B202 Pass to All Players
Key Points:
Give and go pass. Give a target and make eye contact before passing.
Description:
1. Blues start with half on each blue line.
2. Reds weave around in the middle.
3. Red pass to each blue player.
4. Alternate sides each pass.
5. Switch every 30".
*Compete to see who makes the most passes.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/filemgmt/index.php?id=99

6 min.
B6 Jursi Skate-Pass-Shoot

Key Points:
This is a drill that Russian Olympic coach Vladimir Jursinov used when I was coaching with him in Austria. The goal is to get players to practice passing and shooting while they skate. Puck handling-passing-shooting should be seamless.
Description:
1. A and B skate down the ice in passing while skating.
2. A is on the inside and continues on with a shot while skating.
3. B pivots facing the puck and continues the other direction passing to C.
4. B shoots and C partners with D the other way.
# This can be done in tandem on both sides of the ice.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120227085711281

6 min.
B6 3-0 Weave-Regroup at Far End
Key Points:
Principles: Pass while skating and then follow the pass and take the ice behind the puck carrier.. Fill the 3 lanes. Skate to the “big ice” between the dots when you get the puck. Pass to the outside lane, skate to the inside lane.
Description:
A. 1 pass to 2 and follow the pass.
B. 2 skate to the big ice, pass to 3, follow the pass taking the ice behind.
C. 3 pass back to one, follow the pass.
D. 1 regroup with 4 and 1-2-3 fill each lane.
E. 4 pass to 1 or 3 on the strong side.
F. 1-2-3 weave the same way and attack with a triangle and shoot at the oringinal end.
G. 4-5-6 follow and repeat the other way.

9 min.
B600 Double Regroup Options

Key Points:
Regroup with each D and support from about a half zone away. Give a target and face the puck. Pass hard and always give strong side wall support and middle support.
Description:
1. Blue F1 leave and pass to F2.
2. Cross and regroup with Red D1 and D2
3. Red D1 hinge and Pass to D2.7
4. Red D2 pass to Blue F1 or F2.
5. Blue F's regroup with Blue D1 or D2.
6. Blue D's hinge and pass to Blue F.
7. Blue F's attack the far net vs either zero, one or two D.
*Options: vary the amount of F up to 3 or D up to 2. Add a dump in instead of a second regroup to work on breakouts or even a forecheck.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120301090901108

15 min. 5 min. per line
Sean and Kevin review pk vs. a pp – pp at far end with Tom M.
T2 Kingston Power Play and Team Play Rotation

Description:
- Line A at one end practice attack options.
- Line B at other end practice attack options. Both walk through pp 5-0.
- Line C in middle passing practice.
- On whistle line A dump the puck to the other end and breakout returning to the original end while group C replace group B at the far end and group B pass in the neutral zone.
- Repeat with group C breaking out and back and group B switch with group A who move to the middle.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121022102206766

10 min.
DT400 1-1, 2-2, Support-Attack-Defend

Key Points:
Defending player stay on the defensive side. Supporitng player give a target for the pass and get into an open lane.
Description:
1.F1 attack D1 at each end.
2. Players line up on the boards with the first player in line D1 supporting the defense.
3. The coach can determine whether the supporting defender is passive or active.
4. On a turnover or a goal the breakout pass is made to the supporting
defender from D1 to F2..
5. Carry the puck to the red line or if the
team has a full ice practice, carry the puck to the far blue line.
6. F2 Attack vs. the original attacker F1. Practice various situations.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20090726104059741

8 min.
D400 Transition Game of Low Battles with Point Support

Key Points:
Great game to practice cycling, going to the net, screening, tipping, point shots, shot pass, one timers on offense. On defense you have the low zone coverage and communication skills. As well as individual techniques like sealing the stick to the outside, tying up sticks, boxing out,
switching, all from the defensive side.
Description:
1. One team is lined up behind each faceoff dot. From one to tree players leave at a time.
2. The next player in line plays the joker at the point and must pass or shoot within a second. Defenders do not check the joker as he can’t go in and score.
3. The coach dumps the puck in or shoots on net and the teams race for the puck. Whoever gets the puck can shoot right away.
4. When the defending team gets the puck they must pass to their joker at the point to transition to offense.
5. If the puck is shot out of the zone the coach passes to the non offending joker.
6. Play 20-30” and on the whistle the players pass to the coach and skate hard out of the zone before the coach shoots a new puck in.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20111004075900564

7 min.
E1 Rebound Game

This is a scoring contest that seems to be loved by players of all ages everywhere in the hockey world.
Key Points:
Make quick shots and one timers and goalie read the play. Description:
1. Players line up on both side in the slot with one shooter at the top.
2. Play games to 5 between the goalie and shooter. 3. If the goalie freezes the puck or it hits the boards behind or at the side the goalie gets a point.
4. Players get a point by scoring a goal on a shot or rebound. Only one pass is allowed. 5. Shooter stays if he scores and players rotate if there is no goal.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080723202833407


Dec. 16-17 Games

Posted on: December 17 2012 @ 02:56 PM
By: TomM

Content:

The last two league games before Christmas.

Saturday we were flat but the other team wasn't flying either. I have changed my line up to put a different player on left wing with my two top scorers. They haven't got a point for 6 games and something needs to change. A centre moved with them and the left wing, who is the third top point getter on the team to a line with my other two point getters. That gives us two lines that can score. I put a checking line of 3 F and one D together. Two D's take turns playing left wing alternate games. A coverted D is playing C with a RW and one forward goes through the line. The two scoring lines play the PP and the checking line the first two shifts of the pk. So the ice time works out equally.

The game ended 2-2 with the converted D scoring one and the LW I moved scoring the other. The shots were almost even with us outshooting them 28-25.
----------------------------------
Sundays game was vs. a team we struggle against. There best player always gets points against us. I made another adjustment and put an offensively minded left shooting D on RD and her right handed shooting partner on LD. This enables her to be a bigger part of the offense and suits her personality more than being a defensive defenseman and puts her partner in a role that suits her style. I also made three units that played together.

It was 0-0 after one. Finally my top scorers clicked in and got two in the second to tie it 2-2. They started the third trying to break our forecheck by passing up the middle. F1 checker tipped the pass right to our F2 player in front and she scored with agreat top shelf shot 19 seconds into the period.
They tied it with their top scorer getting her third on a great shot pass tip. We got two more in the last half of the period and won 5-3. We dominated the last period like we often do. The spin on the bike for one hour each week really helps the recovery between shifts and we win most third periods.

It was nice to see the top two scorers get 3 goals and the other offensive line get two. So we go into the Christmas break at 60% with a record of 12-7-5. We are 3-1-0 in league play since we started using the 1-3-1 Pounce at the start of December. 14 GF and 7 GA in 4 games. It was very effective in the Notre Dame tournament where we were in the top grouping and pulled a major upset vs a sports school.

This week we practice Tues. spin class on the bikes Wed. practice Th. Friday we are having a family night with parents and siblings playing. I think I will also invite the alumni from last year. Practice Sat. and Sunday. Off the 24-25th and the annual Mac's Midget tournament starts of Dec. 26. I am going to ask Gaston to run a skating practice on Th. or Sat.


Re: Diary of a Season 2012-13

Posted on: December 19 2012 @ 02:42 PM
By: TomM

Content:

This was a very high tempo practice. We had 3 goalies and worked them into the games and drills. One goalie is always late at this practice because of school so it helped having 2 right away. I adjusted the times a little at the start to give 8 minutes for partner work on the slap shot and one times. I love the shootout game that we did at the end. We played 1-1, 2-2, 3-3 and kept score. We go the next 5 days in a row with Spin today, on ice Th., Fri., Sat., Sun. Friday we are having our family scrimmage and Saturday Gaston is doing a one hour skating session.

My captain and asst. coach were at a press conference yesterday. The Mac's Midget Tournament starts Dec. 26. http://www.macstournament.ab.ca/division.aspx?lgid=0&did=3687&p=standings&gtid=1331&sid=1094 There are 15 teams in 3 groups of 5 on the Girl's side and 25 teams in 5 of 5 on the boy's. It is fun for the players because every game has hundreds of fans and if you get into the playoff round thousands come and the Championship game is in the Saddledome. We have a chance if all cylinders are firing at the same time.

My captain committed to UPEI this week.
-------------------------------------------

Flyers Practice Plan Date: 18-12-12 16:00-17:30 Venue: Max Bell
Theme: 2-1 decisions on offense and defense.

Puck handling, pass, 2-1, transition, 3-0 Regroup, shootout, games, one zone, cross-ice

10 min.
A300 Individual Puck Handling Practice

Description:
1. Handle two or three pucks at once never letting them get more than a stick length away.
2. Reach with one hand as far back and forward as possible.
3. Slalom to the right and reach with the puck to the left and visa-versa in order to separate the movement of the upper and lower body.
4. Repeat the same thing but this time skate and power away from the puck.
5. Move the puck from the stick to the inside and outside skate edges and back.
6. Bring the puck thru the skates on the forehand and backhand.
7. Hands close together and legs wide apart and use head and shoulder fakes.
8. Toe drag and move to the forehand and the backhand.
9. Fake a slapshot and accelerate to the forehand and backhand.
10. Handle two or three different kinds of balls around the body. i.e. tennis, racquet, hockey, Keep the balls within a stick length and under control.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080722140655746

10 min.
B500 Puck Protection - Dean

Key Points:
Shield the puck with your body. Protect the puck before checking another player.
Description:
- Faceoff circles are the battle zones.
- 5 or 6 players at each faceoff circle.
- 3 or 4 players handle a puck inside the circle while 2 or 3 wait outside the circle.
- Protect the puck and also knock the other players puck out of the circle.
- When eliminated rotate to the next clockwise circle to change opponents.
- Waiting player enter the circle when someone is eliminated.
- Put a time limit on the exercise.
-Those who move the fewest times are the winners.

10 min.
B6 Chaos 3-0 Pass and Shoot

Key Points:
Give a target, pivot to face the puck all the time; use forehand passes and backhand only when passing forward.
Description:
1. Three players leave from each end.
2. Each group passes one puck in nzone.
3. On the whistle player with the puck shoot.
4. Other two players save ice and get a pass from the corner and shoot. a few seconds apart.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20101006084345432

10 min.
B6 D Shoot, 2-1, D Shoot

Key Points:
D drag the puck inside the dot before shooting. Forwards attack with speed. D deny the middle and cover the most dangerous play.
Description:
1. Players in the corners.
2. D1 get a pass from the corner and shoot.
3, D2 in the corner pass to the forwards and follow the 2-1 attack vs D1.
4. D2 get a pass from the corner and shoot while original F's screen vs D1.
5. Repeat the other way.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20101007114241524

10 min.
B6, 2-0, Regroup, 2-1 Back

Key Points:
Forwards pass to the outside and skate to the middle with the puck. Face the puck all the time. D pivot with the puck. D work with the goalie and only give away poor shots. Forwards attack with speed and make the first play early. One high one low; one fast one slow.
Description:
1. F1 and F2 leave from diagonal corners.
2. D1 leave from diagonal bluelines.
3. F's regroup with D in nzone.
4. F's skate to far blue-D follow.
5. F's turn at own blueline.
6. F's attack 2-1 vs. D1's.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20101007155153211

10 min.
DT100 Erkka Continuous 2-1 with Passive Support

Key Points:
Erkka Westerlund has coached the Finnish Olympic Team and been director of Finnish Hockey development. He is more or less the Father of Transition Games. They are now the logical progression from Flow Situation drills from 1-1 to 3-2.
Description:
1. Two white F's attack one black D 2-1.
2. When the puck enters the offensive zone 2 black F's and one white D follow the play and passively support from above the circles.
3. After a goal, frozen puck or turnover and breakout pass the new 2 F's attack the new D the other way.
4. This flow continues. It can be played from a 1-1 to a 3-2 with passive, active or a combination of passive and active support.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20101007164507476

20 min.
D5 - Games of Two Pass with Jokers

Key Points:
Keep score in all of the games. Change where the jokers are and allow jokers to check jokers. Rotate on goals against. Rotate areas each game.
Description:
1. Play 1 one goal games and one cross ice game.
2. Require that 2 passes are needed before shooting and the jokers must be passed to.
3. Players don't check jokers but cover a man.
4. Jokers can pass or shoot but can't skate past the line.
5. Use passing rules like only forehand, skating rules as only backward or on one foot, quickness rules like only one second with the puck or good habit rules such as goals must be on one-timers.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20111021093048709

10 min.
E1 D200 Shootout Game: 1-1, 2-2, 3-3

Key Points:
As soon as there is a rebound or goal the defender pick up the puck and attack the other way.
Description:
1. Coach dumps the puck in and players race for it.
2. Puck carrier try to score defender defend.
3. On rebound or goal defender attack other way.
4. Shooter must get outside of the blue line.
5. When teammate onside then first player in the line backchecks.


20-12-12 Practice

Posted on: December 20 2012 @ 10:20 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Post Practice Comments: 16 skaters and 3 Goalies.

In the warm up game they played 4-4 at each end and to transition to offense you had to carry the puck over the blue line and all get onside. We did skating rules. First they had to scull with blades always on the ice, next they could only slalom skate, then only backward skating and we finished with regular skating but playing the opposite way, i.e. left handers had to play right handed.

I took a minute at the start to show them the first 4 drills because we have done them before. In the 2-0 Jursinov passing we focued on passing and shooting while skating - no gliding. In the overspeed the focus was shoot while skating but take the pass first and get the head up. Coaches moved around in the partner slap shot practice and I stressed squaring up early and following through at the net in the one timer drill.

The 1-1 transition game with D joining rush and F backchecking ends up being a 3-3 at each end. If the defenders just dump it out the attacking players can regroup. We had 3 units of 5 for the 1-0, 2-1, 3-1-1 drills. Timing is crucial for the long pass and making the play early with speed is how the 2-1 works. 'One High One Low-One Fast One Slow' is the mantra of a 2-1.

We took time to go over the defensive 3-2. Even in the video the Danish U20 team is playing man to man on the first two attackers and allowing the trailer to walk in alone. We teach 'wide D takes the player to the net and the strong side D plays a 2-1 and jams a late trailer pass. The D did a pretty good job in the drill. The nets back to back and the shootout race were very competitive.

-----------------------------
Flyers Practice Plan Date: 20-12-12 Time: 17:15-18:45 Venue: ECTAS

Themes

3 on 2 on offense and defense, Pass while skating, overspeed, scoring, Slapshot, one timers, back check, D join the rush




8 min.
D4 Transition Defense to Offense

Key Points
Defending player stay on the defensive side. Supporitng player give a target for the pass and get into an open lane.
Description
1.F1 attack D1 at each end.
2. Players line up on the boards with the first player in line D1 supporting the defense.
3. The coach can determine whether the supporting defender is passive or active.
4. On a turnover or a goal the breakout pass is made to the supporting defender from D1 to F2..
5. Carry the puck to the red line or if the team has a full ice practice, carry the puck to the far blue line.
6. F2 Attack vs. the original attacker F1.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090726104059741

8 min.
B6 Jursi Skate-Pass-Shoot

Key Points:
This is a drill that Russian Olympic coach Vladimir Jursinov used when I was coaching with him in Austria. The goal is to get players to practice passing and shooting while they skate. Puck handling-passing-shooting should be seamless.
Description:
1. A and B skate down the ice in passing while skating.
2. A is on the inside and continues on with a shot while skating.
3. B pivots facing the puck and continues the other direction passing to C.
4. B shoots and C partners with D the other way.
# This can be done in tandem on both sides of the ice.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120227085711281

8 min.
B6 Chaos NZ Overspeed with Regroup-Pro

Key Points:
Players skate as fast as possible weaving through each other in the middle. Try various moves and dekes with the head up. Description:
1. Players line up against the boards at the top of the circle.
2. On the whistle skate into the nzone and make moves at top speed.
Options:
A. Skate in and shoot then rebound.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121109101355159

12 min. First 6 Slap Shot Practice with Partner
B5 Double Cross-Drop-Pass-Shoot Options
Key Points:
Cross over skate, leave the drop pass as still as possible.
Pass quickly.
Going to the net for a bang in or practicing a one timer from the high slot is also easy to do.
Description:
Option One: Double Drop-Pass-Shoot
-R1 skate around circle and cross-drop to R2
-R 2 gain the blue line and cross-drop to R1.
-R1 either shoot or pass to R2 who shoots.
-Rebound.
Option Two: Pass Low and One Timer
-Repeat as in Option One.
-After second drop B1 pass to B3 or B4.
-B3 or B4 pass to B2 who one time shoots.
-B1 and B2 rebound then wait at goal line for a pass from B5.

12 min.
D100 Transition Game with D Joining the Attack and F Backchecking 1-1 and then 2-1

Key Points:
Many coaches have a 2 on 1 at one end and then another starts the other way with a new puck and the original players skate up the ice and join the play on offense and defense. This can be done in a transiton game.
* It is like the continuous 1-1 to 3-2 but the players get to be on both offense and defense.*
Description:
Use one puck and have the new players on offense at the blue line and the new D a little farther back then they can attack when passed to.
2. The players who just were on O now backcheck and the players on D join the rush.
3. When they enter the zone the new players skate to the blue and are passive until they get the puck.
4. The players who have only gone
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20121104082522829

12 min.
C3 1-0, 2-1, 3-2 Czech U20

Key Points:
Forward see the puck at all times. Make hard passes. One forward without the puck drive hard to the net. Look for rebounds. Attack with speed and hit the net.
Description:
1. Do this in five player units or 3 F and 2 D.
2. F1 leave and pass to D1 who hinges with D2 .
3. F1 get a stretch pass from D2.
4. F2 and F3 cross and drop and attack vs. D2 in the same direction.
5. F1-F2-F3 attack the other way vs. D1 while D2 backchecks.
6. Next group of 3 F and 2 D repeat in the other direction.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121214083701633

10 min.
C3 Continuous 3-2 - Danish U20

Key Points:
Attack with one in each lane with speed. Two players go hard to the net and one trail making a triangle. Fight for rebounds. Defenders delay the play and protect the middle. One D take attacker to the net and other D play a 2-1 on the puck side.
Description:
1. F1 leave and pass to F2 who skates up the middle while F1 and F3 cross to wide lanes.
2. F1-F2-F3 attack 3-2 vs. D1-D2.
3. The next group of 5 wait in the neutral zone to repeat in the other direction.
PROGRESSIONS:
A. After the 3-2 is practiced start the next rush with the defenders making a pass to the forwards waiting above the circles.
B. Then progress to a Transition Game with the Red D defending vs. blue F and the D who makes the breakout pass join the rush making it a 3-3.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121214143704286

10 min.
D5 Nets back to back with jokers

Key Points:
Jokers can only have the puck 1 second and then must pass or shoot. You can add that
they must move sideways or back when they get the puck.
Description:
Place the nets back to back at the red line.
-Half the team play and half are jokers. Shifts 30".
-When the team gets the puck on defense they must pass to a joker before they can
score. Jokers can move around on the perimeter.
If you have only one goalie then it is a great conditioning - skating drill for the goalie to
play for both teams and skate around to the other goal.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=2012052310414296

10 min.
E1 Two Goal Relay Race

Key Points:
Work on shooting one timers and scoring on rebounds. Good habits like face the puck, give a target with the stick on the ice. Limit of 2 passes before each shot.
Description:
A. 1 and 2 attack 2-0 on opposite net.
B. Pass and shoot to score.
C. Get a new puck from 3 or 4 after scoring.
D. Score a second goal.
E. After the second goal race back to the blueline and touch 3 or 4 with stick on shin pad.
F. Team to score most goals in certain time wins.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120914084920694






Re: Diary of a Season 2012-13

Posted on: December 22 2012 @ 04:57 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Last night we had our Family Game. My team plus fathers and brothers with about 30 players in all. It was a good time for everyone. The goalies played out and a F and D and a father played goal.

Today's practice is our last one before the Mac's Tournament that starts Dec. 26.

Post Practice Comments:
I shortened a few drills by a couple of minutes and added slap shots while moving for 4 minutes. One of the goalies got caught at a train stop and was 15 min. late and missed the shots in the first few drills. I also had them play a 3 team scrimmage with a 5-4 at each end. We re-arranged the lines a bit and the Power play practice and that scrimmag allowed them to play together for a while. We met after in an empty dressing room to go over preparing for the tournament on the 26th. We have no big injuries, more owwies and they get 3 days off for Christmas and their bodies should be fresh for the Mac's. I think we are as ready as we can be.
------------------------------------------------------------------

Flyers Practice Plan Date: 22-12-12 Time: 14:30-16:00 Venue: Ectas

Themes:
Puck Handling, skating, Power Play, Penalty kill, War zone play, goalie pass, Situations, regroups, awareness

6 min. Without Puck
A3 Skating Edges and Balance Warm-up - Kazakstan W

Key Points:
Skate forward, backward, pivot, Good to just go around when backward. Full speed 8's can be dangerous. A guy I play with collided with his best friend doing the big 8 and his friend died as a result of hitting his head on the ice.
Description:
1. Player lead or the coach call out the technique.
2. Skate forward and backward.
3. Striding, crossovers, transition forward to backward, backward to forward.
4. Side to side smooth transition.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120911085544248

8min.
A2 Russian Puck-Handling Warm-up with Shots

Key Points:
This can be done every time players go on the ice to expand their muscle memory. The point of these exercises is to increase the size of the reach with the stickhandling moves, and to separate the upper and lower body
Description:
• From the A2 formation, players skate down the ice in 3 or 4 groups; practice big moves with the puck.

8 min. one game of each
A2 Puck Dog and Pass Dog

Key Points:
Encourage the players to use moves and fakes, change of pace and to protect the puck.
Description:
This game has the players line up at the end of the rink in the A2 formation. Each player has a puck. One player (who is 'it') is at the blue line and calls out 'British Puck-dog.' The players stickhandle the puck, trying to get to the end without being checked. If a player loses the puck, she becomes 'it' and is in the middle checking. The last player with a puck wins. Another option is Pass Dog where partners must make at least one pass in each zone and get to the other end without losing the puck.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080723202832196

8 min.
G-B600 Goalie Pass and 1-0 U22

Key Points:
Hit the net so the goalie can make the save and then make a breakout pass. Give good targets on the wall and time with the other side so goalies have time to pass between shots.
Description:
1. Red 1 and Blue 1 leave toward far end.
2. Goalie at each end pass to 2 on boards.
3. Blue 2 pass to Red 1 and Red 2 pass to Blue 1.
4. Blue and Red 2's skate to the other end for a breakout pass.
5. Blue and Red 1's shoot on net from top of circles.
6, Red 3 pass to Blue 2 and Blue 3 pass to Red 2.
7. Continue rotation and then switch side after a few minutes.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120903100000853

Add 4 minutes of shots.

10 min.
B5-B600 Quick ups x 2 - Latvia U20


Key Points:
Forward face the puck and defense get between the dots before passing. Do everything with the feet moving.
Description:
1 - F1 pass to D1.
2 - F2 get open on boards and get pass from D1.
3 - F2 give and go with F1.
4 - F2 pass to D1 on the other side.
5 - F2 get open for return pass from D1.
6 - F2 attack and shoot.
7 - D1 follow for a pass to the point.
8 - F2 get a puck from corner and pass to D1.
9 - D1 shoot while F2 screen.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121204145927172

8 min.
C2, 3-0, 3-1, 3-2 Pro

Key Points:
Forwards should attack with speed and defense play a tight gap.
Description:
1. Start with a 3-0 attack from one corner. All attacks are on the same net.
2. F3 skate back and get a puck from the original end.
3. D1 leave line and defend vs. F3.
4. F1 and F2 come back for another puck.
5. D2 defend a 2-1 vs. F1 and F2.
6. Repeat from the other end.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121001083756215

12 min. Kingston PP Rotation vs Red at one end.
Description:
- Line A at one end practice attack options.
- Line B and C compete at other end.
- On whistle line A dump the puck to the other end and breakout returning to the original end while group C replace group B at the far end and group B pass in the neutral zone.
- Repeat with group C breaking out and back and group B switch with group A who move to the middle.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121022102206766

Add 8 minute 3 team pp/pk scrimmage.

8 min.
D1 One Pass in Each Zone

Key Points:
Close support, skate to open ice with the puck, give a target.
Description:
1. Play full ice either in shifts or all on the ice at once.
2. There must be at least one pass made in each zone. If not the other team gets the puck.
3. Controlled scrimmage so everyone stop on the whistle for coach input.
4. With shifts in a D100 game pass back to the goalie on the whistle.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort =0&s=2011032414361323

7 min.
D400 Transition Game of Low Battles with Point Support

Key Points:
Great game to practice cycling, going to the net, screening, tipping, point shots, shot pass, one timers on offense. On defense you have the low zone coverage and communication skills. As well as individual techniques like sealing the stick to the outside, tying up sticks, boxing out, switching, all from the defensive side.
Description:
1. One team is lined up behind each faceoff dot. From one to tree players leave at a time.
2. The next player in line plays the joker at the point and must pass or shoot within a second. Defenders do not check the joker as he can’t go in and score.
3. The coach dumps the puck in or shoots on net and the teams race for the puck. Whoever gets the puck can shoot right away.
4. When the defending team gets the puck they must pass to their joker at the point to transition to offense.
5. If the puck is shot out of the zone the coach passes to the non offending joker.
6. Play 20-30” and on the whistle the players pass to the coach and skate hard out of the zone before the coach shoots a new puck in.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090726102317243

8 min.
E1 Rebound Game


This is a scoring contest that seems to be loved by players of all ages everywhere in the hockey world.
Key Points:
Make quick shots and one timers and goalie read the play.

Description:
1. Players line up on both side in the slot with
one shooter at the top.
2. Play games to 5 between the
goalie and shooter.
3. If the goalie freezes the puck or it hits
the boards behind or at the side the goalie gets a point.
4. Players get a point by scoring a goal on a shot or rebound.

Only one pass is allowed. 5. Shooter stays if he scores and players rotate if there is no goal.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080723202833407


Macs Tournament

Posted on: December 27 2012 @ 01:22 AM
By: TomM

Content:

After having three days off for Christmas we started playing in the Macs Midget Tournament today.

The first ten minutes were not good but we got better as the game went on. First period 0-0, second we played well and scored on a power play to lead 1-0, the thrird was hard fought and we hung on for the 1-0 win.

Lots of fans on a very cold day. Tomorrow afternoon we play a team from British Columbia.

http://www.macstournament.ab.ca/division.aspx?lgid=0&did=3687 is the link for the tournament. and http://www.macstournament.ab.ca/division.aspx?lgid=0&did=3687&id=114142&p=gamesheet is the official game sheet record.
-----------------------------
Game Two:
The story of two completly different games.

The first two minutes were even and then they threw a blind pass in front of our net and our D stuck out her stick and put it into the top corner. 0-1, We turned it over at their blue line and on the 2-1 our D went over to the pass receiver and gave the puck carrier a breakaway and she put a nice shot into the top corner, 0-2. They got a pp and a player walked off the boards and our D went straight at her and fished for the puck and got beat 0-3. All unassisted. They were on a 1-2 rush and our D backed almost into the crease and let her shoot 0-4.

We then woke up after they had 4 goals on 6 shots and totally dominated the rest of the game but their goalie stoned us. Shots at the end of the first 12-6, in the second 15-5 and in the third 15-0 for a 42-11 advantage but we only scored 1 and lost 4-1.

All the great defensive play from the 1-0 win the day before went out the window at the start of the game.

Now we need to beat the Manitoba team who is 2-0 and hope the team we beat yesterday can also beat them.

Game sheet: http://www.macstournament.ab.ca/division.aspx?lgid=0&did=3687&id=114161&p=gamesheet
-------------------------------------------
Game Three:
This was a really good team we were playing. They won their first two games by 4 goals each.

It was really fast paced and we scored the first goal on a power play and the first period ended 1-0 with the shots 0-10. In the second we got another power play goal and then another pp goal to lead 3-0 but they got two late goals, one with 5 seconds left and the period ended 3-2 sots were 12-14. They scored early in the thrid to tie it and then got another five minutes later to take the lead. One of their players covered the puck in the crease that we scored on but the ref said the whistle blew but gave us a penalty shot and we tied it 4-4. It was hard up and down hockey but we were getting more chances and then we got a penalty with 2 minutes left. We killed it and the game ended 4-4. Shots in the third 7-7 and the game 28-31.
The official sheet is http://www.macstournament.ab.ca/division.aspx?lgid=0&did=3687&id=114183&p=gamesheet I like our sheet because the shooter is tracked as well. They have us withe 32 shots each.

If we won that game and our next we would be in the final four playoff. Now if we win Sunday we will be in the wild card mix of points, GF, GA. We need to win by a good margin to have a chance there.

I am attaching the games shots and +/-.

The official game sheets for the first three games: Shots For - 103, Shots Against - 67, GF - 6, GA - 8. 4 of our goals are on the PP and one on a penalty shot. 1 GA on the PK.


Pounce 1-3-1 Hard Trap Forecheck

Posted on: December 30 2012 @ 05:18 AM
By: TomM

Content:

A Czech coach and former NHL player who I worked with in 2010 while I was in the Czech Republic asked me to put together something to explain my teams forecheck. I did this for him.

Hi Petr,

Good seeing you today. I put together some video and a diagram of the Pounce 1-3-1 Hard Trap Forecheck .

There is a video of Salzburg Red Bulls practicing it as well as me teaching it to my college women's team using a big rink outline on the floor. Then a video clip of them doing it in a game right after. I also did a two minute clip of my team playing last night and isolated the Pounce examples.

-----------------------

Pounce 1-3-1 Hard Trap Forecheck

I want the LW and RD to be part of the forecheck on the attack.
The LD is always on the strong side.
Usually the C plays low in the dzone with the two D using man on and a box behind.
If the LW ends up back there they switch after the initial rush. I also want back pressure all of the time.

My truth of hockey is.
Forecheck - 2 in deep
- only pinch on the strong side when positive you will get the puck.
- lock the strong side boards on breakouts with the LW on one side and the RD on the other.
- 3 forecheck on the strong side. Left side the lw, c, rw and Right side the C-RW and RD.
- Backpressure all the way to the net.
- always tight gaps. - angle off the back shoulder with the stick on the puck.
- check from the defensive side always. - always 4 on the attack. - tight 3 man triangle and a D high on the rush to the net.
- shoot when inside top of circles unless someone is wide open.
- always give the puck to someone in better position than you and keep it if you are in the best position.

Example of my college women’s team vs. U of Calgary at the Olympic Oval

– international size ice.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20080727110408764
I now start with a 1-3-1 with either the RW or C 1 and 2 deny the pass up the middle and then force the first pass.

A video of an explanation of the system I gave to my team at the Olympic Oval 2 hours before the game.
We used white tape to make a rink on the floor and we went over the system.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080727110405661

Some clips of the Forecheck with my U18 Female team.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121229225643619


Mac's Tournament

Posted on: December 31 2012 @ 05:17 AM
By: TomM

Content:

We played today and gave ourselves a chance in the wild card by winning 7-1. It gave us the best goals for and against but it never came to that as a Saskatchewan team won and got 6 points with a 2-0-2 record. We finished 2-1-1. Blowing the game vs the bottom team by giving up 4 goals in the first 8 minutes did us in. Outshooting them 42-5 the rest of the game would have helped but we only scored 1. We also blew a 3-0 lead to the team that won our division and ended with a 4-4 tie. So two stretches of 8 minutes of poor hockey did us in.

We outshot the opposition 140-82 in the 4 games.

Scored 5 - pp, 1 - SH, 1 SO, 2 - 4 on 4 and 4 - 5 on 5. GA 3 - pp, 6 - 5-5. So we did a lot of good things.

I think we moved the puck better than we have all season. I don't know if it was the bigger than usual crowds or what but one D pair really struggled this tournament. They are usually a solid pair.

I will attach the stats of shots etc.


First game after the Mac's

Posted on: January 07 2013 @ 02:44 PM
By: TomM

Content:

I missed the last two practices because of doing the camp in Jasper. Spiin and on ice. We played a northern division team and were complety uninterested and uninspired. We lost 4-1 and got outshout 42-30. Five players got all of our shots.

Need a hard practice to get back to a competitive mode.


Jan 6 practice

Posted on: January 07 2013 @ 03:04 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Side Note: This site passed 10 million hits last night. Between 10-15 000 a day. So even though there is little input from anyone else in the discussion board etc. the number shows that many coaches do come here each day. I know coaches aren't really interested in my season or practice plans but I want a record for future reference and it is an easy way for me to access my plans from anywhere when giving seminars etc.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
We needed a conditioning work ethic practice to start our last month before the playoffs.

Flyers Practice Plan Date: 06-01-13 Time: 15:45-17:00 Crowchild Arena

Theme:
Work ethic

8 min.
A300 Edges and Puck Handling with a Shot


Key Points:
Move the puck all around the body in two circles going oppositedirections. Finish with a shot. Use all of the edges and big moves reaching as far as possible. Slalom and reach as far as possible with the puck the opposite way.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121108114316285

6 min.
B6 3-0 Weave-Regroup at Far End

Key Points:
Principles: Pass while skating and then follow the pass and take the ice behind the puck carrier.. Fill the 3 lanes. Skate to the “big ice” between the dots when you get the puck. Pass to the outside lane, skate to the inside lane.

Description:
A. 1 pass to 2 and follow the pass.
B. 2 skate to the big ice, pass to 3, follow the pass taking the ice behind.
C. 3 pass back to one, follow the pass.
D. 1 regroup with 4 and 1-2-3 fill each lane.
E. 4 pass to 1 or 3 on the strong side.
F. 1-2-3 weave the same way and attack with a triangle and shoot at the oringinal end.
G. 4-5-6 follow and repeat the other way.

Stress the Middle Drive with an inverted triangle of F1 going to the net and F2 with puck and F3 on the other side and a little behind. If the D is involved it becomes a 4 player diamond attack with D1 joining the rush and D2 at the point.

6 min.
B6 Breakout and Regroup with Defense


Key Points:
Have the Defense practice tight turns or the hinge by skating wide then passing back to the middle. Forwards must face the puck and fill the 3 lanes.

Description:
1. Players are in 3 lines at opposite ends of the ice.
2. Three players weave down the ice and regroup with the defense.
3. Defense can pass right up or go D to D. The forwards face the puck and fill 3 lanes for a regroup pass.
4. One player must give an outlet on the strong side boards and doesn’t leave unless he is replaced. One player in the middle and one wide. Wide player decide
a.stay wide,
b. cut acoss middle lane,
c. stretch behind the D.

8 min.
A3 Quick Feet Conditioning Skate


Key Points:
Player should keep their feet moving all the time. Coach move the pattern around the rink so you don't break the ice and ruin it for the next group.

Description:
1. Players leave in small groups with at least a 1:4 work rest ratio.
2. Skate a lateral S pattern do they turn both right and left.
3. Sprints should be less than 10 seconds.
4. Can also be done with pucks.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090831151046309

10 min.
DT100 Continuous 1 on 1 D - Join Attack F Backcheck with Dump in at Red Line


Key Points:
Forwards cover D and D cover F's. One D should join the attack to create triangles and one forward backcheck. Play tight gaps and attackers create 2 on 1's on the rush. Play 5-5
at each end.

Description:
1. Forwards line up on one side and defense on the other.
2.Start with a 1 on 1 attack Blue F1 vs. Red D1. 3. When the puck enters the zone defensive Red F1 support Red D1 and Blue D1 support Blue F1. 4. On transition Red D1 join new
attack and Blue F1 backcheck 5. If the puck is dumped out with no possession the offensive team regroup and attack again. 6. Red F1-D1 now go 2 on 2 in the other direction vs.
Blue D1-F1. 7. Blue F2 support Blue D1- F1 and Red D3 support attacking Red F1-D1. 8. This rotation continues with a 3-3 in each zone.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121104082522829

10 min.
A3 Conditioning skate


Key Points:
D pivot and F start and stop.

Description:
The D skate hard to the far blue then power turn backward to the blue and mohawk to get a puck from the corner, take it to the blue line, walk the line and shoot from the point.
A. Forwards skate blue line to blue line stop and start x1 and x2, then blue to red in order x1, x2, x3. do 2 sets facing one way when they stop. Take a shot after.

10 min.
DT100 Backchecking Transition Game


Key Points:
Attack quickly and the defender tie up the stick on the rebound then look for the puck.

Description:
Full ice game with the defenders getting support. New attackers have to get the breakout pass inside their zone. This works on quick passes and attack or the backchecker catches up. The backchecker must tie up sticks on the rebound and don't allow a second shot. The attacker must be quick and follow the shot. Defender make a breakout pass to the supporting player in the high slot.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080719141212210

8 min.
A2 Skating for Quickness


Key Points:
Hockey requires quick feet and agility to change directions. Keep the knees bent and use the outside edges.

Description:
1. Skate hard from blue to red line-Stop-hard back over blue line.
2. Skate hard to red line-turn inside-tight turn and back to blue.
Alternate directions.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090805115343158

9 min.
E1 Shootout Race

1 Key Points Players must have one skate on the dot at the start. No hooking or tripping. Skate to get D side and get the puck. *This is a great contest for puck
protection, battling, scoring and a good anaerobic conditioning exercise. Keep score with one colour vs the other.

Description
1. Players are lined up behind the face of dots at each end. 2. A player from each team race for the puck which the coach puts on the middle dot. 3. Protect the puck
and try to score vs backchecking opponent. 4. Another puck on the dot and repeat the other way.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.comediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080723063235226


Diary of a Season 2012-13

Posted on: January 07 2013 @ 04:21 PM
By: tony89

Content:

Tom,

I practice plan 4 plus practices a week for Pee Wee A (01) and Bantam A (99) teams in Michigan.

I check the Diary and Daily drills threads daily for new ideas. I have used more than 75% of the drills you post in our practices to our players' benefit this season. There are few drills the 01s cannot run.

The players seem to enjoy knowing what team the drills come from. The videos help my understanding of the drills immensely. Particularly, the more complex transition drills.

You seem to have a lot of NHL and European national team drills. Do you have any exposure to the Canadian national team drills?

My 99 son attended a Tier 1 practice over the holidays. I was happy to see the coach running variations of many 1 puck transition drills that I have picked up off of your site. My son was able to integrate very quickly into each drill because of his familiarity with transition drills.

Thanks for all of your efforts on this site!

Tony
--------------------------------------------
Tony thanks for the kind words. I like to read that the posting help some coaches.

I have posted many drills from the Canadian national teams. In comparison to other countries national teams or pro teams they run command style with many whistles and coaches doing a lot of the passing. They still use the Drills Model of coaching. Very few transition games if any are used and if they do a cross ice game at the end it usually doesn't compliment the theme of the practice.


Re: Diary of a Season 2012-13

Posted on: January 08 2013 @ 01:53 PM
By: Iceman

Content:

Hey Coaches,

I agree with tony89. Tom - I copy, steal, take ALOT of your drills, coaching philosophy and bring it to my two teams. Tom, I can not thank you enough for what you do for us fellow coaches - with the website, writings, film and diary!

I love this site, I have supported this site in the past and will continue to support this site.

Thanks again,
Iceman
-----------------------------------------------
Iceman, it is good to hear. The last year there there has been little feedback or discussion from coaches and it is nice to know that the material is helping.

I put material that I really like and agrees with the ABC philosophy of using the ice efficiently and also some material that I don't use myself because it is inefficient. I let the coaches choose what they want to use.

It would be great to break the habit of having to use the coaching board before every activity. A simple explanation and demo is much more effective and efficient use of the ice.

Assistant coaches moving pucks has to be the worst use of their time. Have players move the pucks to the next area when a drill or game is finished.

Have a theme for each practice and move from simple skills to using the individual or team skill in game situations. Do players really need a drink after doing a short drill or is a drink after every 15-20 minutes sufficient?

Have someone film one of your players for one hour and time how much productive movement they do in that time. If it is the usual 7-11 minutes then a new philosophy of practice is needed. 49-53 minutes of standing around isn't good.

This routine of drawing on the board for 2-4 minutes, Doing a drill where everyone gets a few reps. Getting a drink of water. Drawing on the board again has become the official way of practicing in Calgary and other places I go.

Develop warm up routines and call out variations. No whiteboard needed. Name drills and expect players to remember with a 30 second review and a few of the more clever players doing a demo if some are confused. Add variations to known activities.

There are many ways to use the ice more efficiently and effectively.


Re: Diary of a Season 2012-13

Posted on: January 08 2013 @ 02:20 PM
By: tony89

Content:

Tom,

I had a feeling your reply would be along those lines about the Canadian National coaching.

It would be great to have the drills/games cross referenced by country as well.

Thanks

Tony
---------------------------------
Tony I have been putting pro, Jr A, Major Jr, CW (Canadian Women), Sweden, Czech, Russian or Finland, etc. in the title lately. If you search the drills the ones labelled like that will come up. If you search using - pro, or - Sweden you will get the drills from that group.


Re: Diary of a Season 2012-13

Posted on: January 08 2013 @ 04:04 PM
By: peter

Content:

Quote by: TomM

Side Note: This site passed 10 million hits last night. Between 10-15 000 a day. So even though there is little input from anyone else in the discussion board etc. the number shows that many coaches do come here each day. I know coaches aren't really interested in my season or practice plans but I want a record for future reference and it is an easy way for me to access my plans from anywhere when giving seminars etc.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
We needed a conditioning work ethic practice to start our last month before the playoffs.

Flyers Practice Plan Date: 06-01-13 Time: 15:45-17:00 Crowchild Arena

Theme:
Work ethic

8 min.
A300 Edges and Puck Handling with a Shot


Key Points:
Move the puck all around the body in two circles going oppositedirections. Finish with a shot. Use all of the edges and big moves reaching as far as possible. Slalom and reach as far as possible with the puck the opposite way.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121108114316285

6 min.
B6 3-0 Weave-Regroup at Far End

Key Points:
Principles: Pass while skating and then follow the pass and take the ice behind the puck carrier.. Fill the 3 lanes. Skate to the “big ice” between the dots when you get the puck. Pass to the outside lane, skate to the inside lane.

Description:
A. 1 pass to 2 and follow the pass.
B. 2 skate to the big ice, pass to 3, follow the pass taking the ice behind.
C. 3 pass back to one, follow the pass.
D. 1 regroup with 4 and 1-2-3 fill each lane.
E. 4 pass to 1 or 3 on the strong side.
F. 1-2-3 weave the same way and attack with a triangle and shoot at the oringinal end.
G. 4-5-6 follow and repeat the other way.

Stress the Middle Drive with an inverted triangle of F1 going to the net and F2 with puck and F3 on the other side and a little behind. If the D is involved it becomes a 4 player diamond attack with D1 joining the rush and D2 at the point.

6 min.
B6 Breakout and Regroup with Defense


Key Points:
Have the Defense practice tight turns or the hinge by skating wide then passing back to the middle. Forwards must face the puck and fill the 3 lanes.

Description:
1. Players are in 3 lines at opposite ends of the ice.
2. Three players weave down the ice and regroup with the defense.
3. Defense can pass right up or go D to D. The forwards face the puck and fill 3 lanes for a regroup pass.
4. One player must give an outlet on the strong side boards and doesn’t leave unless he is replaced. One player in the middle and one wide. Wide player decide
a.stay wide,
b. cut acoss middle lane,
c. stretch behind the D.

8 min.
A3 Quick Feet Conditioning Skate


Key Points:
Player should keep their feet moving all the time. Coach move the pattern around the rink so you don't break the ice and ruin it for the next group.

Description:
1. Players leave in small groups with at least a 1:4 work rest ratio.
2. Skate a lateral S pattern do they turn both right and left.
3. Sprints should be less than 10 seconds.
4. Can also be done with pucks.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090831151046309

10 min.
DT100 Continuous 1 on 1 D - Join Attack F Backcheck with Dump in at Red Line


Key Points:
Forwards cover D and D cover F's. One D should join the attack to create triangles and one forward backcheck. Play tight gaps and attackers create 2 on 1's on the rush. Play 5-5
at each end.

Description:
1. Forwards line up on one side and defense on the other.
2.Start with a 1 on 1 attack Blue F1 vs. Red D1. 3. When the puck enters the zone defensive Red F1 support Red D1 and Blue D1 support Blue F1. 4. On transition Red D1 join new
attack and Blue F1 backcheck 5. If the puck is dumped out with no possession the offensive team regroup and attack again. 6. Red F1-D1 now go 2 on 2 in the other direction vs.
Blue D1-F1. 7. Blue F2 support Blue D1- F1 and Red D3 support attacking Red F1-D1. 8. This rotation continues with a 3-3 in each zone.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121104082522829

10 min.
A3 Conditioning skate


Key Points:
D pivot and F start and stop.

Description:
The D skate hard to the far blue then power turn backward to the blue and mohawk to get a puck from the corner, take it to the blue line, walk the line and shoot from the point.
A. Forwards skate blue line to blue line stop and start x1 and x2, then blue to red in order x1, x2, x3. do 2 sets facing one way when they stop. Take a shot after.

10 min.
DT100 Backchecking Transition Game


Key Points:
Attack quickly and the defender tie up the stick on the rebound then look for the puck.

Description:
Full ice game with the defenders getting support. New attackers have to get the breakout pass inside their zone. This works on quick passes and attack or the backchecker catches up. The backchecker must tie up sticks on the rebound and don't allow a second shot. The attacker must be quick and follow the shot. Defender make a breakout pass to the supporting player in the high slot.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080719141212210

8 min.
A2 Skating for Quickness


Key Points:
Hockey requires quick feet and agility to change directions. Keep the knees bent and use the outside edges.

Description:
1. Skate hard from blue to red line-Stop-hard back over blue line.
2. Skate hard to red line-turn inside-tight turn and back to blue.
Alternate directions.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090805115343158

9 min.
E1 Shootout Race

1 Key Points Players must have one skate on the dot at the start. No hooking or tripping. Skate to get D side and get the puck. *This is a great contest for puck
protection, battling, scoring and a good anaerobic conditioning exercise. Keep score with one colour vs the other.

Description
1. Players are lined up behind the face of dots at each end. 2. A player from each team race for the puck which the coach puts on the middle dot. 3. Protect the puck
and try to score vs backchecking opponent. 4. Another puck on the dot and repeat the other way.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.comediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080723063235226

[/QUO-
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Tom, l really enjoy the Diary of a Season, thank you
---------------------------
I am glad it is helping you Peter.


Flyers Practice Plan 08-01-13

Posted on: January 09 2013 @ 02:33 PM
By: TomM

Content:

We were missing 2 F and 1D. They are all in grade 12 and have final exams for this semester. One is our top scorer who is also having an ear surgery and will be out the next two weekends. So we had 13 skaters and 2 goalies.
The practice had a good tempo. I had to adjust a few drills to allow for enough rest between reps because of the low numbers. It looks like we will have 9 F and 5 D on the weekend. One F is driving up for the games but one D is staying home all weekend to study.
--------------------------------------------------

Flyers Practice Plan Date: 08-01-13 Time: 16:00-17:30 Venue: Max Bell 2
Theme: Team and individual offensive skills Shooting skills, screening, breakouts, Power play, middle drive 3-0


10 min.
5’ - A3 – Edges and balance

5’ - A2 Russian Puck-Handling Warm-up with Shots

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20090427151438223
(Vladimir Jursinov)

10 min.
B5 Murdoch Breakout Routine A and B


Key Points:
This is a good routine to use at the start of practice instead of just skating around the ice aimlessly.
- Work for 5-10 min. and get in a lot of reps.
- D shoulder check on the way to the puck.
- Forwards funnel through middle lane and watch puck before swinging up the boards.

Description:
Wings and Defense
A. Coach shoots puck in and D gets the puck and passes to the wing who times his skating from inside to outside. Go through all of the breakout options. 1 D and 2 D.

10 min.
B5 Regroup 3-0, Middle Drive-Pro


Key Points:
Defense move quickly and hinge the pass up the middle. Pass hard. Centre give the stick and skates as a flat target. Middle drive hard to the net.

Description:
1. All the players are inside the middle circle.
2. Red D1get a pass from a Red F2.
3. Red D hinge and pass D1 to D2.
4. D2 pass to F2 supporting in the middle.
5. F2 pass to F1 on the strong side.
6. F1 gain blueline and pass wide to F3.
7. F2 middle drive skating hard to the net.
8. F3 shoot and all crash the net for a rebound.
9. Blue repeat in the other direction.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=2012100209041983

10 min.
T2 Kingston Power Play and Team Play Rotation


Key Points:
Practice options where every player gets a shot. Begin with a rotation attacking the seam between the D and the F and read what they give. If the D forces then the low play is available, if the F forces then the point is open. If the pk box is passive then there is a 2-1 at each corner, a 3-2 on each side and seams between players to attack. Force the pace by taking a shot by a different player every 3 seconds. Coach in each zone.

Description:
- Line A at one end practice attack options.
- Line B at other end practice attack options. Both walk through pp 5-0.
- Line C in middle passing practice.
- On whistle line A dump the puck to the other end and breakout returning to the original end while group C replace group B at the far end and group B pass in the neutral zone.
- Repeat with group C breaking out and back and group B switch with group A who move to the middle.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121022102206766

10 min.
6 min. – Partner practice slap shots and one timers.
B6 Point Shots – 6 min.


Key Points:
Skate forward inside the dot before pivoting to. Shoot low for a tip in or rebound. One time the second shot in option two. Hit the net. Everyone practice this skill.

Description:
Option One
a. One pass to two and then screen goalie.
b. Two drag and shoot.
c. One go to point for a shot then opposite corner.
d. Three pass to four then screen goalie.
e. Four drag and shoot.
Option Two
f. Two stay at the mid point and get a pass from four and shoot before rotating.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20120430093036462

10 min. B5-B6 Breakout 3 Shot Czech - U17

Key Points:
Face the puck on the breakout and shoot while skating. Follow the shot for the rebound. Only have one player screen
while the other be at the side for a shot pass and rebound. After F1 passes he should spin to create space between
him and F2.

Description:
1. F1 and F2 leave from the middle and pass to D1 who was against the boards.
2. D1 pivot then pass to either F1 or F2 and follow them up the ice.
3. F1 pass to F2 (or F2 to F1) and F2 attack and shoot, rebound and screen.
4. F1 spin after passing then get a pass from the coach and shoot, rebound.
5. F1 screen and F2 move to the side for a shot pass.
6. D1 get a pass from the coach and take a shot from the point.
7. All hustle back to the line up.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=2012123122211727

10 min.
D100 Two Second Game 5 min. Pass in each zone 5 min.


Key Points:
Players must switch right away from offense to defense to loose puck and constantly change roles from, 1-puck carrier, 2-puck support, 3-check puck carrier, 4-cover away from the puck.

Description:
1. Play a full ice game of 3-3, 4-3, 4-4, 5-4, 5-5, 6-5 with the extra players on the bench.
2. Play 45" shifts and pass back to your goalie when the coach whistles for a change.
3. Players can only have the puck for 2" and must make a play, gain a zone or shoot.
4. Possession from first touching the puck for over 2" leave the puck for the other team.
5. Encourage talking, facing the puck, always give a target.
* Keep score and losing or winning have a consequence.

10 min.
D200 3 on 3 With 3 Pucks


Key Points:
-Players can only shoot when the goalie is ready.
-No empty net goals.

Description:
1. Players line up outside the blue lines.
2. Coach shoots in 3 pucks.
3. Players race for pucks and battle to score and defend.
4. Hustle out of the zone on the whistle and play 20-30 seconds only.
5. Leave the puck in the net after a goal is scored.
6. Coach shoots in another puck when a goal is scored.
7. Count the pucks in the net after to determine the winning team.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=201110060922424

10 min.
E1 D200 Shootout Game


Key Points:
As soon as there is a rebound or goal the defender pick up the puck and attack the other
way.

Description:
1. Coach dumps the puck in and players race for it.
2. Puck carrier try to score defender defend.
3. On rebound or goal defender attack other way.
4. Shooter must get outside of the blue line.
5. When teammate onside then first player in the line backchecks.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130109085731126





Flyers Practice Plan Date: 10-1-13

Posted on: January 11 2013 @ 03:50 PM
By: TomM

Content:

We only had 13 skaters. There was a blizzard and some couldn't get there. I was late with my 20 min. drive taking 75 minutes but two asst. coaches were there with only two pucks so they played a 3-3 game at the start as players drifted in. We switched the sequence around a bit and got everything but the 2-2 hinge with the middle D joining the rush. Two road games on the weekend. I have to drive to Sherwood Park instead of go with the team on the bus. I am coaching a U16 team in a Provincial selection camp and there is a meeting I have to go to before the game. At least it is in Red Deer which is half way there.
------------------------------
Flyers Practice Plan Date: 10-1-13 Time: 17:15-20:45 Venue: ECTAS

Theme:
Individual and Team Defensive Skills

10 min.
D4 Two Pass Game with only Forehand Passes


Key Points:
This game causes a few things to happen. Transition from puck carrier to pass support, checking the puck carrier to covering away from the puck happen very quickly. The puck carrier must use pivoting, escape moves and puck protection skills to pass on the forehand and everyone must face the puck and give a target.

Description:
1. Players must stay inside the blueline and if they puck goes out the other team gets it.
2. Before scoring the offensive team must make at least two passes.
3. When the defenders regain the puck they must make at least two passes before a shot.
4. Make rules with skills for skating, shooting, passing or good habits. In this game the rule is that you can only pass on the forehand. If a player does a back hand pass the other team gets the puck.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20111005184904487

8 min.
B6 1-0, 2-0, 3-0 Small Horseshoe


Key Points:
This is a great timing drill with good flow for early in the practice. Pass hard and get your top hand away from your body. Call for the pass. Give your stick and skates as a target.

Description:
1. Skate to the top of the circle and pass.
2. Continue and get a pass from the other end.
3. 2-0 first player passes and swings wide and second player skates into the middle lane. Pass to the player in the middle.
4. Player in the middle one touch the puck up to the wide man. Stay onside.
5. Shoot and go for the rebound.
6. On the 3-0 the third player goes up the boards and enters as the high man. Add a trailer pass to the high man as the first shot.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20120301081936833

10 min.
B5 Forecheck Skills Deflect-Steer-Angle-Finish


Key Points:
Cut the ice in half with the stick in the passing lane and steer the player outside the dots. Angle toward the back of the inside shoulder so they can't turn back, then finish shoulder to shoulder and stick on the puck.

Description:
1. Offense group behind the net with pucks.
2. Defenders behind blue line in the middle.
3. Both start on the whistle.
4. Defender force the attacker wide angle and finish.
5. Alternate sides.
6. Players switch lines so they all angle.
7. Move the defenders back to the far blue line as the second step in the skill.

Demonstration with second league European pro’s.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090813080843840

Demonstration with U18 Girl’s.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20111005152254430

8 min.
B5 Loose Puck Battles


http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=3&s=20080720174241795

10 min.
B600 Regroup, Hinge, Middle D Rush


Key Points:
Middle D comes late as a second wave and lead the rush.

Description:
1. F1 and F2 leave and regroup with D1.
2. D1 pass to D2 who hinges to the wide lane then pass back to D1.
3. F1 and F2 delay to stay onside while D1 crosses the blue line with the puck.
4. D2 support the attack from the mid-point.
5. D1 pass or take a shot.

Repeat the other direction with F3 and F4 regrouping with D3 and D4.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=201011280928188

15 min.
T2-4 D400 Specialty Team Practice

Key Points:
Closest player must pressure the puck in straight lines from the net out. Skate back when the puck is passed. Stick on the ice in the passing lane. Communicate.

Description:
1. A power play and a penalty killing unit at each end of the ice.
2. The coach passes in a puck from the line or from a face off dot.
3. Controlled scrimmage where everyone stops on a whistle.
4. If the puck is frozen, a goal or it is cleared put in a new puck.
5. After about 45 seconds do the same thing from the other end while the pp and pk units switch at the original end.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090806144404128

12 min.
6 min.
B500 Partner shooting practice.


6 min.
A500 - Overspeed Puck Handling with a Shot - Sweden 4


Key Points:
Players should skate and make moves at full speed. If they fall sometimes that shows they are pushing themselves beyond their comfort zone, which is great. Always follow the shot for a rebound.

Description:
1. Players are lined up along the boards with one colour on each side of the red line with a net at each blue line.
2. On whistle the players skate with the puck in the neutral zone.
3. Overspeed tempo with moves and turns at a faster pace than the players usually go.
4. Shoot on one net each on the next whistle.
5. Whistle about every 7”.
http://www.swehockey.se/Hockeyakademin/Utbildning/Video/Ovningsbanken/ Puck Handling 4

https://skydrive.live.com/?cid=bd6fa116988317e9#cid=BD6FA116988317E9&id=BD6FA116988317E9%213114

10 min.
D5 In Nzone

Line Hockey 1-1, 2-2, 3-3,
Pass to jokers on the blue line who can either shoot or pass.
Keep score.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130111153615671

10 min.
E1, 2 on 0 Shootout Race

Key Points:
Work on shooting one timers and scoring on rebounds. Good habits like face the puck, give a target with the stick on the ice.

Description:
A. 1 and 2 attack 2-0 on opposite net.
B. Pass and shoot to score.
C. Get a new puck from 3 or 4 after scoring.
D. Score a second goal.
E. After the second goal race back to the blueline.
F. One point for each race won and 5 points to win the game.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20101223080124158

Last night we did the relay shoot out cross ice.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130111093614490


Jan. 12-13 Games

Posted on: January 14 2013 @ 03:23 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Road trip to Sherwood Park and Spruce Grove near Edmonton. We were missing our top scorer and a top defense.

Sherwood Park we didn''t have a great first period and the shots were 11-15 but we scored to lead 1-0. We gave up too many chances in the slot. In the second we outshot them 11-10 and they didn't get any scoring chances but we didn't bury ours, so it was still 1-0. In the third they got no chances from the slot of their 5 shots and we got 3 scoring chances on our 5 shots. No goals and we won 1-0. Shots 27-30. It was an 8:45 evening games and a quick turn around with a game at 11 on Sunday morning.

Our third top point getter got in a collision and her eyes didn't look good and she didn't feel right so I sat her out as a precaution so we had 13 skaters. Again we were flat in the first but scored a goal but the ref was behind the play and by didn't see their goalie pull it out. They scored one. Shots 7-7 score 0-1. We played much better in the second outshooting them 13-9 and getting one goal. Score 1-1 after two. The third was a much faster pace and each team got 9 shots. No one scored and it ended 1-1. Shots 29-25.

So we got 3 of 4 points on the road trip. A few of the younger players are starting to really step up. We had to really adjust the lines and D pairs and one player who was a D last year went back in the third and was dominant. We only have 4 returning skaters and 9 of our 16 skaters are first year in the league so it is a constant building process. 19 players who could have played on the two Calgary teams have gone to sports schools etc., so we couldn't just pick a team but have to develop players to be AAA. Edmonton has only one team and zero sports schools; so we start the season a very different level. The idea is to get to their level in 6 months.

This week on ice practice T-Th-Sat, Spin class Wed. and a home game vs. Edmonton Sunday.

We are 13-8-6 now and second in our division. We have 5 league games left. Last game in Feb. 9. Because we have 5 in our division and 6 in the northern division we will get a bye the first round and teams 4 and 5 will play a 2 of 3 to play the first place team. We play the team now in third no matter what even if we lost all our games because 4 and 5 are too far behind to catch us. The second round is a 3 of 5 over two weekends. The task now is to get the bottom third of the team to a level where they can compete even if the opposition matches lines and puts their top players out. Everyone played in all situations this weekend and did a good job. Also the F who moved back is considering finishing the year as a D and that would make us a better team as she is a very good forward but dominating player on D. It isn't like coaching college where the coach decides because you are giving out scholarships.

It is huge if you have a D who can beat the first forechecker almost every time. Especially in a league where most teams send the first two forecheckers in on the puck.

_________________________________________
I got an email from the mother of the player I sat out. She saw the doctor and has a concussion and will miss at least two weeks. Her mother thanked us for not playing her. It is a judgement call as she didn't have a headache in the morning but her eyes didn't look the same and she said she felt funny. Kind of disoriented.

So now we will be without our top and third scorers. Our leading scorer hasn't been able to hear out of one ear since she was 9 and last Monday they did reconstruction surgery and she will miss a few more weeks at least. So we are hoping they both get better and can play at least a weekend before the playoffs.


Flyers Practice Plan Date: 15-01-13

Posted on: January 16 2013 @ 03:11 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Diploma Exams are on for the end of the first semester. My 12 th graders are going to tutorial classes to prepare and the other players also have exams. So some are missing because of that. My top scorer had her ear repaired and third top scorer has a concussion. The goal of this practice is individual offensive skills. There was a lot of volume with the players skating and getting many touches and shots. Many of the first year players are improving a lot and starting to have a positive influence on the game as their skills and confidence increase.
-------------------------------------------------------
Flyers Practice Plan Date: 15-01-13 Time: 16:00-17:30 Venue: Max Bell 2

Notes:
Only 12 Skaters and 2 Goalies - I have 2 studying for term exams and 2 injured.
Slap shot, one timers, passing, individual Offensive skills.Skating, Competition

10 min.
Partner Slap Shots and One Timers
Work with a partner on shooting.

12 min.
B202 Pass to All Players and 1-1, 2-2, 3-3 Keepaway


Key Points:
Give and go pass. Give a target and make eye contact before passing.

Description:
1. Blues start with half on each blue line.
2. Reds weave around in the middle.
3. Red pass to each blue player.
4. Alternate sides each pass.
5. Switch every 30".
*Compete to see who makes the most passes.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/filemgmt/index.php?id=99

10 min.
A300 Edges and Puck Handling with a Shot


Key Points:
Move the puck all around the body in two circles going opposite directions. Finish with a shot.
Use all of the edges and big moves reaching as far as possible.

Description:
1. Dark group skate down half the rink with a puck and shoot from the middle and white group skate the opposite way and shoot on other net.
2. Skate on all of the edges and use big moves by reaching the opposite. i.e. Skate left and reach as far as you can to the right.
3. The players skating down the middle finish with a shot and then get a new puck.
4. Exercises are done while zig-zagging in and out.
a. Forward skate and alternate on the front inside edges.
b. Backward skate and alternate on the inside edges.
c. Skate forward and cross-over alternating on the outside edges.
d. Skate backward and cross-over alternating on the outside edges.
e. Open hip turn each way.
f. Slalom and reach as far as possible with the puck the opposite way.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121108114316285

10 min.
D4 Two Pass

Rule all goals must be on:
5 min. slap shots
5 min. one timers.

8 min.
B600 Regroup, Hinge, Quick Up-Detroit


Key Points:
Hinge and push the puck up the ice quickly. Strong side F stretch and weak side give middle support.

Description:
1. F1 skate and regroup with D1.
2. D1 skate to the middle and pass to D2 in the wide lane.
3. D2 quick up to F2 who stretches on the strong side boards.
4. F1 and F2 attack.
Repeat the other way with F3 regrouping with D3.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20101128092923497

8 min.
B600 Regroup, Hinge, Middle D Rush


Key Points:
Middle D comes late as a second wave and lead the rush.
Description:
1. F1 and F2 leave and regroup with D1.
2. D1 pass to D2 who hinges to the wide lane then pass back to D1.
3. F1 and F2 delay to stay onside while D1 crosses the blue line with the puck.
4. D2 support the attack from the mid-point.
5. D1 pass or take a shot.
Repeat the other direction with F3 and F4 regrouping with D3 and D4.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=201011280928188

8 min.
DT400 Active Jokers at Point

Key Points
Each team has two jokers at the point. Introduce the game allowing jokers to check jokers and then add that jokers can come in for one timer shots. This transition game creates three situations. In the first part the players at the point must get open and take a shot or make a pass. The defender practices covering the point. In the second part add that the jokers at the point can come in for a one timer shot.

Description:
Part One: Each team has jokers at the point.
1. When defenders regain puck they must pass to the point to go on offense.
2. Jokers can shoot or pass.
3. Jokers can check the opponents Joker.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120603101824103

8 Min.
D200 Game with Jokers below the goal line


Key Points:
Work on give and go and getting open. Defenders intercept passes and tie up sticks on the rebounds. Goalies control rebounds.

Description:
Play for twenty to thirty seconds and the offense must pass to a joker and get a return pass before scoring. Great game to work on puck support (role 2) and defensive support.(role 4)

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=2008072320283431

8 min.
D200 With Players Joining After a Give and Go


Key Points:
Pass hard and get open for a return pass.

Description:
1. Players are lined up either in two lines or along the blueline.
2. Coach dumps the puck in to start the game of 1 on 1.
3. When player with the puck give and go passes to a team mate he can join the game.
4. Play for 30-45 seconds before starting a new game.
5. Coach shoot in a new puck if the original puck is dumped out or a goal is scored.

8 min.
E1 D200 Shootout Game


Key Points:
As soon as there is a rebound or goal the defender pick up the puck and
attack the other way.

Description:
1. Coach dumps the puck in and players race for it.
2. Puck carrier try to score defender defend.
3. On rebound or goal defender attack other way.
4. Shooter must get outside of the blue line.
5. When teammate onside then first player in the line backchecks.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130109085731126


Practice Plan Jan. 17

Posted on: January 19 2013 @ 02:12 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Final exams are still on and we have a player out after an ear operation and one with a concussion. 12 skaters and two goalies at practice. I changed the large horseshoe drill to a continuous 1-1 then 2-1 transition game. Gaston focused on transition turns and pivoting and then on backward skating on a 1-1 where they all took turns. I reinforced that they need tight gaps and the idea is to deflect them into the corner, angle and finish and not to get the puck.
We had a parent meeting after and I went over where we are as a team right now and how I was going to run the bench the last five games and the philosophy running the bench when we are in elimination situations.
----------------------------------------
Flyers Practice Plan Date: 17-01-13 Time: 17:00-18:30 Venue: Ed Whalen

Theme:
Skating Technique, pass while moving, Shoot while moving, rebound, 1-1, 3-0, 3-1, 3-2, screen, tip.

45 min.
Dr. Gaston Schaeffer – skating mechanics.

Goalies at one end inside ringuette line if Natalie there.

8 min.
B5 1-0 Outside-Middle Shots- Czech U17


Key Points:
Keep skating, give a target and pass hard and pass while moving. Hit the net and follow the shot. Rebound for the next shooter.

Description:
1. All players and pucks are in the middle.
2. One player leave from each side.
3. Player 2 pass to player 1 who circles between the red and blue line.
4. Player 1 skate in and shoot after the third pass.
5. After shooting player 1 circle back and rebound for the next shooter.
6. Alternate sides and player 3 leaves after the first pass.
7. Circle left and right so shots come from both in the middle and the outside lanes.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130115154629528

8 min.
B5-B6 Breakout 3 Shot Czech - U17


Key Points:
Shoot while moving and hit the net. Follow shot for a rebound and then screen. Give a target and then hustle back to the lineup on the whistle.

Description:
1. Forwards in the middle and Defense at each end.
2. F1 pass to D1 who drive skates.
3. F1 and F2 get open for a breakout pass.
4. D1 pass to F1.
5. F1 pass to F2 who attacks-shoots-screens.
6. F1 spin then get a pass from the coach and shoot.
7. D1 get a pass from the coach and take a point shot or shot pass while F1 screens and F2 is ready for a shot pass.
8. Do this from both sides.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130115154630289

10 min.
C3 Horse Shoe 2-1 x 2 – Pro


Key Points:
Make good passes. Give a target and play with quick feet. Defense create a good gap as early as possible and forwards attack with speed. 2-1 Attack Rule: One high-one low-one fast-one slow.

Description:
1. D in diagonal corners and F diagonal blue lines. F1 and F2 skate across toward D1. The drill happens at each end.
2. D1 pass to F1 who one touches to D1.
3. D1 pass to D2 in line who returns the puck.
4. D1 pass to either F1 or F2
5. D1 skate across to defend vs. F1 and F2 who left from the other end.
6. F1-F2 attack 2-1 vs. D1 from the other end.
7. The drill goes at the same time from each end.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121231223140367

12 min.
C3 15 Goal 3-0 3-1, 3-2


Key Points:
Forwards create 2-1 situations with close support and speed. One player always hard to the net on a middle drive on a shooting play and a wide drive if they are open. Head man the puck and move through the neutral zone quickly and make the first pass in the offensive zone early.
Defenders must talk and identify coverage. Protect the middle of the ice and only play the puck carrier if he is vulnerable. Give the shot from the outside. Jam the trailer with legs in the shooting lane and stick in the passing lane. It is critical to have tight gaps and not just back in.

Description:
Players are lined up along the boards in the C3 formation.
Have 2 colours of jerseys and play one team vs the other if you have enough players
1. Three forwards take a puck and attack 3-0. The attack is over when the puck is over the goal line. (unless the coach wants a cycle and a shot).
2. Use the same puck and go the other way attacking 3-1 vs a D from the other colour (coach puts in a new puck if there is a goal).
3. Attack 3-2 in the original direction.
4. Three F from the other coloured team attack 3-0 on the vacant end.
5. Repeat sequence.

7 min.
E1 Two Shot Shootout

Key Points: Players should come in and make a hard move and shoot. The general rule on a breakaway is if the goalie is out far deke and if he backs in shoot.

Description:
1. Teams lines up across from each other and the pucks are in the middle circle.
2. One player from each team leaves and shoot at opposite ends.
3. The same players turn back and get another puck from the middle and shoot at the other end. 4. Continue until all the players have shot and keep score.
- Players that score no goals do 2 laps, those who score one goal skate one lap and those who score on both shots zero laps.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20110324144209198


Flyers Practice Plan 19-01-13

Posted on: January 21 2013 @ 03:32 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Flyers Practice Plan 19-01-13 Time: 14:00-15:15 Venue: WMP

11 skaters and 2 goalies, stick on puck Defensive side, back check, D join attack, Shoot, puck protection, skating, pp-pk

8 min.
B6 – 3 Shots, 3 Zig zags, 3 Shots


Key Points:
3 Leave from diagonal corners about 2" apart, skate around circle then shoot, get a pass from the other corner, skate 3 zig zags betweeen the blue line and the top of the cricles the fill the 3 lanes and shoot.

Description:
1. Make sure to leave about 2 seconds between shooters so the goalie has time to get set.
2. Follow the shot for a rebound before getting the pass.
3. Do skills while zig zagging 3 times such as;
a, carry the puck with the hands and feet moving all the time.
b. carry the puck only using the forehand side of the stick.
c. only use the backhand side of the stick.
d. transition skate facing the far end forward to backward to forward.
e. skate backward.
f. 360 degree turns.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20091019154513105

15 min.
Sean – Kevin - Defense drills.
Tight gap and moving the feet to shoot.


Tom – Tom Forwards
8 min.
B500 Puck Protection 1-1 Battles


Key Points:
Protect the puck with the back. Get defender to reach or straighten their knees.

Description:
A. 1 on 1 battle and go to the net.
1. Place the puck on the dot and race for it from the circle on the whistle.
2. Play 1-1 and -protect the puck and go to the net and try to score on the whistle.
B. 1-1 Battle with passes to Jokers.
1. Race for the puck on the middle dot.
2. Battle 1-1 protect the puck and pass to Jokers.
3. Go to the net on the whistle.
Number the players and alternate from one circle to the other to give enough rest and allow only one shot on goal at one time. Play the 1-1 battle with no passes first and then add passes to jokers allowed. With 4 players rotate. 1-4, 2-3, 2-4, 1-3, 3-4 1-2. Do the same sort of rotation with more players.
Move to doing puck protection along the boards.

7 min.
B6 Puck Protection and Stick on Puck


Key Points:
Attacker protect the puck by making tight turns and shielding it with the body. Defender maintain net side and stick on the puck.

Description:
1. Coach dump the puck into the corner.
2. Offensive player protect the puck for 5".
3. Defensive player stay net side with stick on the puck.
5. On the whistle attacker try to score.
6. Alternate corners.

10 min. Sean – DT Nets back to back game
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130120110852626

5 min.
B500 Defensive Side with Stick on the Puck


Key Points:
Player checks from the defensive side with the stick always on the attackers stick. Keep the stick on the ice when going side to side.

Description:
1. Two players work together one of offense one on defense.
2. Half rest half actice on the whistle.
3. Practice about 5" and alternate.
4. Start with no puck with offense shielding with the body defender stick on stick.
5. Progress to using a puck.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090817105910820

12 min.
T2-4 D400 PK and PP Rotation-Detroit


Key Points:
PK outnumber the PP on loose pucks in the corner. PK skate in straight lines. Always one pk denying the mid point and one in front. PP change the point of attack when outnumbered. Rotate the mid point player to the middle or the back door.

Description:
1. Start with everyone in position on the pp and pk.
2. If pk gets the puck start the pplay again from a different spot.
3. On the pplay either the puck or the player moves.
4. PK always lead with the stick on the puck and in passing lanes.
5. PP always give at least two easy outlets.
6. PP give low support when puck on half wall.
7. PK cut the ice in half and force passes that must beat two defenders.
8. Work at each end 30-60" rotate on whistle.
*Game situation: defenders shoot puck to other end.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20101206083505234

Do this at one end only and rotate.

8 min.
DT100 Continuous 1 on 1 D - Join Attack F Backcheck


Key Points:
Forwards cover D and D cover F's. One D should join the attack to create triangles and one forward backcheck. Play tight gaps and attackers create 2 on 1's on the rush. Play 5-5
at each end.
Description:
1. Forwards line up on one side and defense on the other.
2. Start with a 1 on 1 attack Blue F1 vs. Red D1.
3. When the puck enters the zone defensive Red F1 support Red D1 and Blue D1 support Blue F1.
4. On transition Red D1 join new attack and Blue F1 backcheck
5. If the puck is dumped out with no possession the offensive team regroup and attack again.
6. Red F1-D1 now go 2 on 2 in the other direction vs. Blue D1-F1.
7. Blue F2 support Blue D1- F1 and Red D3 support attacking Red F1-D1. 8. This rotation continues with a 3-3 in each zone.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121104082522829

The pdf has the original plan but we modified it because only 11 skaters were there, mostly defensemen so I let them practice longer.
------------------------------------
Sunday game was vs. the top team in the Northern division. We had 8 F and 4 D. Our captain came when the game started and played half the game then went back to her math tutorial. Our three top scorers and a top D were missing. 0-0 after one, 0-2 after two and they got two goals in the last three minutes to win 0-4. We did a lot of good things on defense but created zero offense. Last time we tied 1-1 and zero penalties. This time zero penalties in the game again. Exams are still on until the end of the month and we have another one game weekend coming up. We are hoping to have our whole team back next week.


For the Joy of the Game

Posted on: January 22 2013 @ 02:44 PM
By: TomM

Content:

In Calgary there are over 500 men who play +55 hockey in arenas around the city. Each group has 2 or 3 ice times during the day per week from the start of October until the end of March. The usual format is to play games to 5 and then the goalies switch ends and you start at 0-0 again and keep track of wins. Players find the arena that has their skill level and then everyone enjoys it. The group I play with goes M-W-F and consists of shift workers like Fireman, retired Mounties, Farmers, retired Teachers, retired Pro Hockey Players and guys who own their own business and can make their own schedule.We have over 50 in our group and consistently 3 lines and 5 or 6 D per team show up. We divide the two dressing rooms into white and blue before going on the ice, so you never know who you are playing with or against.

Here is the commisioners message:
--------------------------------

Commissioner’s Message – January 2013

When I opened the door into Optimist Arena, the first ice time after the holidays, I could already hear laughter coming from the Blue dressing room far down the hall. As I entered the room, the usual suspects were already sharing sarcastic one-liners, bad jokes, and tall tales that no rational person would endure. The calendar had flipped over, but nothing had changed; thank goodness. It was forty-five minutes before our scheduled ice-time and the cramped change area was already full of mostly unemployed, border line seniors eager to resume their hockey careers.

Later in the week, at Crowchild Friday Hockey, my team managed to win the third game in a best of three series we had begun in December. Unfortunately, we had lost the first two games. Of course, our guys decided it should really be a best of five, or a best of seven—whatever it would take to earn fleeting bragging rights.

So at mid-season, the great cultures established in our individual rinks continue to flourish. Happy New Year. I hope good health allows you to enjoy all the benefits of playing 55+ hockey in 2013.


Keith Worthington
Commissioner


Flyers Practice Plan 22-01-13

Posted on: January 23 2013 @ 03:11 PM
By: TomM

Content:

We expected 11 or 12 skaters and 14 were there. Two missing, one with an exam and the other is recovering from ear reconstruction and can start practicing next week. I shortened a few things and added a low zone 3-3 transition game.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Flyers Practice Plan 22-01-13 Time: 16:00-17:30 Venue: Max Bell 2
Notes:
Reviewing 3-0 triangle and inverted triangle. 3-1, 3-2 on offense and defense. Shooting technique, scoring, Facing the play with the puck.

10 min.
B5 Individual Shooting Technique with coach assistance.


B500 Individual Skills
Key Points:

Divide the ice into stations and practice individual technique. The coach can focus on skills for various players.

Description:
1. Coach pass to defenseman who moves and shoots at the red strpe on the boards.
2.Player agility skate with turns and pivots then get a pass.
3. Saucer pass with a partner.
4. Play rebound with the goalie. - last five min. of this practice.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090823205113460

10 min.
D4 Two Pass Game with only Forehand Passes
Key Points:
This game causes a few things to happen. Transition from puck carrier to pass support, checking the puck carrier to covering away from the puck happen very quickly. The puck carrier must use pivoting, escape moves and puck protection
skills to pass on the forehand and everyone must face the puck and give a target.

Description:
1. Players must stay inside the blueline and if they puck goes out the other team gets it.
2. Before scoring the offensive team must make at least two passes.
3. When the defenders regain the puck they must make at least two passes before a shot.
4. Make rules with skills for skating, shooting, passing or good habits. In this game the rule is that you can only pass on the forehand. If a player does a back hand pass the other team gets the puck.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20111005184904487

10 min full team drill.
Set up will be our normal 2 on 2 continuous


Start with a 2 on 2 green on d white on 2 green f follow for support 2 white d also follow Green d pass to green f Green f regroup with white d in neutral zone White d pass back to green d regroup again and send green f on 2 on 2 with white D.
So basically our 2 on 2 continuous with a double regroup. I would like to see the f on the second regroup stretch. Could also do this 3 on 2.

10 min sections
First do a skate pass shoot drill I have done with the d where we run through 4 options at the point.
Shoot to score
Shoot for rebound
Shot pass
Shot off boards

10 min.
SAG in circle a game of keep away
where you need to
stay d side on whistle attack net d play a one on one
back to the net then have a shot from the point with a
net battle

10 min.
C3 Horse Shoe 2-1 x 2 – Pro

Key Points:
Make good passes. Give a target and play with quick feet. Defense create a good gap as early as possible and forwards attack with speed. 2-1 Attack Rule: One high-one low-one fast-one slow.

Description:
1. D in diagonal corners and F diagonal blue lines. F1 and F2 skate across toward D1. The drill happens at each end.
2. D1 pass to F1 who one touches to D1.
3. D1 pass to D2 in line who returns the puck.
4. D1 pass to either F1 or F2
5. D1 skate across to defend vs. F1 and F2 who left from the other end.
6. F1-F2 attack 2-1 vs. D1 from the other end.
7. The drill goes at the same time from each end.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121231223140367

15 min. Focus on Teaching Each situation for about a
minute, then do it and teach next in 5 min. segments.
C3, 3-0, 3-1, 3-2 - Total Hockey


Key Points:
Attack with a middle drive and speed. Hit the net and drive for rebounds. Only allow one pass on the 3-0. Attack with speed and make plays early while defenders delay the attack.

Description:
1. One group on each side in the neutral zone.
2. Everyone attacks and defends.
3. Play rebounds until a goal or the puck is behind the net or outside the dots.
4. Coach pass new puck if a goal is scored.
5. One defender follow the rush on 3-0 and two follow the 3-1 rush.
6. Keep score.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=2013012209054791

Added DT400 Transition game with Low Battles of 3-3 for 10 minutes.
DT400 Krusel Low Battles - Point Support
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20111004075900564


E1 Shoot Until You Score Race 1-0, 2-0, 3-0

Key Points:
Players should attack quickly, pass early, shoot to score. Goalies up.

Description:
1. Place one puck on the bluelines for each player on the bench team.
2. One player leaves from the bench and must keep shooting 3. Scoring player skate hard to the bench and touch the boards joins him/her and they attack 2-0.
4. Repeat after a goal and attack 3-0.
5. All three players rush back and touch the boards and then 6. The team that scores all the pucks first wins.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20121026142749173


Flyers Practice Plan 24-01-13

Posted on: January 25 2013 @ 03:21 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Last week of exams and my 4 captains were all missing; so 12 skaters and 2 goalies. We are going to play a contain Pounce 1-3-1 forecheck this weekend and we worked on that to prepare for the playoffs if we are in front or playig a team with a lot more talent than us. The only difference is that the LW and RD stay above the W on their side and pressure passes. We still force hard with the C and RW who enter the zone in an I in the middle with 1 forcing the puck inside to out and 2 covering the middle lane and pressuring the first pass. It is the way I coached it at college.
I added a shootout game instead of a second nets back to back game. Losing coach had to do push ups in the last two games. I also moved the Jokers to below the goal line instead of the point, as it was only 3-3 at each end and then changed that rule to goals must come from plays below the goal line. So on transition the puck had to go low. This promotes cycling, walk outs, passes behind and low Dzone coverage.
---------------------------------------------------------------------

Flyers Practice Plan 24-01-13 Time: 17:15-18:45 ECTAS

Themes:
Pounce contain 1-3-1 Forecheck Power Play 1-1’s, 2-1, 2-2, compete, shoot, breakouts

8 min.
A300 x 2 Skating and Puck Handling Warm-up with Shots

Key Points: Do various moves with the puck and finish with a shot.

Description:
One group rotate clockwise and the other counter clockwise.
1. Do various skating moves with the
puck.
2. Big moves all around the body, in the skates, through the legs etc.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121031084114911

8 min.
B6 One Touch x 3 and Shoot


Key Points:
One touch pass. Firm stick and follow through at the target. Both line move all the time.

Description:
B6 from diagonal corners down each side of the ice. Start with one player at each line and one extra behind.
A. 1 skate and give and go with 2.
B. 1 give and go with 3.
C. 1 give and go with 4.
D. 1 go in and shoot-rebound and become 5.
E. 2-3-4-5 keep moving forward after each pass.
Continue this flow from each side and then move to the other side and change directions.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120226094511455

9 min.
DT4 Each Team Pass to Joker at Point


Key Points:
Player at the point must get open for a pass and quickly make a play. Defender get on the defensive side to block a shot and stay with the point
man if he carries the puck.

Description:
1. One zone game and each team has one or two jokers at the point.
2. To transition to offense you must pass to the point.
3. Progression is to add the rule that all goales must come from point playes such as shots, tip-ins, redirects, shot passes, screen, rebounds. This causes the players at the point to skate and get the puck through and the player covering to stay defensive side and block shots and passes.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=2012091408474755

15 min.
D with Sean and Kevin-Goalies Nat-F Tom B Skills Warm up Finnish U17

Key Points:
This is a great way to warm everyone up at the start of a practice. Defense do the various breakout options and read where the pressure is coming from. Pass the puck back to the coach and move thru everyone. Forwards pass with good technique and eye contact. Goalie coach work on technique and rebound control and playing walk outs.

Description
A. Defense work with two doing breakout options vs one forechecker.

B. Forwards lines of 3 work in the neutral zone.
1 - Stationary pass with eye contact.
2 - Pass while moving always face puck.
3 - Skate around partners give and go.
4 - Keepaway 2-1 in four areas.
5 - Two lines move and pass to other two lines on the blue line.
6 - Two lines of 3 pass while skating on one side of the neutral zone.
C. Goalies work with coach at one end.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/filemgmt/index.php?id=88

10 min. Everyone play both F and D. Total Hockey
DT100 - 1 on 1 - D Join Attack and F Backcheck


DT100 Continuous 1 on 1 D - Join Attack F Backcheck

Key Points:
Forwards cover D and D cover F's. One D should join the attack to create triangles and one forward backcheck. Play tight gaps and attackers create 2 on 1's on the rush. Play 5-5 at each end.

Description:
1. Forwards line up on one side and defense on the other.
2. Start with a 1 on 1 attack Blue F1 vs. Red D1.
3. When the puck enters the zone defensive Red F1 support Red D1 and Blue D1 support Blue F1.
4. On transition Red D1 join new attack and Blue F1 backcheck
5. If the puck is dumped out with no possession the offensive team regroup and attack again.
6. Red F1-D1 now go 2 on 2 in the other direction vs. Blue D1-F1.
7. Blue F2 support Blue D1- F1 and Red D3 support attacking Red F1-D1.
8. This rotation continues with a 3-3 in each zone.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121104082522829

20 min.
Pounce 1-3-1 Hard Trap Forecheck
– LW and RD
Contain
– C-RW Pressure
– LD support on Puck Side
I want the LW and RD to be part of the forecheck on the attack. The LD is always on the strong side. Usually the C plays low in the dzone with the two D using man on and a box behind. If the LW ends up back there they switch after the initial rush. I also want back pressure all of the time. My truth of hockey is.
Forecheck
- 2 in deep
- only pinch on the strong side when positive you will get the puck.
- lock the strong side boards on breakouts with the LW on one side and the RD on the other.
- 3 forecheck on the strong side. Left side the lw, c, rw and Right side the C-RW and RD.
- Backpressure all the way to the net.
- always tight gaps. -
angle off the back shoulder with the stick on the puck.
- check from the defensive side always.
- always 4 on the attack.
- tight 3 man triangle and a D high on the rush to the net.
- shoot when inside top of circles unless someone is wide open.
- always give the puck to someone in better position than you and keep it if you are in the best position.

Example of my college women’s team vs. U of Calgary at the Olympic Oval
– international size ice. I now start with a 1-3-1 with either the RW or C 1 and 2 deny the pass up the middle and then force the first pass.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20080727110408764

A video of an explanation of the system I gave to my team at the Olympic Oval 2 hours before the game. We used white tape to make a rink on the floor and we went over the system.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080727110405661

Some clips of the Forecheck with my U18 Female team.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121229225643619

8 min. – Nets at one end back to back.

- pass to jokers to go on transiton to go on offense.


8 min.
D200 With Players Joining After a Give and Go up to 3-3

Key Points:
Pass hard and get open for a return pass.

Description:
1. Players are lined up either in two lines or along the blueline.
2. Coach dumps the puck in to start the game of 1 on 1 to 3-3 (one coach send out 1 to 3 players on each team.)
3. When player with the puck give and go passes to a team mate he can join the game.
4. Play for 45-60 seconds before new players come in. Players must skate behind their net to start the shift. Player with the puck pass to a teammate coming on when the whistle blows.
5. Coach shoot in a new puck if the original puck is dumped out or a goal is scored.

6 min.
E1 D200 Shootout Game


Key Points:
As soon as there is a rebound or goal the defender pick up the puck and attack the other way.

Description:
1. Coach dumps the puck in and players race for it.
2. Puck carrier try to score defender defend.
3. On rebound or goal defender attack other way.
4. Shooter must get outside of the blue line.
5. When teammate onside then first player in the line backchecks.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130109085731126


Jan. 26 game

Posted on: January 28 2013 @ 02:58 PM
By: TomM

Content:

We were awful the first ten minutes and were outshot 6-0 and fell behind 0-1. We got out competed for every loose puck. We then woke up and won the period 2-1. We ended up winning 6-2 by outplaying them in the war zones at each end. The shots ended about 30 each and we got one pplay goal.

The adjustments to the Pounce worked really well after the players got used to everything. I switched the D around and it took a while for them to get used to their new roles.

We were still missing our top scorer and a top D but everyone should be back for the two games coming up next weekend.


Flyers Practice Plan 29-01-13

Posted on: January 30 2013 @ 02:41 PM
By: TomM

Content:

I was doing a private lesson with one of my players who I worked with even before she was on the team; so I kept the 4 small nets on the ice and we used them as obstacles on point shots and then I showed the players a move and they practiced it each way around the nets and then took a shot.

I was impressed in the private session as the player was able to handle 5 different types of balls skating around the ice. A real nervous system overload exercise. Last spring she was doing two.

This was one of the best practices we have had this year. Our captains are all back and we had 15 skaters, only missing one who has a knee injury.

We did the Czech 3-3 drill with back checking and then turned it into a transition game where two forwards on one team and a defenseman on the other gave passive support above the dots. When the original attack ended the defender passes the puck up to the new forwards who attack 2-1 vs. the new D and the original attacking forwards back check and the original defending D joins the rush making it a 3-3. The original defenders leave back to the line and 2 new F and 1 new D give passive support above the circles. I liked it much better as now I could coach instead of be a traffic cop, the defenders have to finish the play and make a breakout pass and the attackers work together to score. Most drills leave out the most important segment which is to win rebounds and get scoring chances on offense and to breakout on defense. The drill was good to isolate the situation but it is logical in my mind to make the play complete.

Two 1-1's at once is a great conditioning game. One coach has to focus and warn players if it looks like there is a collision coming as not all have their head up.

-------------------------------------------
Flyers Practice Plan Date: 29-01-13 Time: 16:00-17:30 Max Bell 2

Breakouts, conditioning, shootouts Backchecking, overspeed, passing, shooting Start with 5 minutes of Partner Shooting.

10 min.
A300 Edges and Puck Handling with a Shot


Key Points:
Move the puck all around the body in two circles going opposite directions. Finish with a shot. Use all of the edges and big moves reaching as far as possible.

Description:
1. Dark group skate down half the rink with a puck and shoot from the middle and white group skate the opposite way and shoot on the other net.
2. Skate on all of the edges and use big moves by reaching the opposite. i.e. Skate left and reach as far as you can to the right.
3. The players skating down the middle finish with a shot and then get a new puck.
4. Exercises are done while zig-zagging in and out.
a. Forward skate and alternate on the front inside edges.
b. Backward skate and alternate on the inside edges.
c. Skate forward and cross-over alternating on the outside edges.
d. Skate backward and cross-over alternating on the outside edges.
e. Open hip turn each way.
f. Slalom and reach as far as possible with the puck the opposite way.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121108114316285

10 min.
B5 Murdoch Breakout Routine All Options


Key Points:
This is a good routine to use at the start of practice instead of just skating around the ice aimlessly.
- Work for 5-10 min. and get in a lot of reps.
- D shoulder check on the way to the puck.
- Forwards funnel through middle lane and watch puck before swinging up the boards.

Description:
Wings and Defense
A. Coach shoots puck in and D gets the puck and passes to the wing who times his skating from inside to outside. D to W back to D and up to wing. Then repeat on the other side. All forwards take turns getting the pass on the wing.
B. Coach shoots the puck in and D skates back to get in while the wing times his skating from the middle to the outside lane.
The D drives the back of the net and stops and goes out the same direction making a counter pass to the wing, who returns the pass and gets another pass.Repeat on the other side.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20121101085219680

8 min.
B202 Passing Overspeed


Key Points:
Always face the puck and make as many passes as possible. On the whistle pass early to the player below the goal line. Hit the net and look for the rebound from the second shooter. Give a target.

Description:
1. Two red and two blue leave from the line.
2. Make as many passes as possible in 7".
3. On the whistle player with the puck give and go with a player below the goal line and shoot.
4. Second player get a pass from the side then give and go low and shoot.
5. On the same whistle two new players from each colour leave from the line.
6. After the shot become a passer near the net.
7. Low passers return to the line up.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121104080332117

10 min.
D100 Two 1 on 1 Games at Once


Key Points:
One coach should watch that the players won’t collide. It is important to look behind and for the player with the puck to skate away from oncoming players. This is a great game for 1-1 and conditioning.

Description:
1. Players line up along the boards one group on each side of the red stripe.
2. One player of each team leave every 15”.
3. Coach blow whistle each 15” and players play for 2 whistles (30”)
4. Pass to a teammate when the second whistle blows.
5. Only two pucks on the ice and get the puck out of the net after a goal.
6. After scoring touch the red line before defending.
7. Keep score.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080719153346728

15 min.
Team Breakout Practice
D1 Full Ice 3 Team Scrimmage


Key Points:
Give close support to the ball or puck. Defending team create speed through the neutral zone after the breakout. New defending team identify coverage when the attackers enter the zone.

Description:
Three teams play full court or full ice.
1-Red attacks vs Green at one end.
2-Green breaks out and attacks vs. Black waiting at the other end.
3-Black breaks out and attacks Red.
4-Green rests at the original end.
5-Black attack vs. Green.
They keep this rotation and play a game up to 5. Start another game at 0-0 but switch who they attack first i.e. now Green attacks Red and Red attack vs. Black and Black vs. Green. This rotation can be used to practice team play at full strength and power play and penalty kill.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=2012013110134174

10 min.
C3 Continuous 3-3 Czech U17


Key Points:
Attack with speed. Defenseman communicate who the forwards should cover. Quickly change from offense to defense. Tie up sticks in the slot. D join the rush.

Description:
1. Start with BF1, BF2, BD1 in defensive position.
2. RD1 skate between dots to the big us and pass to RF1 or RF2 and follow the attack.
3. Blue players F1-F2-D1 defend the 3-3 rush.
4. Coach whistle when rush finished.
5. D2 start a new attack the other way while original attacker Red F1-F2-D1 defend.
6. Continue this 3-3 flow end to end.

** This flow can be continued in a one puck transition game with no whistles starting with passive then active support.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121231223139495

12 min. Rotate Teams.
D4 Clear Zone to Attack


In this game all players must get onside and skate over the blue line before they turn and attack the same net. Play 4-4 with the rules.
Game One - players must face the play when passing and after scoring one goal you can't score again until all have scored.
Game Two - Rotate teams and players must make an escape move when the get the puck.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080723165245685


Flyers Practice Plan - 31-01-13 Time: 17:15-18:45 - ECTAS

Posted on: February 01 2013 @ 04:02 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Flyers Practice Plan - 31-01-13 Time: 17:15-18:45 - ECTAS

Themes:
Power Play, backchecking, D join rush Transition, goalie instruction, puck handling, 4 game playing roles scoring

7 min. – Tom, Kevin one end each
D4 Two Pass – Swiss U20


Key Points:
My favorite game to warm-up the players at the start of practice. The quicker they make the passes after regaining the puck the more scoring chances they produce. This video shows the Swiss U20 Team playing 2 Pass as a warm-up.

Description:
1. Players must stay inside the blueline and if they puck goes out the other team gets it.
2. Before scoring the offensive team must make at least two passes.
3. When the defenders regain the puck they must make at least two passes before a shot.
4. Make rules with skills for skating, shooting, passing or good habits. So the game is a template to either use as itself or modify rules to cause the players to do skills or moves within a game situation.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120313082015545

8 min.
B202 Breakout Pass and Shooting Warm up


Key Points:
Make hard passes and the forward give a target.

Options: The forward could give and go with the D after the initial pass. F could also rush the D so he has to shoot by the defender.

Description:
Done on both sides of the ice at the same time on the coaches whistle.
1. The D's pass to a F's cutting across the ice.
2. The F attacks and shoots then rebounds then screen for the point shot.
3. The D follows the play gets a pass from the forward and shoots.

Video: http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090901074924530

10 min. Natalie - Goalie Instruction at far end.
DT 400 Continuous Game of 2 on 2


Key Points:
Allow the attackers to cross the blue line before leaving. Sequence is Support-Attack-Defend-Breakout-Rest

Description:
1. Players line up behind the blue lines on each side.
2. Offensive 1 and 2 attack vs defenders 1 and 2
3. Defenders 3 and 4 leave and the support the defense from the top of the circle.
4. Offensive 1 and 2 must attack with speed.
5. After a goal, frozen puck or breakout pass 3 and 4 skate to the far blue line and turn to attack the original offensive 1 and 2.
6. Two players leave to support the defending team.
7. Continue this flow.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120224091730987

12 min. Tom G, Kevin K pp. each end.
T2 Kingston Power Play and Team Play Rotation


Key Points:
Practice options where every player gets a shot. Begin with a rotation attacking the seam between the D and the F and read what they give. If the D forces then the low play is available, if the F forces then the point is open. If the pk box is passive then there is a 2-1 at each corner, a 3-2 on each side and seams between players to attack. Force the pace by taking a shot by a different player every 3 seconds. Coach in each zone

Description:
- Line A at one end practice attack options.
- Line B at other end practice attack options. Both walk through pp 5-0.
- Line C in middle passing practice.
- On whistle line A dump the puck to the other end and breakout returning to the original end while group C replace group B at the far end and group B pass in the neutral zone.
- Repeat with group C breaking out and back and group B switch with group A who move to the middle.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121022102206766

10 min. - 2 coaches join and make it a 4-4
DT100 Continuous 3-3 With Passive Support


Key Points:
New players give passive support above the circles but can take the puck if it is loose or the offense cycles too high, just like a F covering the point would. The key for the offense is to quickly attack and the defenders to communicate on coverage.

Description:
1. Players line up in the neutral zone with D on one side and F on the other.
2. Begin with a 3-3. Two RF and one RD attack vs. opposition two BF one BD.
3. Defending team has two BF follow and support from the top of the circles.
4. Attacking team have one RD support from the blue line.
5. On a frozen puck, goal or take away the defenders pass to one of the BF above the circles.
6. Attack 2-1 vs. the R defenseman.
7. Original two RF backcheck and original BD join the 2 F on the attack.
8. Original two RF return to the line-up.
9. Play 3-3 in the zone.
10. Two new RF from defending team and one BD from attacking team give passive support after the puck enters the offensive zone.
11. Continue this flow.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130201093049702

10 min.
DT100 Backchecking Transition Game


Key Points:
Attack quickly and the defender tie up the stick on the rebound then look for the puck.

Description:
Full ice game with the defenders getting support. New attackers have to get the breakout pass inside their zone. This works on quick passes and attack or the backchecker catches up. The backchecker must tie up sticks on the rebound and don't allow a second shot. The attacker must be quick and follow the shot. Defender make a breakout pass to the supporting player in the high slot.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080719141212210

8 min.
D200 3 on 3 With 3 Pucks - Kevin shoot in pucks.


Key Points:
-Players can only shoot when the goalie is ready.
-No empty net goals.

Description:
1. Players line up outside the blue lines.
2. Coach shoots in 3 pucks.
3. Players race for pucks and battle to score and defend.
4. Hustle out of the zone on the whistle and play 20-30 seconds only.
5. Leave the puck in the net after a goal is scored.
6. Coach shoots in another puck when a goal is scored.
7. Count the pucks in the net after to determine the winning team.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=201110060922424

8 min.
D200 2-2 Shoot Either Net – Flames


Key Points:
Quick reading the rush and change the point of attack. Need quick feet and quick thinking. Get defenders to commit then change direction. No reaching penalties.

Description:
1. Two teams on blue line with one at each half.
2. Play with only one puck in the playing area.
3. Players can score at either end.
4. Keep score.

*Alternative is to play from 1-1 to 5-5 with the same rule that you can score on either net.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120717094107392

7 min.
D200 With Jokers at Both Ends


Key Points:
Regroups and give and goes are stressed.

Description:
Each team has a Joker at each end. You must regroup with your defensive joker when you gain possession on the puck and pass to the offensive joker before shooting.
A. Coach dumps in puck. Play 20-30"
1. On possesion regroup.
2. Make breakout pass.
3. Pass to low offensive joker.
4. Get open for a pass.
5. Try to score. On each turnover you must regroup.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090817103542544

10 min.
E1 One Goal Relay Race


Key Points:
Work on shooting one timers and scoring on rebounds. Good habits like face the puck, give a target with the stick on the ice.

Description:
A. 1 attack 1-0 on opposite net.
B. Pass and shoot to score.
C. Get a new puck from 2after scoring.
D. After the goal race back to the blueline and touch 2 with stick on shin pad.
F. Team to score most goals in certain time wins.
---------------------------------
Weekend games. We played the team we will play in the semi finals in three weeks. They are in third and us in second. We both have a first round bye. They have a pretty good team with one of the top three players in the league. She is always dangerous. We played the Pounce the first game and the Tsunami the second. Both games we outshot them about 30-20 but lost the first 2-1 and won the second 5-1. They have a lot more trouble when we really pressure them. I switched who played RD with our more offensive D in the second game.
I will attach the shot and +/- charts from our last 4 games. We were 2-2. The game vs. Edmonton we were missing all of our captains and were not competitive.


Re: Diary of a Season 2012-13

Posted on: February 06 2013 @ 02:45 PM
By: TomM

Content:

It was a good session and the focus was on individual offensive drills. I took video of Seans two activities and will post a link when I prepare them. I had a good meeting with Digit Murphy, the coach of the Boston Blades after practice. She came and watched the ice time.
--------------------------------------------
Flyers Practice Plan Date: 05-02-13 Time: 16:00-17:30 Venue: Max Bell 2

Individual offensive skills using drills and Games. Passing, shooting, skating, Puck handling.

8 min.
D1 Shinny – Russian U20

Key Points:
Everyone plays at once. No offsides and no rules accept good sportsmanship. Great for developing puck handling skills and recovery after a hard practice.

Description:

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120302093038534

10 min. 5 no puck and 5 puck and a shot.
A300 Edges and Puck Handling with a Shot


Key Points:
Move the puck all around the body in two circles going opposite directions. Finish with a shot. Use all of the edges and big moves reaching as far as possible.

Description:
1. Dark group skate down half the rink with a puck and shoot from the middle and white group skate the opposite way and shoot on other net.
2. Skate on all of the edges and use big moves by reaching the opposite. i.e. Skate left and reach as far as you can to the right.
3. The players skating down the middle finish with a shot and then get new puck.
4. Exercises are done while zig-zagging in and out.
a. Forward skate and alternate on the front inside edges.
b. Backward skate and alternate on the inside edges.
c. Skate forward and cross-over alternating on the outside edges.
d. Skate backward and cross-over alternating on the outside edges.
e. Open hip turn each way.
f. Slalom and reach as far as possible with the puck the opposite way.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121108114316285

5 min.
B202 Puck Handling and Shooting


Key Points:
Make hard fakes both ways, fake shots, tight turns. Have quick feet. Cross the blue line and either shoot or pass and shoot. Add variations after shooting.

Description:
1. Players line up behind the blueline; coach in the middle.
2. On the whistle leave from diagonal lines and make hard fakes around the coach.
*Add other variations such as a shot pass.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=2009082320511162

6 min.
B202 Nzone Regroup 1-0 and 2-0


Key Points:
Start by exchanging the puck and always face the puck when pivoting for the return.

Description:
1. Players face each other and regroup in the neutral zone 1-0 then 2-0 and then attack. Start with exchanging the puck and then the breakout pass.
2. On the 2-0 practice chipping by the D to enter the zone or simply enter 2-0 with crosses.
3. You can add defense by having the shooter go out and defend the nextattack.
4. When just shooting follow the rebound then circle back for the rebound from the next shooter.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090813080849924

10 min. Sean individual offensive skill drill

10 min.
Sean ind. Offensive skill game.


7 min.
D4 Baggo - Czech U20 (each end)


Key Points:
Face the puck. Get open for a pass and give a target. Goals on one timer shots.

Description:
1. Offensive team must pass within one second.
2. Goals must be on one timers.
3. If the puck goes outside of the zone the other team gets it.
4. On transition to offense there must be at least one pass before you can shoot.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/filemgmt/index.php?id=83

8 min. – Greens switch ends.
DT400 Game of Quick Transition


Key Points:
The resting players attack right away when they get a pass and the original attackers must communicate and cover one attacker each.

Description:
1. Offensive team attacks 3 on 3. It can be 1-1, 1-2, 2-1, 2-2 or 2-3 also if the coach wants to practice these situations. Up to 5-5 is possible.
2. On transition to offense the defenders pass to their teammates waiting behind the blue line.
3. Attack right away (don’t have to wait for teammates to get onside in this game.)
4. Original attackers now defend and communicate with each other on how to stop the attack.
5. After a goal the defenders is allowed to pass to the new attackers.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120416092419455

12 min. 2 x 6 min. games
DT400 Perry Pearn Game Rotation


Key Points:
This game allows the coach to focus on the attack or defending deep in the zone. You can play this game in situations from 1-1 to 5-5. It is a great rotation to practice specialty teams if you have 3 lines because it gives the players some rest and they alternate between pp and pk (one F would leave the zone) The defenders have to clear the zone with control of the puck. With situations over a 3 on 3 I would move the resting players back to the far blue line.

Description:
1. Players line up within a stick length of the red line if you have 2 groups or only ½ ice; otherwise behind the red or far blue line.
2. Three players attack three defenders.
3. Defenders must carry the puck out of the zone before passing to team waiting team mates.
4. Three new players attack vs the original offensive players.
5. Keep score, implement skill (only forehand passes) or team play rules (goals originate from below the goal line).

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090726102318992

6 min.
B500 One Timers


Key Points:
Square up for the shot and have the stick back as the pass is being made. Follow through with the whole body to the net and the lead knee pointing to the target.

Description:
1. One leave the line and get a pass from 2 on the off wing and shoot.
2. Two leave after passing and get a pass from three.
3. Continue this rotation and progressively increase the speed of the passes.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20090812164222165

8 min.
E1 Shootout Race – Each End


Key Points:
Players must skate hard and battle for net side body position. Player who wins the puck must protect it and the checker fight for defensive side without taking a penalty. They should play any rebound in the slot.

Description:
1. Players start behind the blue line dots and race around markers near the red line.
2. The coach passes a puck in the centre near the blue line.
3. Two players battle to get the puck and score.
4. Continue the battle while one attacks and one defends.
5. Play any rebound directly in front of the net.
6. One group vs. the other and keep score.

https://skydrive.live.com/?cid=bd6fa116988317e9#cid=BD6FA116988317E9&id=BD6FA116988317E9%213934


Re: Diary of a Season 2012-13

Posted on: February 08 2013 @ 03:07 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Flyers Practice Plan Date: 7-02-13 Time: 17:15-18:45 Venue: ECTAS

Focus:
Offensive team play. Middle drive, regroups Puck handling, passing, breakouts, penalty shots

6 min.
B6 or B4 Crossover Skating and Puckhandling


Key Points:This is a great skating and puck handling warm up drill. Many variations can be used with the puck or in skating tasks.Do a different skill in each zone. Keep the feet moving it is crossover in large #8's and not tight turns. You can also do as a B6 and start out of opposite corners.

Description:
Cross Overs and Puck Handling Skills
Do figure 8's in each zone.
1. Quick hands and quick feet fwd
2. Skate backwards
3. Face the far end transition skate and go in for a shot.
4. Carry puck using only the forehand
5. Use only the backhand.
6. Heel to heel turns facing the inside and finish with a shot.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20120418155124444

6 min.
C1 Breakout-Attack-Breakout 1-0 or 2-0


Key Points:
Time the support to be available when passer gets control of the puck. Give a target, call for the pass, skate to the big ice inside the dots when you get the puck.

Desription:
A. At both ends player 1 shoot, rebound and pick up a puck from the corner.
B. Player 2 be available for a breakout pass from the middle or the boards. It could two players one in the middle and one on the boards.
C. Player 1 pass to player 2.
D. Player 2 go down and shoot on the net and rebound.
E. After shooting player 2 get a new puck from the corner and make a breakout pass
on the other side of the ice for either a 1-0 or 2-0 rush.
*Option: Player 2 could regroup with 1 before attacking.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080720203338539

8 min.
B5 Double Cross-Drop-Pass-Shoot Options


Key Points:
Cross over skate, leave the drop pass as still as possible. Pass quickly. Going to the net for a bang in or practicing a one timer from the high slot is also easy to do.

Description:
Option One: Double Drop-Pass-Shoot
-R1 skate around circle and cross-drop to R2
-R 2 gain the blue line and cross-drop to R1.
-R1 either shoot or pass to R2 who shoots.
-Rebound.
- Add after shooting the give and go pass with the next two players. i.e. 1 pass to you and you pass to 2 who shoot.
- Add that after the shot the player who did not shoot skate out and defend a 2-1 vs. the next two players.

10 min.
B5 Regroup 3-0, Middle Drive-Pro


Key Points:
Defense move quickly and hinge the pass up the middle. Pass hard. Centre give the stick and skates as a flat target. Middle drive hard to the net.

Description:
1. All the players are inside the middle circle.
2. Red D1get a pass from a Red F2.
3. Red D hinge and pass D1 to D2.
4. D2 pass to F2 supporting in the middle.
5. F2 pass to F1 on the strong side.
6. F1 gain blueline and pass wide to F3.
7. F2 middle drive skating hard to the net.
8. F3 shoot and all crash the net for a rebound.
9. Blue repeat in the other direction.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=2012100209041983

15 min.
D100 – 4 on 4 Scrimmage


Key Points:
Divide the team into two groups of 8 and play 4 on 4 stressing the middle drive.

Description:
1 . LD play defense and all others forward. 3 D each team.
c. 4 on 4 each team and then a 3' time out.
e. Coaches agree on a situation they want to focus on.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080723183918140

10 min.
D100 Transition Game with Defense Joining the Attack


Key Points:
The defender make a pass and jump into the play right away. The new defender has to realize it is a late developing 2-1 and the attackers must make a play early before the defenders get support.

Description;
a. Start with #2 attacking vs #1.
b. #3 support on defense and #4 support the attack.
c. After a goal or a defensive breakout #3 attack vs #4.
d. The original defender #1 join the attack (#2 return to the lineup when the puck crosses the blue line.) This creates a 2-1 in the neutral zone.
e. #5 and 6 join the play after the attack crosses the blue line and actively play a 3-2. #6 play the offensive point position.
f. After a goal or breakout continue the flow with 5 vs 6 and 4 joining the rush.

You can run this game with all players playing F and D or if you have D joining the F could line up on one side and the D on the other side in the nzone. Starting with a 2-1 and two players supporting the D and one the attack would make a 3-3 on the
original attack and a 3-1 in the nzone and a 4-3 in the offensive zone. Starting with a 2-2 attack and the offense getting support from 2 D and the defense from 2 F it would make a 4-4 on the original attack. One D joining the rush makes a 3-2 in the nzone and 5-4 at each end. (D stay up on the attack)
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130209093428688

10 min.
DT100 Backchecking Transition Game with a Regroup in the Neutral Zone


Key Points:
Attack quickly and the defender tie up the stick on the rebound then look for the puck.

Description:
Full ice game with the defenders getting support. New attackers have to get the breakout pass inside their zone. This works on quick passes and attack or the backchecker catches up. The backchecker must tie up sticks on the rebound and don't allow a second shot. The attacker must be quick and follow the shot. Defender make a breakout pass to the supporting player in the high slot.

Add the attackers turn back and regoup with the defenders who passed them the puck and then continue the attack vs the original attackers. It is best to start with the original transtion game and then add regroup if the coach whistles. The backeckers should race back to defensive side and then play good gaps.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080719141212210

15 min. Sean 2/3 ice and Natalie at one end with goalies. One goalie at a time.

Sean: A game where half the whites and half the green pass in the nzone while the other half waits along the boards in one end. On the whistle whoever has the puck attack and the opposite colour in the zone defends. Continue this flow until all players are in the zone. Defenders stay with their man and play man on man defense. The play should continue until the whistle blows.
Variation: Players in the neutral zone play keepaway and whomever has the puck on the whislte attack.
I tooo a video and will attach.

10 min. Regulation Shootout
Player start on the whistle and the goalie starts on the goal line.
Count how many each team scores.
It is important for the goalies to get used to starting from the goal line and the shooters to wait for a whistle to prepare for shootouts and penalty shots.


Re: Diary of a Season 2012-13

Posted on: February 09 2013 @ 02:51 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Flyers Practice Plan Date: 09-02-13 Time: 17:45-18:45 Venue: Village Square

Lines: Notes:
3-7-11, 19-17-18, 5-15-12,
5-4, 14-16, 2-8
Breakouts, pp, pk, offensive skills.

6 min.
B6 – 3 Shots, 3 Zig zags, 3 Shots


Key Points:
3 Leave from diagonal corners about 2" apart, skate around circle then shoot, get a pass from the other corner, skate 3 zig zags betweeen the blue line and the top of the cricles the fill the 3 lanes and shoot.

Description:
1. Make sure to leave about 2 seconds between shooters so the goalie has time to get set.
2. Follow the shot for a rebound before getting the pass.
3. Do skills while zig zagging 3 times such as;
a, carry the puck with the hands and feet moving all the time.
b. carry the puck only using the forehand side of the stick.
c. only use the backhand side of the stick.
d. transition skate facing the far end forward to backward to forward.
e. skate backward.
f. 360 degree turns.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20091019154513105

5 min.
B5 1-0 Outside-Middle Shots- Czech U17


Key Points:
Keep skating, give a target and pass hard and pass while moving. Hit the net and follow the shot. Rebound for the next shooter.

Description:
1. All players and pucks are in the middle.
2. One player leave from each side.
3. Player 2 pass to player 1 who circles between the red and blue line.
4. Player 1 skate in and shoot after the third pass.
5. After shooting player 1 circle back and rebound for the next shooter.
6. Alternate sides and player 3 leaves after the first pass.
7. Circle left and right so shots come from both in the middle and the outside lanes.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130115154629528

7 min.
B5 Murdoch Breakout Routine A to F


Key Points:
Defenseman Shoulder check on the way to read the forechecking pressure. Forwards read the play from the middle lane and time it so they are skating up the boards for the pass. If the forechecker follows you behind use the reverse.

Description:
Greens breakout and one end and Whites from the other. Half ice and return the puck to the coach.
A-B are breakouts with one D. Go, wheel, reverse to F, counter.
C. Coach dumps the puck in and the D gets in and drive skates hard to the back of the net and up the ice between the dots. Pass D to W to D to W.
D. Coach dumps the puck in and the D gets it and drive skates to the back of the net to draw the forechecker then passes back off the boards to the other D who has called reverse from the front of the net. D2 passes to W to D2 to W and out.

B5 Full Ice Breakout-One D
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20080720200745971

B5 Breakouts With 2 D
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20080720200746400


10 Kingston Team Play Rotation

Power play at one end 5-0 and pp vs. pk at other. Rotate each 4 min. Sean and Kevin focus on pk, Tom G on pp.

6 min.
D1 Full Ice 3 Team Scrimmage


Key Points:
We have 3 lines of 5 players. Give close support to the ball or puck. Defending team create speed through the neutral zone after the breakout. New defending team identify coverage when the attackers enter the zone.

Description:
Three teams play full court or full ice.
1-Red attacks vs Green at one end.
2-Green breaks out and attacks vs. Black waiting at the other end.
3-Black breaks out and attacks Red.
4-Green rests at the original end.
5-Black attack vs. Green.

They keep this rotation and play a game up to 5. Start another game at 0-0 but switch who they attack first i.e. now Green attacks Red and Red attack vs. Black and Black vs. Green. This rotation can be used to practice team play at full strength and power play and penalty kill. The team in the middle rotate the lw, rw and then C sitting out when they are killing penalties. They wait outside the blue line for a breakout pass to attack the other way.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=2012013110134174

10 min.
4-4 full ice. Stress middle drive and D to D.

Players change on their own.

5 min.
D200 Angling Game


Key Points:
Checkers create an angle on puck carrier and take away their time and space with body on body and stick on the puck.

Description:
1. D200 line-up outside blue line.
2. On whistle carry the puck behind the net and checkers leave and create good angles.
3. Play 20-30 seconds.
4. Puck carrier can try to come out short side.
5. Keep score. Play to a certain score and losing team do something like push ups. Play a short series.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20111005185904685

5 min.
D200 Straight on Angling Game

Key Points:
Both teams go behind their net on the whistle. Defenders close the gap and maintain the defensive side.

Description:
D200 Straight on Angling Game
1. Teams are lined up behind blue line.
2. On the whistle each team skates behind their net.
3. Attackers try to score and defenders gain a tight gap and D side.
4. Play a cross ice game for 20-30"
5. On whistle pass to coach and the other team is on offense first.
6. Play from 1-1 to 3-3 also using odd man situations.

5 min.
E1 D200 Shootout Game


Key Points:
As soon as there is a rebound or goal the defender pick up the puck and attack the other way.

Description:
1. Coach dumps the puck in and players race for it.
2. Puck carrier try to score defender defend.
3. On rebound or goal defender attack other way.
4. Shooter must get outside of the blue line.
5. When teammate onside then first player in the line backchecks.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130109085731126
-------------------------
Had our final game of the regular season on the road vs. the top team in our division. It was hard fought. We tied it 1-1 with 2:30 left and they scored to win it a minute later. Shots 20-21. Either team could have won this one. We now have a bye next weekend. Tonight we did the post test on fitness and skills testing that we did for research at the U of Calgary. We did first test in October. This week practices. Monday-Tuesday- Wed spin class - Thurs - Friday - Sunday (a 2:45 long ice time and we will use the last 75 min.) The next week Tuesday-Thurs on ice practice and Wed Spin. Friday start the 3 of 5 round with a home game and away on Sat. The rest of the series is the next weekend - 3 games if needed.


Flyers Practice Plan 11-02-13

Posted on: February 12 2013 @ 03:33 PM
By: TomM

Content:

This was the first of 7 practices before we start the playoffs in two weeks. So the theme was offensive skill and game situation plus fitness that comes from a lot of skating.
---------------------------------

Flyers Practice Plan Date: 11-02-13 Time: 20:00-21:15 Venue: Bowness

Notes:
Shoot, pass, score, moves, puck support

10 min.
B202 Luhowy Puckhandling and Passing Circuit


Key Points:
Control the puck and “lock and load” when you carry the puck; meaningmove it from in front to your side. Keep a strong skating position with the knees bent and head up.

Description:
Line up behind the top of the circle with 2 or 3 players facing 2 or 3 players at the other end. Have between 2 and 4 groups depending on the number of players. A group of 4 is the smallest.
1. First player in each line skate towards the other line and pass to the far line.
2. Exchange pucks and pass to opposite line.
3. Skate to red line tight left turn and pass to original line.
4. Repeat but make a tight right turn.
5. Carry toward other player and head and shoulder fakes with legs wide then pass.
6. Alternate knee touches and pass to far line.
7. Carry the puck and do a lateral push to face the other player and exchange pucks.
8. Exchange pucks twice then pass to the far end.
*Other passes like backhands, saucer or moves like in the feet, toe drag can
be added.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=2008072023504376

6 min.
B6 Jursi Skate-Pass-Shoot

Key Points:
This is a drill that Russian Olympic coach Vladimir Jursinov used when I was coaching with him in Austria. The goal is to get players to practice passing and shooting while they skate. Puck handling-passing-shooting should be seamless.

Description:
1. A and B skate down the ice in passing while skating.
2. A is on the inside and continues on with a shot while skating.
3. B pivots facing the puck and continues the other direction passing to C.
4. B shoots and C partners with D the other way.
# This can be done in tandem on both sides of the ice.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120227085711281

10 min.
A200 Russian Puck Handling – and Finnish with a Shot

Key Points:
The idea of stick handling is to protect the puck from the opponent or to make him/her reach or straighten their knees and then go around them. Vladimir Jursinov is probably the most successful skills coach in the world. This Soviet and Russian Olympic coach has helped more than 65 players into the NHL from his teams. He leads a group of 15-20 years olds in a fake shot sequence. We also did big moves and separating the movement of the upper and lower body.

Description:
Players are in four lines and do multiple fake shots and moves, then finish with a shot.
. Practice Faking a slapshot with a hard back swing.
. Fake a slapshot and go around opponent on the backhand side.
. Fake a slapshot and go around opponent on the forehand side.
. Fake a slapshot and then do a backhand tight turn around opponent.
. Fake a slapshot and reach out like you are going around the opponent on your forehand and then pull the puck quickly to your backhand and go around opponent.
- Added fake inside then pull the puck to the inside near your feet and a little behind as you walk around opponent.
- Also practiced the puck in front of the toes cross ice in partners.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/search.php

12 min.
D4 - one zone games of 4-4 and 3-3.

Good habit rules. i.e. Make escape move before a pass or shot, goals only can come on one timers. Only one pass allowed in the offensive end so you must score if you get a pass.

12 min.
D1, 3 on 3 Scrimmage


I had planned more activities but the 3-3 scrimmage was going so well and the players were working so hard that we did this for the rest of practice. The pdf has the original plan.

Rules:
Change on their own. Games up to 3 goals. If you score then get the puck and go the other direction and the other team can't defend until they get to the red line.
Games ended. Green 3-0, White 3-0, White 2-1.


Re: Diary of a Season 2012-13

Posted on: February 13 2013 @ 01:15 PM
By: Iceman

Content:

Hi Tom,

The attachments are not opening....can you help a brother out?

Thanks for all you do!

Iceman
----------------------------------
Iceman, I just clicked on a pdf and a video link above and they work for me. Have you updated your adobe reader. The videos are in wmv format and apple needs a program to run them.
I hope you solve the problem.


Flyers Practice Feb. 12, 2013

Posted on: February 13 2013 @ 02:53 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Just a note: I was checking the Austrian hockey site to see how the Red Bulls are doing and noticed that one of my U17 - 93 born players had been named prospect of the year in the Austrian pro league. They listed the past winners and I noticed another player born in 92 that played on the same team won last year. So those two, an NHL Rookie of theYear, a Hobey Baker winner, 3 other world junior players and a few more NHLers are among the list of players that I have been one of the coaches who helped them along their way.
So don't worry. If they play a lot of games and transition games in practice instead of waiting in line it Will Not Ruin their carreer aspirations. It may even help them learn the game by playing the game.
A bit of a sarcastic comment but I still get weird looks and sometimes complaints when mothers watch my practices and see little Johnny having so much fun. Hockey and fun don't go together in many peoples view.

I put the first link in with the puck handling because Yashin demonstrates how the Russians learn to separate the movement of the upper and lower body. Juhani is running the session with the Russian Olympic coach Yursinov. These exercises make all of the difference in loosening the upper body. Most North American players are very tight in the upper body and follow the puck instead of the puck going one way and the body the other. Head and shoulder fakes are also incorporated. Later Finnish coaches lead young players in the exercises. This is one of the most important things I have learned working with these two IIHF Hall of Fame coaches.
-------------------------------------------
Flyers Practice Plan Date: 12-02-13 Time: 17:15-18:45 Venue: Max Bell

Notes:
Regroup, agility skating, puck handling, Fitness, team play, breakouts, goalie pass

10 min.
A2-A200 Puck Handling and Skating Practice from Finland


Description:
This is a video on the ABC site uner Puck Handlingwith agility skating
1. A200 formation and Yashin leads the big moves warm demonstrating the skill and the kid's follow.
2. A2 skating drills for balance and edge control.
3. A200 Russian Big Moves exercises. Pro player demonstrate the big moves and the players follow.

Key Points:
This practice was done at Juhani's hockey school in Mikkeli, Finland. It is beautiful lake country where he has his summer place. The focus is on Big Moves with Good Hard Fakes when puck handling. Many pro's including Yashin helped with his camps. Juhani is in the IIHF Hockey Hall of Fame and is a legend in Finland. Another IIHF hall of famer Vladimir Yursinov is the one who developed this big moves warm up. He is a Russian hockey legend as a player and coach. Between them they have developed about 70 NHL players.

In my coaching experience these puck handling exercises are the most effective way for players to develop good hands. They can be done off ice as well. Big moves and handling the puck all around the body with big fakes and protecting the puck with the body are the essentials to being a good offensive player.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080722140651119

10 min.
B6 Sean, agility skating, pass and shooting drill.


http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130213105522431

10 min.
DT100 1-1 then 2-2 with the attackers skating back before crossing the blue line.


- This causes the Defenders to transition skate back to forward to back.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130213165526595

15 min.
B5 Murdoch Breakout Routine A - B - C- D - E - F


Key Points:
This is a good routine to use at the start of practice instead of just
skating around the ice aimlessly.
- Work for 5-10 min. and get in a lot of reps.
- D shoulder check on the way to the puck.
- Forwards funnel through middle lane and watch puck before swinging up the boards.

Description:
Wings and Defense
A. Coach shoots puck in and D gets the puck and passes to the wing who times his skating from inside to outside. D to W back to D and up to wing. Then repeat on the other side. All forwards take turns getting the pass on the wing.
-Do this with all breakout options and both D.
-Add shoot at the goalie and he sets up the puck or passes to the D.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20121101085219680

30 min.
D100 Game of 3-3
-players change on their own.
-play games to 3.
-after a goal the team that scores gets the puck and goes the other way. Defending team can’t check until they touch the red line.
-Second game is 4-4 with same rules.

10 min.
E1 Shoot Until You Score Race 1-0, 2-0, 3-0


Key Points:
Players should attack quickly, pass early, shoot to score. Goalies must battle and never Description:
1. Place one puck on the bluelines for each player on the bench according to the largest 2. One player leaves from the bench and must keep shooting until a goal is scored.
3. Scoring player skate hard to the bench and touch the boards with the stick and a 4. Repeat after a goal and attack 3-0.
5. All three players rush back and touch the boards and then repeat.
6. The team that scores all the pucks first wins.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20121026142749173

5 min.
Individual shooting practice.

Explanation/Notes:


Flyers Practice Plan Date: 14-02-13

Posted on: February 16 2013 @ 03:55 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Flyers Practice Plan Date: 14-02-13 Time: 17:15 Venue: ECTAS

Notes:
Battling, passing, shots, moves, regroup, 3 on 3

8 min.
D1 Two puck game

All players on the ice. Start with 2 pucks and when a goal is scored put in the other puck.
-another goal is scored it goes to one puck and they play a one puck game.
-team that scores two goals wins.

10 min.
Big moves and add going around the 4 small nets with fakes and finish with a shot.


7 min.
B6 1-0, 2-0, 3-0 Small Horseshoe

Key Points:
This is a great timing drill with good flow for early in the practice. Pass hard and get your top hand away from your body. Call for the pass. Give your stick and skates as a target.

Description:
1. Skate to the top of the circle and pass.
2. Continue and get a pass from the other end.
3. 2-0 first player passes and swings wide and second player skates nto the middle lane. Pass to the player in the middle.
4. Player in the middle one touch the puck up to the wide man. Stay onside.
5. Shoot and go for the rebound.
6. On the 3-0 the third player goes up the boards and enters as the high man. Add a trailer pass to the high man as the first shot.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20120301081936833

10 min.
100 2 on 2 with Regroup


Coaching Comment
This is a great transition game to work on all four game playing roles in all three zones.

Key Points:
Move through the neutral zone quickly and create a 2 on 1. Defenders talk to identify coverage. Line up in D100 Formation along the boards behind the bluelines at each end. Continuous flow game. Keep score. Vary the situations 1-1 to 3-3.

Description:
1. Full ice attack 1 Offense vs 1 Defender.
2. Offensive players 2 follow the play and are jokers who can't skate in but must pass or shoot within 1 second. Defenders only cover the original attackers and tie up their sticks and box out.
3. After a goal or a breakout the defenders 1 attack the jokers.
4. Create an offensive 2-1 on a wide defender. If coach blows the whistle regroup with 3 who follow the play thru the nzone.
5. 1 finish the attack and try to score while 3 follow the play and support.

*Coach can change the situation from 1-1, 1-2, 2-1, 3-2, 3-3 or add a dump in to work on the forecheck or rules like goals must come from plays below the goal line to work on the cycle or low coverage.

20 min.
D100 – 3-3 Game
- Games to 3 goals.
- Scoring team get the puck and go the other way.
- New defenders must skate to blue line after a goal.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130216093006572

10 min. Shooting
Sean – Defenseman drill at one end. Point shots.
Tom – Forwards – snapshot.

8 min.
D200, 3 on 3 Game With No Passing

Key Points:
This game demands that the puck carrier dangle and beat the opponents with dekes, fakes, change of pace, pivots while teammates screen, pick and go for rebounds.

Description:
1. Play a cross ice game of 2-2 to 5-5.
2. Extra players line up along the blue line.
3. Shifts 20-30" and pass to teammate coming on on the whistle.
4. Coach put in a new puck on a goal.
5. Rule is NO PASSING.
6. Line mates support by setting screens and picks and going for rebounds.
7. Keep score.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121119180047556

8 min.
D200 Small Area Battling Game

Key Points:
Transition between the four game playing roles. 1-player with the puck, 2-player supporting on offense, 3-player checking the puck carrier, 4-player covering other offensive players. They are also transitioning between the three game situations
0-loose puck, 1-offense, 2-defense.
Players always have a role to play in the transition between game situations and must think quickly and use good technique.

Description:
1. Put the nets facing each other about 10 metres apart. Play from 1-1 to 3-3 including odd man situations. Extra players wait at one side.
2. Coach pass a puck in and the players battle and try to score.
3. Take 20 second shifts,
4. Keep score.
5. Coach shoot in a new puck on a goal or if the puck is shot out of the zone.
6. Focus on the players battling with good habits and quick decisions.
7. Race out when the time is up and leave the puck in play (option is to pass to a teammate who is first in line.)
8. Nets can be close to the boards or in open ice.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20101224071639751

9 min.
E1 Rebound Game

This is a scoring contest that seems to be loved by players of all ages everywhere in the hockey world.

Key Points:
Make quick shots and one timers and goalie read the play.

Description:
1. Players line up on both side in the slot with one shooter at the top.
2. Play games to 5 between the goalie and shooter.
3. If the goalie freezes the puck or it hits the boards behind or at the side the goalie gets a point.
4. Players get a point by scoring a goal on a shot or rebound. Only one pass is allowed.
5. Shooter stays if he scores and players rotate if there is no goal.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080723202833407


Flyers Practice Plan Date: 16-02-13

Posted on: February 16 2013 @ 04:01 PM
By: TomM

Content:

At all of our practices we are now playing 3 on 3 with the players changing on their own and on a goal the scoring team gets the puck and attacks the other way. Defenders have to touch the red line before they can check. It has been a really good pace. We play games to 3 and sometimes a series 2 of 3. If players work hard and support the puck on offense and cover a player on defense then there isn't a better practice activity.
----------------------------------------------------------------
Flyers Practice Plan Date: 16-02-13 Time: 20:30-21:45 Venue: Henry Viney

Game situation, pass, shoot, skate Puck handle, D join rush, F backcheck

5 min.
A3 Puck Handling Nervous System

Overload
Key Points:
Keep the balls and pucks within a stick length and move them around the body. Stress rolling the wrists big moves.

Description:
1. Combine using up 2 pucks.
2. Partner pass two pucks at once.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080722204547549

6 min.
A300 Edges and Puck Handling with a Shot


Key Points:
Move the puck all around the body in two circles going opposite directions. Finish with a shot. Use all of the edges and big moves reaching as far as possible.

Description:
1. Dark group skate down half the rink with a puck and shoot from the middle and white group skate the opposite way and shoot on the other net.
2. Skate on all of the edges and use big moves by reaching the opposite. i.e. Skate left and reach as far as you can to the right.
3. The players skating down the middle finish with a shot and then get a new puck.
4. Exercises are done while zig-zagging in and out.
a. Forward skate and alternate on the front inside edges.
b. Backward skate and alternate on the inside edges.
c. Skate forward and cross-over alternating on the outside edges.
d. Skate backward and cross-over alternating on the outside edges.
e. Open hip turn each way.
f. Slalom and reach as far as possible with the puck the opposite way.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121108114316285

6 min.
B6 – 3 Shots, 3 Zig zags, 3 Shots


Key Points:
3 Leave from diagonal corners about 2" apart, skate around circle then shoot, get a pass from the other corner, skate 3 zig zags betweeen the blue line and the top of the cricles the fill the 3 lanes and shoot.

Description:
1. Make sure to leave about 2 seconds between shooters so the goalie has time to get set.
2. Follow the shot for a rebound before getting the pass.
3. Do skills while zig zagging 3 times such as;
a, carry the puck with the hands and feet moving all the time.
b. carry the puck only using the forehand side of the stick.
c. only use the backhand side of the stick.
d. transition skate facing the far end forward to backward to forward.
e. skate backward.
f. 360 degree turns.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20091019154513105

18 min.
DT100 - 2 on 1 - D Join Attack and F Backcheck


Key Points:
This is a continuous 2-1 with one D joining the rush and the high F backchecking. Forwards enter the zone to support the defense and then attack and one backcheck.
Defense support from the point, defend and then join the attack. Coach can vary the number of F or D to create different situations in each zone.

Description:
1. Red F1 and F2 attack 2-1 vs blue D1.
2. Blue F1-F2 support D1, Red D1 support F1 and F2.
3. Play 3 on 3
4. On Transition Blue F1-F2 attack Red D1.
5. Red F1 Backcheck and Blue D1 join the rush.
6. Blue D2 and Red F3-F4 support when puck enters the zone.
7. Play 4 on 4 and continue flow.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121104082851444

45 min.
D100 Scrimmage Full Ice – Alternate Ends


Key Points:
Take short shifts and play with good habits. Move the puck to players in better position than you. On defense play tight gaps and everyone cover an attacker.

Description:
1. Play 3 on 3 with the extra players on the bench.
2. Scoring team get the puck right away and attack the other net. Defenders must rush back to the red line before they can check the players.
3. Keep score and play games to 3 and situations like of 2 out of 3 series.
4. If you have at least 16 players play some 4-4 or with at least 20 skaters 5-5 as long as the pace of the game is intense.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130216093006572


Flyers Practice Plan Date: 17-02-13

Posted on: February 18 2013 @ 04:17 PM
By: TomM

Content:

We had a 2:45 min. ice slot and I let Terry Johnson use the first half with his Pee Wee team. His two daughters play on the team. I only had one assistant so TJ stayed on the ice and helped with practice. Terry Is a former NHL defenseman who I coached at university with and has helped me with teams throughout the years. We had 13 skaters and one goalie on this holiday weekend practice.
-------------------------------------
Flyers Practice Plan Date: 17-02-13 Time: 13:15-14:30 Venue: Henry Viney

Notes:
This is a one goalie practice and we will work on skills and game situations.

10 min.
A2 Russian Puck-Handling Warm-up with Shots While Working on Edges and Balance Exercises


Key Points:
This can be done every time players go on the ice to expand their muscle memory. The point of these exercises is to increase the size of the reach with the stickhandling moves, and to separate the upper and lower body. This is one of the most important exercises a player can do to develop puck handling skills. All the moves can also be practice off ice with various kinds of balls and pucks.

Description:
• From the A2 formation, players skate down the ice in 3 or 4 groups; practice big moves with the puck. One player leave and the next player go when he/she gets past the top of the circle. Finish with a shot from your lane no closer than the hash marks.
. Go one way then the other and do a different skill each time.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20120417103210440

6 min.
B500 Overspeed 2-0 with a Pass


Key Points:
Players must challenge themselves out of their comfort zone. Make as many moves as possible and continue until they have shot and looked for a rebound. Take the pass and shoot right away without over handling.

Description:
1. Line up along boards on one side.
2. Players 1 and 2 start on the goal line.
3. Players 3 and 4 leave and make moves at top speed.
4. Coach whistle every 7" and they players attack the net.
5.Closest attacker give and go with 1 or 2.
6. Second closest do a tight turn then give and go with 1 o 2.
7. With only one goalie go one way only.
8. After passing return to the back of the line.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20111004075623113

10 min.
B5 Murdoch Breakout Routine A to F with shot at far end.


Key Points:
This is a good routine to use at the start of practice instead of just skating around the ice aimlessly.
- Work for 5-10 min. and get in a lot of reps.
- D shoulder check on the way to the puck.
- Forwards funnel through middle lane and watch puck before swinging up the boards.
Shoot at the far end and then pass to the point for a shot.

Breakout with one D and a point shot.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080720200745971

Breakout with 2 D and a point shot.
http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080720200746400

10 min. Forwards
B500 Cut Backs and Escape Moves


Key Points:
Protect the puck with the body on offense. Cut back turning toward the boards. Defender stay lined up with the back of the inside shoulder and stick on the puck.

Description:
1. Leave on the whistle and practice cut backs, tight turns. Go to the net on the second whistle while the next players leave.
2. Two players leave and the second player stays on the D side with the stick on the puck and gives passive resistance.
3. This is a battle and the defender tries to get the puck. On the second whistle whoever has the puck go to the net.

*Without goalies both sides can go at once and with a goalie alternate sides. Players switch sides after doing both offense and defense.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=2011041612155482

Defense and LW – Point shots using 4 small nets. Shoot from spaces 0-1-2 after a pass from the point.

10 min.
T4 D400 - 2 on 2 Below the Goal Line


Key Points:
The attackers create scoring chances with speed, deception, give and goes, crosses and picks. Defenders must talk, stay net side, sticks in lanes and one the puck.

Description:
Start from the corners, one attacker with the puck and another come towards him below the goal line. 2 defenders are in front and must cover them. Keep track of goals vs the number of attempts. Play for 5-10 seconds.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20090903113821934

10 min.
DT400 Support-Regroup-Hinge-Attack-Defend


Key Points:
New players give defenders support from the top of the circles as if they were wingers. If the puck is carried above there they can.

Description:
1. Red 1-2 attack Blue 1-2.
2. Blue 1-2 defend.
3. Pass to Blue 3-4 after a turnover or goal.
4. Blue 3-4 breakout the other direction.
5. Red 1-2 follow the play as defenders
6. Blue 3-4 regroup with Red 3-4.
7. Red 3-4 hinge at least once.
8. Red 3-4 pass to Blue 3-4.
9. Blue 3-4 attack vs Red 1-2.
10. Red 3-4 follow attack to support Red 1-2.
11. Blue 5-6 move to nzone ready to regroup with Red 3-4.
Continue this rotation of support-regroup-hinge-attack-defend.

10 min.
DT400 Transition Game of Low Battles with Point Support


Key Points:
Great game to practice cycling, going to the net, screening, tipping, point shots, shot pass, one timers on offense. On defense you have the low zone coverage and communication skills. As well as individual techniques like sealing the stick to the outside, tying up sticks, boxing out, switching, all from the defensive side.

Description:
1. One team is lined up behind each faceoff dot. From one to tree players leave at a time.
2. The next player in line plays the joker at the point and must pass or shoot within a second. Defenders do not check the joker as he can’t go in and score.
3. The coach dumps the puck in or shoots on net and the teams race for the puck. Whoever gets the puck can shoot right away.
4. When the defending team gets the puck they must pass to their joker at the point to transition to offense.
5. If the puck is shot out of the zone the coach passes to the non offending joker.
6. Play 20-30” and on the whistle the players pass to the coach and skate hard out of the zone before the coach shoots a new puck in.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090726102317243

10 min.
DT400 One Pass with Varying Numbers


Key Points:
Players must read the numerical situation and communicate. Attackers must quickly take advantage of either their scoring chances or the ability to pass to the line to add an attacker.

Description:
1. Teams line up outside the blue line.
2. A coach tells each team how go on the whistle.
3. Coach dumps the puck in to start.
4. On transition to offense there must be at least one pass before a shot.
5. Up to 4 players can be on one team.
6. Add players by passing to the player at the front of the line.
7. Play 30" and on the whistle pass to your line.
8. On a goal the coach shoots in a new puck.

*Add players by making a give and go pass to the line and that player joins the attack.


Flyers Practice Plan 19-02-13

Posted on: February 21 2013 @ 12:19 AM
By: TomM

Content:

Flyers Practice Plan Date: 19-02-13 Time: 16:00-17:30 Venue: Max Bell 2

Notes:
Scoring, 2-1, passing, shooting, puck handle Regroup, 1-1, 2-1, middle drive, rebounds

7 min.
B6 Puck Handling Skills, Zig-Zag


Key Points:
Separate the movement of the upper and lower body by doing these exercises to loosen the shoulders.

Description:
1. Players line up in diagonal corners in the B6 Formation.
2. Skate in big arcs down the ice and perform different tasks with the puck. These are some examples but players can practice every possible move both forehand and backhand.
a. Keep the hands and feet moving quickly.
b. Skate arcs with the puck only on the forehand side of the blade.
c. Skate arcs with the puck only on the backhand side of the blade.
d. Do heel to heel glides one way then the other.
e. Fake passes then protect the puck.
g. Fake shots.

Finish with a shot at each end of the ice.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080722082806653

8 min.
B6 Pass and Replace x 3


Key Points:
Pass while skating then turn and face the player who is passing to you. Shoot before the hash marks and follow the shot for a rebound.

Description:
A. 1 pass to 2 and follow the pass and turn and face 5 for a pass.
B. 2 pass to 3 and follow the pass.
C. 3 pass to 4 and follow the pass.
D. 4 skate in and shoot-rebound- go to the corner.
# Do 2 or 3 minutes from each side. Alternate task by requiring backhand or saucer passes or a move before passing , etc.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20110413082013321

8 min.
B600 2-0 Quick Ups

Key Points:
Have good habits with the shooter looking for a rebound. New attacker on the puck side should face the passer and player on the weak side cut across the ice and give a target. Move the puck up ice quickly and call for passes.

Description:
. #1 and 2 attack 2-0.
2. # 3 and 4 follow the attack up ice.
3. Shooter follow shot for rebound,
4. Other attacker get a new puck and pass to 3 or 4.
5. Repeat other way with shooter following the shot and the other attacker passing to 5 or 6.
6. Continue this flow.

8 min.
B6, 2-0, Regroup, 2-1 Back


Key Points:
Forwards pass to the outside and skate to the middle with the puck. Face the puck all the time. D pivot with the puck. D work with the goalie and only give away poor shots. Forwards attack with speed and make the first play early. One high one low; one fast one slow.

Description:
1. F1 and F2 leave from diagonal corners.
2. D1 leave from diagonal bluelines.
3. F's regroup with D in nzone.
4. F's skate to far blue-D follow.
5. F's turn at own blueline.
6. F's attack 2-1 vs. D1's.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20101007155153211

14 min. Sean-Kev With Defense 6 and 5
Tom – Tom – F
- Middle drive 3-0
- 2-0 Shoot far pad for rebound.
- 2-0 passes from behind the net.

10 min.
Sean – everyone.


DT100 Read-Act to Situation 1-1 to 3-3

Transition game where the players must read the ever changing situations and act to make them even.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=2013022010052621


20 min.
D100 Scrimmage Full Ice – Alternate Ends


Key Points:
Take short shifts and play with good habits. Move the puck to players in better position than you. On defense play tight gaps and everyone cover an attacker.

Description:
1. Play 3 on 3 with the extra players on the bench.
2. Scoring team get the puck right away and attack the other net. Defenders must rush back to the red line before they can check the players.
3. Keep score and play games to 3 and situations like of 2 out of 3 series.
4. If you have at least 16 players play some 4-4 or with at least 20 skaters 5-5 as long as the pace of the game is intense.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130216093006572

10 min.
E1 Rebound Game

This is a scoring contest that seems to be loved by players of all ages everywhere in the hockey world.

Key Points: Make quick shots and one timers and goalie read the play. Description:
1. Players line up on both side in the slot with one shooter at the top.
2. Play games to 5 between the goalie and shooter.
3. If the goalie freezes the puck or it hits the boards behind or at the side the goalie gets a point.
4. Players get a point by scoring a goal on a shot or rebound. Only one pass is allowed.
5. Shooter stays if he scores and players rotate if there is no goal.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20080723202833407


Re: Diary of a Season 2012-13

Posted on: February 22 2013 @ 02:58 PM
By: TomM

Content:

This is our last practice before play-offs so we went through team play situations like dzone face-offs and some ozone options. Practiced pp, pk and 6 on 5 as well as going through all of the breakout options. The three team scrimmage is a great way to practice team play when you have three lines. I blew the whistle when the puck got into one end and everyone stopped and we did face offs and reviewed the coverage. Then they play until I went through all three lines on both sides of the ice. For specialty teams we adjust by having the lw then rw then C stay outside the blue line so it is a 4-5 at each end. Two stay in nzone if it is a 5-3. Everyone practices the options in the Kingston Rotation and I want a shot every 3 seconds and the line goes through all of the options so all players get shots. Then one line breaks out - returns works on the pp again while the middle group switches with the group at the far end. So each line gets 2x2 min. of pp options and a pp breakout.
-----------------------------------------------
Flyers Practice Plan Date: 21-02-13 Time: 17:15-18:45 Venue: ECTAS

Notes:
Breakouts, face-offs, skating, passing, Shooting, goalie instruction, 6-5, pp, pk,

8 min.
A2 Skating Warm-up for Edges and Balance

Key Points: Good players can move in all directions efficiently because they and use all edges and have great balance on the ice. Routines for skating, puck handling, shooting and passing are efficient ways for a coach to quickly review the foundation skills and allow the players to get a lot of reps and improve at their own rate.

Description:
A2 Formation - Players start at one end and skate to the other end. - inside edges - out and in using a snowplow. - inside edges - sculling one leg at a time on the inside edges. - outside and inside edges - slalom with the skates together and a good knee bend. - balance and edges - one length of the ice on each leg.
Repeat the same sequence but skate Backward.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20110726073836113

The same warm up with 12-14 year olds.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.comhttp://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20110423080435937

8 min.
B6 1-0, 2-0, 3-0 Small Horseshoe


Key Points:
This is a great timing drill with good flow for early in the practice. Pass hard and get your top hand away from your body. Call for the pass. Give your stick and skates as a target.

Description:
1. Skate to the top of the circle and pass.
2. Continue and get a pass from the other end.
3. 2-0 first player passes and swings wide and second player skates into the middle lane. Pass to the player in the middle.
4. Player in the middle one touch the puck up to the wide man. Stay onside.
5. Shoot and go for the rebound.
6. On the 3-0 the third player goes up the boards and enters as the high man. Add a trailer pass to the high man as the first shot.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=20120301081936833

10 min.
B5 Murdoch Breakout Routine A to F - 1 and 2 D


Key Points:
This is a good routine to use at the start of practice instead of just skating around the ice aimlessly.
- Work for 5-10 min. and get in a lot of reps.
- D shoulder check on the way to the puck.
- Forwards funnel through middle lane and watch puck before swinging up the boards.

Description:
Wings and Defense
A. Coach shoots puck in and D gets the puck and passes to the wing who times his skating from inside to outside. D to W back to D and up to wing. Then repeat on the other side. All forwards take turns getting the pass on the wing.
B. Coach shoots the puck in and D skates back to get in while the wing times his skating from the middle to the outside lane. The D drives the back of the net and stops and goes out the same direction making a counter pass to the wing, who returns the pass and gets another pass.Repeat on the other side.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/video.php?n=20121101085219680

10 min.
DT100 Continuous 1-1, 2-1, 2-2

Key Points: New players don't leave the line-up until the puck enters the offensive zone. On dump outs no one change but go back and regroup with the same players. Changes occur when the puck is over the offensive blue line or controlled over the defensive blue line.

Description:
1. Attack 1-1 with D getting support from 1 F and F from one D.
2. Defending F1 cover the point.
3. New offensive D join and play point.
4. On transition attack 1-1 thru nzone.
5. Continue flow with new O and D support. -Continue the flow of 1-1 in nzone and 2-2 at each end. -Dump-ins and regroups can be added.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090726085538618

12 min.
T2 Kingston Power Play and Team Play Rotation


Key Points:
Practice options where every player gets a shot. Begin with a rotation attacking the seam between the D and the F and read what they give. If the D forces then the low play is available, if the F forces then the point is open. If the pk box is passive then there is a 2-1 at each corner, a 3-2 on each side and seams between players to attack. Force the pace by taking a shot by a different player every 3 seconds. Coach in each zone

Description:
- Line A at one end practice attack options.
- Line B at other end practice attack options. Both walk through pp 5-0.
- Line C in middle passing practice.
- On whistle line A dump the puck to the other end and breakout returning to the original end while group C replace group B at the far end and group B pass in the neutral zone.
- Repeat with group C breaking out and back and group B switch with group A who move to the middle.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121022102206766

15 min.
D1 Full Ice 3 Team Controlled Scrimmage – Face-off


Review
Key Points:
Give close support to the ball or puck. Defending team create speed through the neutral zone after the breakout. New defending team identify coverage when the attackers enter the zone.

Description:
Three teams play full court or full ice.
1-Red attacks vs Green at one end.
2-Green breaks out and attacks vs. Black waiting at the other end.
3-Black breaks out and attacks Red.
4-Green rests at the original end.
5-Black attack vs. Green.

Stop on coaches whistle and do face-offs in each zone. They keep this rotation and play a game up to 5. Start another game at 0-0 but switch who they attack first i.e. now Green attacks Red and Red attack vs. Black and Black vs. Green. This rotation can be used to practice team play at full strength and power play and penalty kill.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=2012013110134174

15 min.
T2-4 D400 PK and PP and 6 on 5-One End Goalie Practice at other end.


Key Points:
PK outnumber the PP on loose pucks in the corner. PK skate in straight lines. Always one pk denying the mid point and one in front. PP change the point of attack when outnumbered. Rotate the mid point player to the middle or the back door.

Description:
1. Start with everyone in position on the pp and pk.
2. If pk gets the puck start the pplay again from a different spot.
3. On the pplay either the puck or the player moves.
4. PK always lead with the stick on the puck and in passing lanes.
5. PP always give at least two easy outlets.
6. PP give low support when puck on half wall.
7. PK cut the ice in half and force passes that must beat two defenders.
8. Work 30-60" rotate on whistle.
*Game situation: defenders shoot puck to other end.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20101206083505234

15 min.
Regulation shootout starting on the whistle.

When I coached in the women's pro league the goalies told me that a real shootout is very different than when we do shootouts after practice when the players continually have breakouts. They wanted to practice like a penalty shot or shootout where they must be on the goal line and the player starts on the whistle. It allows them to practice how far to go out and time backing up at the right pace so they are deep in the crease on a deke and out for a shot. We did white vs. green with each shooting at one net and kept score.


Playoffs

Posted on: February 24 2013 @ 05:28 PM
By: TomM

Content:

We played the first two games of the 3 of 5 series Friday and Saturday. I couldn't ask the team to play harder but sometimes the 'hockey gods' just are not with you. Our manager tracks the shots on rink diagrams and puts who shoots and from where. Goals are circled. So I know it is accurate because that is all he is doing.

Game one we period shots were 19-5, 13-5, 13-3 for a 40-13 total. They scored on a good shot following a turn over in the first. We attacked in waves but didn't score. They got an empty netter with 12 " left.

Game two was an away game with period shots 15-7, 9-5, 11-10. We both score one in the first. They got another in the second just after a pplay when the player coming on did not assume the role of the low supporting F. We didn't score any more and lost 2-1.

The last 3 games are next weekend so it will be a week to build confidence and get ready for winning one shift at a time.

What other situation can teach young people how to deal with adversity better than this.


Re: Diary of a Season 2012-13

Posted on: February 25 2013 @ 03:32 PM
By: tony89

Content:

Quote by: TomM

We played the first two games of the 3 of 5 series Friday and Saturday. I couldn't ask the team to play harder but sometimes the 'hockey gods' just are not with you. Our manager tracks the shots on rink diagrams and puts who shoots and from where. Goals are circled. So I know it is accurate because that is all he is doing.

Game one we period shots were 19-5, 13-5, 13-3 for a 40-13 total. They scored on a good shot following a turn over in the first. We attacked in waves but didn't score. They got an empty netter with 12 " left.

Game two was an away game with period shots 15-7, 9-5, 11-10. We both score one in the first. They got another in the second just after a pplay when the player coming on did not assume the role of the low supporting F. We didn't score any more and lost 2-1.

The last 3 games are next weekend so it will be a week to build confidence and get ready for winning one shift at a time.

What other situation can teach young people how to deal with adversity better than this.


Sorry about the losses. My team was knocked out of our playoffs last night 4-3 after out shooting their opponent by 10. Our theme was also one shift at a time.
--------------------------------------------

Sorry to read about your team Tony. One more practice tonight and then we have the weekend series to redeem oursleves.


Flyers Practice: 26-02-13

Posted on: February 28 2013 @ 02:32 PM
By: TomM

Content:

Tuesday we worked a lot of low zone game situations, reviewed the middle drive and doing things quickly. Sean adapted his SAG game with two nets so the players had to read the multiple situations.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------

Flyers Practice: 26-02-13 Time: 16:00-17:30 Venue: Max Bell 2

Goals: Middle drive, goalie practice, skate, shoot, Puck handle, regroup, hinge, point shots, score

8 min.
A300 Edges and Puck Handling with a Shot

Key Points:
Move the puck all around the body in two circles going opposite directions. Finish with a shot. Use all of the edges and big moves reaching as far as possible.

Description:
1. Dark group skate down half the rink with a puck and shoot from the middle and white group skate the opposite way and shoot on the other net.
2. Skate on all of the edges and use big moves by reaching the opposite.
i.e. Skate left and reach as far as you can to the right.
3. The players skating down the middle finish with a shot and then get a new puck.
4. Exercises are done while zig-zagging in and out.
a. Forward skate and alternate on the front inside edges.
b. Backward skate and alternate on the inside edges.
c. Skate forward and cross-over alternating on the outside edges.
d. Skate backward and cross-over alternating on the outside edges.
e. Open hip turn each way.
f. Slalom and reach as far as possible with the puck the opposite way.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20121108114316285

7 min.
B202 Pass to All Players


Key Points:
Give and go pass. Give a target and make eye contact before passing.

Description:
1. Blues start with half on each blue line.
2. Reds weave around in the middle.
3. Red pass to each blue player.
4. Alternate sides each pass.
5. Switch every 30".
*Compete to see who makes the most passes.
http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/filemgmt/index.php?id=99

8 min.
DT400 Game of Quick Transition


Key Points:
The resting players attack right away when they get a pass and the original attackers must communicate and cover one attacker each.

Description:
1. Offensive team attacks 3 on 3. It can be 1-1, 1-2, 2-1, 2-2 or 2-3 also if the coach wants to practice these situations. Uptto 5-5 is possible.
2. On transition to offense the defenders pass to their teammates waiting behind the blue line.
3. Attack right away (don’t have to wait for teammates to get onside in this game.)
4. Original attackers now defend and communicate with each other on how to stop the attack. 5. After a goal the defenders is allowed to pass to the new attackers.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120416092419455

7 min.
B600 Regroup, Hinge, Quick Up-Detroit


Key Points:
Hinge and push the puck up the ice quickly. Strong side F stretch and weak side give middle support.

Description:
1. F1 skate and regroup with D1.
2. D1 skate to the middle and pass to D2 in the wide lane.
3. D2 quick up to F2 who stretches on the strong side boards.
4. F1 and F2 attack. Repeat the other way with F3 regrouping with D3.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20101128092923497

20 min.Sean
DT400 Multiple Situations in Small and Smaller Area


Key Points:
This SAG goal is to practice READING Game Situations by constantly changing the situation from 1-3 on offense or defense at once. Set one net up on the goal line below the faceoff dot facing up ice and the other net facing the corner just inside the circle. The game is continuous and thecoach shoot in a new puck on a goal.

Description:
A. Blue 1 and 2 attack Red 1 and 2 in the corner and Blue 3 and 4 attack Red 3 and 4 from the red line.
B. Coach whistles and Red 1 and 2 carry the puck out to the red line and attack the other net vs. Blue 3 and 4. C. Coach shoots in a new puck and Red 5 and 6 attack vs. Blue 1 and 2 in the corner. Red 3 and 4 return to the line.

Option:
Vary the number of players from 1 to 3 and switch up who starts on offense half way through the game. 1-1, 2-2, 1-2, 2-2, 1-3, 2-3, 3-3, 3-2, 3-1

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/album.php?aid=7&page=1

10 min.
DT400 Active Jokers at Point


Key Points
Each team has two jokers at the point. Introduce the game allowing jokers to check jokers and then add that jokers can come in for one timer shots. This transition game creates three situations. In the first part the players at the point must get open and take a shot or make a pass. The defender practices covering the point. In the second part add that the jokers at the point can come in for a one timer shot

Description:
Part One: Each team has jokers at the point.
1. When defenders regain puck they must pass to the point to go on offense.
2. Jokers can shoot or pass.
3. Jokers can check the opponents Joker.

Part Two:
4.Jokers can jump in for one timer shots.
5. Defending joker should cover the attacking joker when he jumps in.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20120603101824103

10 min.
Goalies with Nat. – 1 G in net. Middle Drive on one net. Goalie at other.


B5 Regroup 3-0, Middle Drive-Pro

Key Points:
Defense move quickly and hinge the pass up the middle. Pass hard. Centre give the stick and skates as a flat target. Middle drive hard to the net.

Description:
1. All the players are inside the middle circle.
2. Red D1get a pass from a Red F2.
3. Red D hinge and pass D1 to D2.
4. D2 pass to F2 supporting in the middle.
5. F2 pass to F1 on the strong side.
6. F1 gain blueline and pass wide to F3.
7. F2 middle drive skating hard to the net.
8. F3 shoot and all crash the net for a rebound.
9. Blue repeat in the other direction.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=2012100209041983

10 min. Goalie practice at one end.
DT400 Support-Regroup-Hinge-Attack-Defend


Key Points:
New players give defenders support from the top of the circles as if they were wingers. If the puck is carried above there they can.

Description:
1. Red 1-2 attack Blue 1-2.
2. Blue 1-2 defend.
3. Pass to Blue 3-4 after a turnover or goal.
4. Blue 3-4 breakout the other direction.
5. Red 1-2 follow the play as defenders
6. Blue 3-4 regroup with Red 3-4.
7. Red 3-4 hinge at least once.
8. Red 3-4 pass to Blue 3-4.
9. Blue 3-4 attack vs Red 1-2.
10. Red 3-4 follow attack to support Red 1-2.
11. Blue 5-6 move to nzone ready to regroup with Red 3-4. Continue this rotation of support-regroup-hinge-attack-defend.

10 min.
E1 D200 Shootout Game


Key Points:
As soon as there is a rebound or goal the defender pick up the puck and attack the other way.

Description:
1. Coach dumps the puck in and players race for it.
2. Puck carrier try to score defender defend.
3. On rebound or goal defender attack other way.
4. Shooter must get outside of the blue line.
5. When teammate onside then first player in the line backchecks.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130109085731126


Feb 28 Flyers Practice

Posted on: March 01 2013 @ 06:07 PM
By: TomM

Content:

This practice is to prepare for 3 games on the weekend. Lots of team play review.
------------------------------------------
Flyers Practice Plan Date: 28-02-13 Time: 17:15 – 18:45 Venue: ECTAS

Notes:
Team play review: Forecheck, pp, pk, breakouts

6 min.
Russian big moves with a shot
.

8 min.
B6 3-0 Weave With D Regroup

Key Points:
-Skate with the puck to the big ice between the dots and then pass.
- Pass and follow your pass.
-Stay wide until you get the pass.

Description:
1. Half the forwards at each end in three lines behind the goal line with the D waiting at the bluelines. Whites at one end and Blues at the other.
2. Middle player start by skating toward the strong side and pass to the wing and follow the pass skating behind the new puck carrier.
3. Wing skate to the big ice between the dots and pass to the far wing then follow the pass.
4. Wide wing skate to the big ice and pass to the original centre who is now in the opposite wide lane.
5. The D is skating backwards thru the middle zone and the puck is passed back to him for a regroup the other direction.
6. On regroup one player supports on the strong side boards, one mirrors
the puck in the middle lane and one is in the wide lane.
7. D makes the pass and follow the attack into the zone.
8. The group at the other end leaves after the D passes up ice.

Options.
a. Add another D.

10 min. in one direction each D breakout once and then attack 5-0. Pass back to coach after first breakout. Green, white and Red Line.
B5 Breakout 5-0 with Point Shot

Key Points:
Coach calls the various options, up, across, wheel, reverse. Each line go one direction then dump into the other end or alternate ends.

Description:
1. Players skate in nzone then coach dump in
2. D make a D to D or D to F pass and follow the play.
3. All forwards touch the puck on the rush and shoot. then screen, tip and one timer position.
4. Coach pass to D who skate across line and pass to partner who shoots or shot pass.

15 min.
T4, 5-2 Forecheck and Regroup - Czech U17


Tsunami Review – Goalies at other end.
Start with 2 D who skate forward to the blue line and then backward. The coach dumps the puck in and 5 players forecheck vs. the 2 D and two coaches who are outlets along the boards. When the D pass to a coach, or on a goal the puck is dumped down to the far blue line where the attackers regroup and attack 5-2 and play until the attack is finished. Rotate so all the lines and D pairs practice.

mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130228092314602

20 min. one end pp review-other pp. vs. pk 5-4, 5-3.
6 min. each line.


T2-4 D400 Specialty Team Practice

Key Points:
Closest player must pressure the puck in straight lines from the net out. Skate back when the puck is passed. Stick on the ice in the passing lane. Communicate.

Description:
1. A power play and a penalty killing unit at each end of the ice.
2. The coach passes in a puck from the line or from a face off dot.
3. Controlled scrimmage where everyone stops on a whistle.
4. If the puck is frozen, a goal or it is cleared put in a new puck.
5. After about 45 seconds do the same thing from the other end while the pp and pk units switch at the original end.

http://hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20090806144404128

12 min.
D1 Full Ice 3 Team Scrimmage – All Situations


Key Points:
Give close support to the ball or puck. Defending team create speed through the neutral zone after the breakout. New defending team identify coverage when the attackers enter the zone.

Description:
Three teams play full court or full ice.
1-Red attacks vs Green at one end.
2-Green breaks out and attacks vs. Black waiting at the other end.
3-Black breaks out and attacks Red.
4-Green rests at the original end.
5-Black attack vs. Green.

They keep this rotation and play a game up to 5. Start another game at 0-0 but switch who they attack first i.e. now
Green attacks Red and Red attack vs. Black and Black vs. Green. This rotation can be used to practice team play at full strength and power play and penalty kill.

http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?s=2012013110134174

18 min.
Individual work – face-offs, rebound,shooting passing etc.



OT Loss

Posted on: March 02 2013 @ 05:37 AM
By: TomM

Content:

Lost 2-3 in overtime. Went into third 1-0 but took 3 penalties in a row and they got 2 goals. We evened it up but couldn't score on our chance. They scored on a 5-5 goal where they won a 1-1 battle in front and got the rebound to score.

Lots of great effort. It was a hard fought series. They made a good adjustment with the pplay. and didn't take stupid penalties like they did all season. We only got 2 power plays to their 5. It was a evenly played game. The best one they played in the series.

I think the key was game one where we dominated and outshot them 41-13 but got shut out. Our confidence went down and theirs up. We only scored 3 goals in three games. Not many for 109 shots on goal after scoring 96 goals in 32 games which is a 3 goal a game average. Defensively we allowed them less than 2 GA (5 GA in 9 periods then a OT GA) a game which is our goal but we fell far short of the 3 GF per game that you need to win.

The team worked really hard and that is all a coach can ask for. You don't always win the games you should and you don't always lose the games you should.

Shot and plus/minus sheet is attached. They outshot us 4-2 in OT.

Video of Game One: http://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/mediagallery/media.php?f=0&sort=0&s=20130302111133565
-----------------------------------------------------------------

So that is it for the diary of the 2012-13 season.


CIS Nationals - and a few ex games

Posted on: March 07 2013 @ 02:55 PM
By: TomM

Content:

I just read an article about this weekends CIS National Championship at the University of Toronto.

The U of Calgary is going as the second place team from Canada West. They have an older team with Team Canada captain Hayley Wichenheiser. They also have some former WWHL players who were named to the all star team. Amanda Tapp is a goalie who played for the Oval Extreme and when it folded played for me with the Rockies. Stephanie Ramsay made the first all star team D. She played for the Rockies as well. They recruited one of my forwards last season but she isn't eligible yet as she is still in high school because her parents started her a year later in school due to her late November birthday.

The good news for the Flyers is that two our our defense from last season are playing in the Nationals, one for Queen's and one for St. Francis Xavier. I think that is great.

We were very young this season with 6 skaters and one goalie who were first year, six skaters second year and only 4 skaters and one goalie third year. One already is in university, one F has committed to PEI, another forward has been in discussion with an NCAA school and a really good defenseman is deciding on a university in Halifax. It looks like the goalie is going to do a graduate year in a eastern prep school in the USA.

The sport school here go after our players and 19 or the top 30 are attending these really expensive places. $30-35 000 per year. I don't understand why they want to go to these places. The public system pays the teachers really well here and the standard of education is very high; so it is hard for private schools to match their pay and security . The advantage is extra ice time and going to high profile tournaments.

I am meeting tonight with the executive of our organization to dicscuss how we can increase the ice time for practice and chose our teams earlier so we can go to fall tournaments where the players can be seen by more recuiters.

We played two sports schools at the Notre Dame tournament this year. Lost 0-4 to one (two goals in the last 5 min.) and won 3-2 against the other. Give us 5 of those players who left us to play at these places and we would be as good as anyone. (We lacked natural goal scorers. We usually outplay and outshoot teams but we need a little less Swedish and a little more Finish)

There seems to be status in going to these sports schools but they put a big financial burden on the families. We want to give a comparable program for 1/4 of the cost.
===================================
We finished the season with two exhibition games vs. the Banff Academy which is a sports school The first game was tough. We had not been on the ice for two weeks. I let them just go out and play without structure and we struggle the first two periods. We reviewed the 1-3-1 Pounce Forecheck before the third and played even with them. The second game we only had eleven skaters but they were eleven of our best players. We played well and won 4-3 in a shoot-out.

One player is now committed to play at UPEI and another is going to Dalhousie. A graduating goalie is going to play her graduate year at a prep school in Pennsylvania and I don't know if our top scorer wants to play at university. She has been talked to by Union College but she wasn't at the Banff games so I don't know what happened with that. She is a really solid small player with great skills and a scoring touch. She led the entire league in playoff scoring 2011-12.

It will be a tough sell for us because people in this city have lots of money and they believe they can purchase excellence and the more money the spend the greater the result. They should really be focused on how dedicated their chlld is and how good is the coaching they will get.

Our job as an organization is to stop lamenting about losing players and to offer equal development opportunity at a fraction of the cost and four of the five schools they go to the high school gril's have to move away from home. So they can stay home as well.


Hockey Coaching ABCs - Forum
https://www.hockeycoachingabcs.com/forum/viewtopic.php?showtopic=5908